Seat Exeo Edition 02.10 2010 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 317
1 of 317

Summary of Content for Seat Exeo Edition 02.10 2010 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF

EX EO

O W

N ER

S M

A N

U A

L

In gl

s 3

R5 01

20 03

A M

(0 2.

10 )

( G

T9 )

3R 50

12 00

3A M

EX EO

In gl

s (

02 .1

0)

Portada EXEO.qxd:Maquetacin 1 30/3/10 11:49 Pgina 3

SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com- prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehculo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y la tcnica. Por esta razn, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basndose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente Manual.

Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la informacin en el momento de la realizacin de la impresin. Salvo error u omisin, la informacin recogida en el presente manual es vlida en la fecha de cierre de su edicin.

No est permitida la reimpresin, la reproduccin o la traduccin, total o parcial, sin la autorizacin escrita de SEAT.

SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos segn la ley sobre el "Copyright". Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificacin.

Este papel est fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.

SEAT S.A. - Reimpresin: 15.02.10

Portada EXEO_interior.qxd:maquetacin 30/3/10 12:20 Pgina 1

efully to familiarise yourself with

ill help preserve its value.

s and parts changes.

, as it should be kept with the

Exeo_EN.book Seite 1 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Foreword This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read car

your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling w

For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modification

If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner

vehicle.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 2 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Contents 3

emory for driver seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ead restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

rmrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

uggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

oof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

rink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

shtray*, cigarette lighter* and power points* .

ompartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

onditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

afety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

tarting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .

andbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

arking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ruise control* (Cruise control - GRA) . . . . . . . .

anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

utomatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ctical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lectronic Stability Programme (ESP) . . . . . . . .

rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ower steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ervotronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ing and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

unning-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . .

137

139

141

142

145

146

147

152

155

155

165

165

165

166

167

169

170

173

176

176

185

185

185

189

190

190

192

192

193

Exeo_EN.book Seite 3 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Contents

Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety first . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .

Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Knee airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning and indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speed warning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . .

Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seats and storage compartments . . . . . . . . . .

Manual adjustment of the front seats . . . . . . . .

Electric adjustment of front seats* . . . . . . . . . . .

Lumbar support* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M

H

A

L

R

D

A

C

Air c

2

Driv

A

S

Ig

S

H

P

C

M

A

Pra

Inte

E

B

P

S

Driv

R

E

5

6

7

7

7

10

15

16

18

18

19

22

26

28

28

31

34

37

41

44

46

46

48

51

57

57

57

59

65

71

75

82

85

87

89

91

91

96

96

98

103

104

104

106

108

111

115

115

123

126

128

130

133

133

135

136

Contents4

Exeo_EN.book Seite 4 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Economical and environmentally friendly driving

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removable towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . .

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle exterior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories, parts replacement and

modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mobile phones and radiotelephones . . . . . . . . .

Athermic windscreen* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Releasing the tank flap manually . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tyre repair* (Tyre-Mobility-System) . . . . . . . . . .

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing bulbs. Halogen headlights . . . . . . . .

Changing bulbs. Bi-Xenon AFS headlights . . . .

Replacing rear bulbs (in side panel) . . . . . . . . .

Changing tail light bulbs (on rear lid) . . . . . . . .

Side turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sun visor light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .

Outstanding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 PS) . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 PS) . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 2.0 147 kW (200 PS) Automatic .

Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (210 PS) . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0 88 kW (120 PS) CR . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0 105 kW (143 PS) . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0 125 kW (170 PS) . . . . . . . . . .

Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

194

196

197

197

200

208

208

209

214

217

217

217

218

218

219

219

220

221

221

222

224

228

230

232

233

237

237

246

246

248

253

257

259

259

266

272

277

280

281

282

283

283

286

289

289

289

291

292

292

293

293

294

295

296

297

299

300

301

303

305

Manual structure 5

Manual structure What you should know before reading this manual This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the

vehicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will

not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.

As this is a general manual for the EXEO, some of the equipment and func- tions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or versions of the model. These may vary or be modified depending on tech- nical and market requirements, which is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the

equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual

refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when

otherwise indicated.

The equipment marked with an asterisk** is fitted as standard only in certain

versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some versions, or are

only offered in certain countries.

All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol

does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

Indicates that the section is continued on the following page.

Indicates the end of a section.

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn you about possible dangers of accident or injury.

Caution Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to

your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information on the protec-

tion of the environment.

Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 5 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Content6

Content This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organised

way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong to

chapters (e.g. Air conditioning). The entire manual is divided into five large

parts which are:

1. Safety first Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat

belts, airbags, seats, etc.

2. Operating instructions Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your

vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-

able climate in the passenger compartment, etc.

3. Practical tips Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and

certain problems you can solve yourself.

4. Technical data Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.

5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help

you to rapidly find the information you require.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 6 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Safe driving 7

Safety fir Technical data

isted here are part of the vehicle's

tem. They work together to help

in a wide variety of accident situa-

our passengers should not be left to chance. In

safety features incorporated in your vehicle are

f injury. These are just a few of the safety

timised for all seats

seats

e front seat belts

nd rear seat backrests*

only

or ISOFIX child safety seats on the outer rear

straints

n

res are harmonised to provide you and your

sible protection in accident situations.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 7 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Safety first

Safe driving

Brief introduction

Dear SEAT Driver

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and

warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety

and for your passengers' safety.

WARNING

This manual contains important information about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the owner's manual also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.

Ensure that the owner's manual is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Safety equipment

The safety equipment l

passenger restraint sys

reduce the risk of injury

tions.

Your safety and the safety of y

the event of an accident, the

capable of reducing the risk o

features in your SEAT:

Three-point seat belts op

Belt force limiters for the

Belt tension devices for th

Front airbags

Side airbags in the front a

Head-protection airbags*

Knee airbag for left guide

ISOFIX anchor points* f

seats

Height-adjustable head re

Adjustable steering colum

These individual safety featu

passengers with the best pos

Safe driving8

are protected with suitable safety seats

belts page 46.

. Inform your passengers as to how they

rrectly. Make sure that your passengers

8.

g?

ctly related to how you drive, and can

assengers in the vehicle.

r the safety of the vehicle and all its occu-

e is impaired in any way, you endanger

ers . Therefore:

istracted by passengers or by using a

riving ability is impaired (by medication,

ns and speed limits and always maintain

ehicle in front.

ed to suit the road, traffic and weather

long trips. Do not drive for more than two

Exeo_EN.book Seite 8 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

However, they can only be effective if you and your passengers sit in the

correct position and adjust and use the safety equipment properly.

Therefore, this chapter explains why these safety features are so important,

how they can protect you, what you need to remember when using them and

how you and your passengers can gain the most benefit from them. There are

also a number of important safety warnings that you and your passengers

should always observe in order to minimise the risk of injury.

Safety is everyone's responsibility!

Before setting off

The driver is responsible for the safety of the passengers and

the safe operation of the vehicle at all times.

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note

the following points before setting off:

Make sure that all lights and indicators are working properly.

Check tyre pressure.

Make sure that all windows are clean and give good visibility to

the outside.

Secure all luggage and other items carefully page 16.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Adjust the front seat, head restraint and mirrors correctly.

Make sure that the head restraints for all passengers are

adjusted to the correct position.

Make sure that children

and properly worn seat

Sit in a correct position

should sit page 10.

Fasten your seat belt co

do the same page 1

What affects safe drivin

Safety on the road is dire

also be affected by the p

The driver is responsible fo

pants. If your ability to driv

yourself and other road us

Do not let yourself be d

mobile phone, etc.

Never drive when your d

alcohol, drugs, etc.).

Obey all traffic regulatio

a safe distance to the v

Always adjust your spe

conditions.

Take frequent breaks on

hours without a stop.

Safe driving 9

Safety fir Technical data

ired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci-

Exeo_EN.book Seite 9 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.

What affects driving safety?

Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style and

the personal behaviour of all occupants.

As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.

When your concentration or driving safety is affected by any circum-

stance, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road ,

for this reason:

Do not allow yourself to be distracted from the traffic around you,

e.g. by passengers or telephone conversations.

Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-

tion, alcohol, drugs).

Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and

weather conditions.

When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least

every two hours.

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are in tension.

WARNING

When driving safety is impa dents increases.

Safe driving10

reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

he following adjustments for the driver:

el so that there is a distance of at least 25

g wheel and the centre of your chest

rwards or backwards so that you are able

, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with

angled .

ch the highest point of the steering

nt so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

head fig. 2.

upright position so that your backrests

Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver

Exeo_EN.book Seite 10 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Proper sitting position for occupants

Proper sitting position for driver

The proper sitting position for the driver is important for a

safe and relaxed driving.

For your own safety and to

accident, we recommend t

Adjust the steering whe

cm between the steerin

fig. 1.

Move the driver seat fo

to press the accelerator

your knees still slightly

Ensure that you can rea

wheel.

Adjust the head restrai

level as the top of your

level as the top of your

Move the backrest to an

completely against it.

Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel

Safe driving 11

Safety fir Technical data

for front passenger

st sit at least 25 cm away from the

airbag can provide the greatest

he event that it is triggered.

reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

the following adjustments for the front

ger seat back as far as possible .

n upright position so that your backrests

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

r head page 13.

otwell in front of the front passenger seat.

ecurely page 18.

e passenger airbag in exceptional circum-

r seat page 133.

tion of the front passenger can lead to severe

er seat so that there is at least 25 cm between sh panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, otect you properly.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 11 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fasten your seat belt securely page 18.

Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under

control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver seat page 133.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.

Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel page 10, fig. 1. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.

Proper sitting position

The front passenger mu

dash panel so that the

possible protection in t

For your own safety and to

accident, we recommend

passenger:

Move the front passen

Move the backrest to a

completely against it.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

Keep both feet in the fo

Fasten your seat belt s

It is possible to deactivate th

stances page 23.

Adjusting the front passenge

WARNING

An incorrect sitting posi injuries.

Adjust the front passeng your breastbone and the da the airbag system cannot pr

Safe driving12

otwell in front of the rear seat.

curely page 18.

d restraint system when you take children

6.

ear seat are not sitting properly, they could

properly in order to achieve maximum protec-

e optimal protection when backrests are in an engers are wearing their seat belts properly. are not sitting in an upright position, the risk itioning of the seat belt increases.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 12 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.

To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats

Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their

feet on the footwells, have the head restraints positioned for

use and wear their seat belts properly.

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking

manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must

consider the following:

Adjust the head restraint to the correct position page 14.

Keep both feet in the fo

Fasten your seat belt se

Use an appropriate chil

in the vehicle page 4

WARNING

If the passengers on the r sustain severe injuries.

Adjust the head restraint tion.

Seat belts can only provid upright position and the pass If passengers on the rear seat of injury due to incorrect pos

WARNING (continued)

Safe driving 13

Safety fir Technical data

properly in order to achieve maximum

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head or as close as possible to the same

r head and, at the very least, at eye level

page 133.

restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.

d restraints could result in death in the event of

d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.

t always be adjusted according to the

Exeo_EN.book Seite 13 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of

passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations.

Adjust the head restraint

protection.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

fig. 3 and fig. 4.

Adjusting the head restraints

WARNING

Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe

Incorrectly adjusted hea a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte

The head restraints mus passenger's height.

Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front

Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side

Safe driving14

t in its guides until it clicks into place.

wer the head restraint.

hould the rear passengers travel while the -use position.

ar head restraint with either of the outer seat

n accident!

djustment of the head restraints page 13.

itting positions

tion can lead to severe injuries to

imal protection only when the belt webs

correct sitting positions substantially

tion of seat belts and increase the risk of

t belt position. As the driver, you are

occupants, especially children.

ssume an incorrect sitting position in the

.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 14 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of the

passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations

Raising the head restraint

Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Lowering the head restraint

Press button fig. 5 and lower the head restraint.

Removing the head restraint

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Press button fig. 5 and pull out the head restraint.

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restrain

Press button and lo

WARNING

Under no circumstances s head restraints are in the non

Do not swap the centre re rear head restraints.

Risk of injury in case of a

Caution Note the instructions on the a

Examples of incorrect s

An incorrect sitting posi

occupants.

Seat belts can provide opt

are properly positioned. In

reduce the protective func

injury due to incorrect sea

responsible for all vehicle

Never allow anyone to a

vehicle while travelling

Fig. 5 Outer rear seats: Head restraints

AA

AA

AA

Safe driving 15

Safety fir Technical data

als must never be impaired by objects

ways press the accelerator, brake and

red to the floor.

can return unimpaired to their initial posi-

ve the pedal area free and can be securely

ke pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in

port your feet properly and give you a good

ion can lead to critical situations while driving.

e driver footwell. An object could move into dal operation. In the event of a sudden driving ill not be able to operate the brake, clutch or

cident!

Exeo_EN.book Seite 15 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be

dangerous for all occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to

make you aware of this issue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:

Never stand in the vehicle,

never stand on the seats,

never kneel on the seats,

never tilt your backrest far to the rear,

never lean against the dash panel,

never lie on the rear bench,

never sit on the front edge of a seat,

never sit sideways,

never lean out of a window,

never put your feet out of a window,

never put your feet on the dash panel,

never put your feet on the surface of a seat,

do not allow anyone to travel in the footwell,

never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,

do not allow anyone to travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.

Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags are triggered, by striking a passenger who has assumed an incor- rect sitting position.

Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to sit properly and to stay in this position during the trip page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

Pedal area

Pedals

The operation of all ped

or floor mats.

Ensure that you can al

clutch pedals unimpai

Ensure that the pedals

tions.

Use only floor mats which lea

fastened on the footwell.

If a brake circuit fails, the bra

order to stop the vehicle.

Wearing suitable shoes

Always wear shoes which sup

feeling for the pedals.

WARNING

Restricting pedal operat

Never place objects on th the pedal area and impair pe or braking manoeuvre, you w accelerator pedal. Risk of ac

Safe driving16

ly in the luggage compartment.

gage as far forward as possible in the

low as possible in the luggage compart-

objects in the luggage compartment could

raps to secure heavy objects.

es or accidents, loose objects can be thrown pants or passers-by. This increased risk of d if a loose object is struck by an inflating

ts can be transformed into missiles. Risk of

re of gravity may shift when transporting t the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- l to adjust your speed and driving style ts.

axle weights or allowed maximum weight. If llowed total weight is exceeded, the driving

may change, leading to accidents, injuries

nattended, especially when the rear lid is to the luggage compartment, closing the door pped and run the risk of death.

ay in or around the vehicle. Close and lock all ou leave the vehicle. Before you lock the are no adults or children in the vehicle.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 16 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Floor mats on the driver side

Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened

in the footwell and do not impair operation of the pedals.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip

and do not obstruct the pedals .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to

prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-

fied dealership.

WARNING

If the pedals are obstructed, an accident may occur. Risk of serious inju- ries.

Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.

Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.

Stowing luggage

Loading the luggage compartment

All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in

the luggage compartment.

Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the

driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the

centre of gravity.

Distribute the load even

Lay and stow heavy lug

luggage compartment.

Stow heavy luggage as

ment.

WARNING

Loose luggage and other cause serious injuries.

Use suitable specialist st

During sudden manoeuvr forward, injuring vehicle occu injury will be further increase airbag. If this happens, objec fatal injury.

Please note that the cent heavy objects; this may affec dent. Therefore, it is essentia accordingly, to avoid acciden

Never exceed the allowed the allowed axle load or the a characteristics of the vehicle and damage to the vehicle.

Never leave your vehicle u open. Children could climb in behind them; they will be tra

Never allow children to pl the doors and rear lid when y vehicle, make sure that there

Safe driving 17

Safety fir Technical data

Exeo_EN.book Seite 17 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. Every passenger must be properly belted in page 18.

Note Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used

air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-

ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.

WARNING (continued)

Seat belts18

le seats must never be transported in your

hicle must properly fasten and wear the seat at. Children must be protected with an appro-

*

s a reminder to the driver to fasten

:

curely.

s to fasten their seat belts properly before

g a child seat according to the child's

, the warning lamp will remain lit until the

applicable) have fastened their seat belts.

a certain speed, you will also hear a warning

ill flash.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 18 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Seat belts

Brief introduction

Before driving: remember your seat belt!

Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!

In this chapter you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,

how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.

Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in

this chapter.

WARNING

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases.

Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and your passen- gers must always wear the seat belts properly while the vehicle is moving.

Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other passengers, these people can also sustain severe inju- ries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is

equipped with a three-point seat belt.

WARNING

More people than availab vehicle.

Every passenger in the ve belt belonging to his or her se priate child restraint system.

Seat belt warning lamp

The warning lamp acts a

the seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle

Fasten your seat belt se

Instruct your passenger

driving off.

Protect children by usin

height and weight.

After switching on the ignition

driver and front passenger (if

When the vehicle has reached

signal and the warning light w

Seat belts 19

Safety fir Technical data

aws of physics work in the case of a head-on

rts moving fig. 6, a certain amount of energy

produced in the vehicle and its occupants.

y depends on the speed of the vehicle and the

passengers. The higher the speed and the

energy there is to be released in an accident.

owever, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed

km/h, for example, the kinetic energy is multi-

ur example are not restrained by seat belts, all

ergy has to be absorbed at the point of impact

50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-

nne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are

belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a

ve forward at the same speed their vehicle was

Fig. 7 The vehicle hits the wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

Exeo_EN.book Seite 19 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Why wear seat belts?

Physical principles of frontal collisions

In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic

energy must be absorbed.

It is easy to explain how the l

collision: When a vehicle sta

known as kinetic energy is

The amount of kinetic energ

weight of the vehicle and its

greater the weight, the more

The most significant factor, h

doubles from 25 km/h to 50

plied by four.

Because the passengers in o

of the passengers' kinetic en

fig. 7.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h to

sion can easily exceed one to

even higher.

Passengers not wearing seat

frontal collision, they will mo

Fig. 6 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

Seat belts20

acting on the body in a collision are so great

oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,

wn forward and will make violent contact with

l, windscreen or whatever else is in the way

stitute for seat belts. When triggered, airbags

tion. All passengers (including the driver) must

g the trip. This will reduce the risk of severe

dent regardless of whether an airbag is fitted

ered only once. To achieve the best possible

always be worn properly so that you will be

h no airbag is deployed.

passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they

ward violently in an accident. Rear passengers

anger not only themselves but also the front

Fig. 9 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 20 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal acci-

dents, but to all accidents and collisions.

The danger of not using the seat belt

The general belief that the passengers can protect them-

selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.

Even at low speeds the forces

that it is not possible to brace

unbelted passengers are thro

the steering wheel, dash pane

fig. 8.

The airbag system is not a sub

provide only additional protec

wear seat belts properly durin

injuries in the event of an acci

for the seat or not.

Note that airbags can be trigg

protection, the seat belt must

protected in accidents in whic

It is also important for the rear

could otherwise be thrown for

who do not use seat belts end

occupants fig. 9.

Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.

Seat belts 21

Safety fir Technical data

n seat belts before every trip, even when "just

wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics

t belts is an effective means of substantially

d improving the chances of survival in a serious

rly worn seat belts improve the protection

ent of an accident. For this reason, wearing a

most countries.

pped with airbags, the seat belts must be

airbags, for example, are only triggered in some

irbags will not be triggered during minor frontal

ns, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the

e in the control unit is not exceeded.

wear your seat belt and ensure that your

eir seat belts properly before you drive off!

using seat belts

rrectly, they can reduce the risk of

elt as described in this section.

lts can be fastened at all times and are not

incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- rotection from seat belts can be achieved only

Exeo_EN.book Seite 21 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Seat belt protection

Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the

event of an accident.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-

tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.

Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to

severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of

being thrown from the car.

Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability

of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other

passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to

absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these

features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of

injury.

Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts

substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is

why it is so important to faste

driving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers

have shown that wearing sea

reducing the risk of injury an

accident. Furthermore, prope

provided by airbags in the ev

seat belt is required by law in

Although your vehicle is equi

fastened and worn. The front

frontal accidents. The front a

collisions, minor side collisio

airbag trigger threshold valu

Therefore, you should always

passengers have fastened th

Safety instructions on

If seat belts are used co

injury in an accident.

Always wear the seat b

Ensure that the seat be

damaged.

WARNING

If the seat belts are worn ries increases. The optimal p if you use them properly.

Fig. 10 A driver wearing the seat belt properly: is secured by the belt in sharp braking

Seat belts22

damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.

ean, otherwise the retractors may not work

nt and rear occupants are locked into

its full protection if the seat belt is not

Fig. 11 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt

Exeo_EN.book Seite 22 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. The other passengers must also wear seat belts, otherwise they may be in danger of injury!

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not posi- tioned correctly.

Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.

Keep both feet in the footwell in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

The seat belt must never be twisted while it is being worn.

The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.

Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.

Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.

The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.

Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.

Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.

Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.

Do not attempt to repair a must not be removed or mod

The belts must be kept cl properly page 216.

Seat belts

Seat belt adjustment

The seat belts for the fro

position by a latch.

The seat belt cannot offer

positioned correctly.

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Seat belts 23

Safety fir Technical data

ximum protection only when they are

Fig. 12 Correct seat belt and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front

Fig. 13 Correct seat belt and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side

Exeo_EN.book Seite 23 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly

across your chest and lap.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and

push it down until it is securely locked with a click page 22,

fig. 11.

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in

the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder

strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled

slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends

and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is

locked.

The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with seat belt

tensioners page 26.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.

Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.

If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned seat belt can cause extremely severe injuries.

Seat belt position

Seat belts offer their ma

properly positioned.

Seat belts24

lso fasten their seat belts properly

he unborn child is for the mother to

rly at all times during the pregnancy.

imum protection only when the seat belt

age 23.

d head restraint correctly page 10.

pull the belt evenly across your chest and

the pelvis fig. 14.

o the buckle for the appropriate seat and

securely locked with a click .

hat the latch plate is securely engaged in

Fig. 14 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy

Exeo_EN.book Seite 24 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder

region:

belt height adjustment for the front seats.

front seat height adjustment*.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso page 23, fig. 12.

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 23, fig. 13. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

Read and observe the warnings page 21.

Pregnant women must a

The best protection for t

wear the seat belt prope

The seat belt provides max

is properly positioned p

Adjust the front seat an

Holding the latch plate,

as low as possible over

Insert the latch plate int

push it down until it is

Pull the belt to ensure t

the buckle.

Seat belts 25

Safety fir Technical data

hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim

hile the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you ng severe or fatal injuries.

ment

rs can be used to adjust the height of

e seat belt.

an be lowered by keeping the button

e time.

to adjust the belt height.

Fig. 16 Belt height adjustment - top guide fitting

A1

Exeo_EN.book Seite 25 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.

Read and observe the warnings page 21.

Seat belt release

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has

come to a standstill.

Press the red button on the belt buckle fig. 15. The latch plate

is released and springs out .

Guide the belt back by

is not damaged.

WARNING

Never unbuckle a seat belt w increase the risk of sustaini

Seat belt height adjust

Seat belt height adjuste

the shoulder area of th

The belt height adjuster c

pressed down at the sam

Press button fig. 16

Fig. 15 Removing latch plate from buckle

Seat belts26

elt increases the risk of severe injuries.

your passengers to adjust their seat belts r the whole journey.

information and warnings concerning the use

rs

t tensioner

, the seat belts on the front seats are

upants are equipped with belt tensioners.

nsioners during severe head-on, lateral and

elt is being worn. This retracts and tightens the

rd motion of the occupants.

triggered only once.

ot be triggered in the event of a light frontal,

hicle overturns or in situations where no large

rear of the vehicle.

are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is

ion of fire in the vehicle.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 26 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Take hold of the top guide fitting and slide it up or down so that

the shoulder part of the seat belt is positioned roughly midway

over the shoulder, although it must never rest against the neck

page 25, fig. 16 in Seat belt position on page 23.

After adjusting, pull the belt sharply to check that the catch on

the guide fitting is engaged securely.

Note It is also possible to adjust the height of the front seats to obtain the best

position for the front seat belts.

Incorrectly fastened seat belts

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even mortal

injuries.

Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is

properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order

described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs

substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe

or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially

increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has

assumed an incorrect sitting position. As the driver, you are respon-

sible for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:

Never allow anyone to wear the seat belt incorrectly while the

vehicle is moving .

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat b

Before every trip, instruct properly and to wear them fo

Read and always observe of seat belts page 21.

Seat belt tensione

Function of the seat bel

During a frontal collision

retracted automatically.

The seat belts for the front occ

Sensors will trigger the belt te

rear collisions only if the seat b

seat belts, reducing the forwa

The seat belt tensioner can be

The seat belt tensioners will n

side or rear collision, if the ve

forces act on the front, side or

Note If the seat belt tensioners

normal and it is not an indicat

A2

Seat belts 27

Safety fir Technical data

Exeo_EN.book Seite 27 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or

components of the system are scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with

these regulations and will be pleased to pass on the information to you.

Service and disposal of belt tensioners

The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the

seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install

parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be

damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt

tensioners function incorrectly or not at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt tensioner is not reduced and that

removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-

tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.

WARNING

If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tensioners are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.

Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tensioners or seat belts.

The seat belt tensioner and seat belt including its automatic retractor cannot be repaired.

Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a qualified workshop only.

The belt tensioners will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed it they have been activated.

Airbag system28

critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This

possible distance between yourself and the

t airbags can completely deploy when trig-

m protection.

at will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-

d the speed of the vehicle.

red depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-

ollision and detected by the control unit. If the

during the collision and measured by the

specified reference values, the front, side

be triggered. Take into account that the visible

in an accident, for whatever reason, is not an

gs had been triggered.

orrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- al injuries.

hildren, who are not properly belted can s if the airbag is triggered. You should always years of age on the rear seat. Never transport are not restrained or the restraint system is

, size or weight.

at belt, if you lean forward or to the side while rect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury will be further an inflating airbag.

y from an inflating airbag, always wear the .

Exeo_EN.book Seite 28 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the

seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting

position must be assumed.

For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure

the following before driving:

Always wear the seat belt properly page 18.

Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly

page 10.

Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 11.

Adjust the head restraint correctly page 13.

Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your

vehicle page 46.

The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an

incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause

you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all passengers in the vehicle

assume a correct sitting position while travelling.

A sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat

belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,

the inflating airbag may inflict

also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest

front airbag. This way, the fron

gered, providing their maximu

The most important factors th

dent, the angle of collision an

Whether the airbags are trigge

ation rate resulting from the c

vehicle deceleration occurring

control unit remains below the

and/or curtain airbag will not

damage in a vehicle involved

indication as to why the airba

WARNING

Wearing the seat belt inc tion can lead to critical or fat

All occupants, including c sustain critical or fatal injurie transport all children up to 12 children in the vehicle if they not appropriate for their age

If you are not wearing a se travelling or assume an incor increased risk of injury. This increased if you are struck by

To reduce the risk of injur seat belt properly page 18

Airbag system 29

Safety fir Technical data

ger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat gainst the door, the roof or the backrest.

tances, it is necessary to transport a child in a front passenger seat, it is absolutely essential ng safety measures:

enger airbag page 44, Deactivating

e approved by the child seat manufacturer for seat with front or side airbag.

instructions given by the child seat manufac- fety instructions page 46, Child safety.

ling the child seat, push the front passenger rds so that the greatest possible distance to ag is ensured.

prevent the front passenger seat from being .

nt passenger seat must be in an upright

g and seat belt tensioner

itors the airbag and seat belt

ll airbags and seat belt tensioners in the vehicle,

iring connections.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 29 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Always properly adjust the front seats.

The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat

Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front

passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.

An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major

danger to a child. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if

he/she is transported in a rear-facing child seat. You should always transport

all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.

If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating

airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may

result.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats.

That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front

passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch page 44.

When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the age and size

of each child page 46.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,

an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.

WARNING

If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.

Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.

An inflating front passen and hurl it with great force a

If, under special circums rear-facing child seat on the that you observe the followi

Disable the front pass airbags.

The child seat must b use on a front passenger

Follow the installation turer and observe the sa

Before properly instal seat completely backwa the front passenger airb

Ensure that no objects pushed completely back

The backrest of the fro position.

Warning lamp for airba

This warning lamp mon

tensioner system.

The warning lamp monitors a

including control units and w

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Airbag system30

nts must be observed when the vehicle or

scrapped. The specialist workshops and the

miliar with these requirements.

ut by a professional, or if the airbags are used or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may in the wrong circumstances.

hing on the steering wheel hub or the soft unit on the passenger side of the dash panel, y them in any way.

ch any objects such as cup holders or tele- aces covering the airbag units.

el or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a r clean the dash panel and the airbag module ining solvents. Solvents cause the surface to triggered, disintegrating plastic parts could

djust, remove or install parts of the airbag

stem or removal and installation of the airbag (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should fied workshop. Qualified workshops have the

ation and qualified personnel.

ou to go to a qualified workshop for all work

front bumper or the body.

ction for just one accident; replace them once

Exeo_EN.book Seite 30 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner system

Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems operation is constantly monitored

electronically. The warning lamp will light every time the ignition is

switched on until you attach your seatbelt.

The system must be checked when the warning lamp :

does not light up when the ignition is switched on,

it turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,

lights up or flashes while the car is moving.

In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously.

Have the system inspected immediately by a qualified workshop.

If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the

indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off

if there is no fault.

WARNING

If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tensioner system cannot properly perform its protective function.

If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag system and belt tensioners may not be triggered, or may not be triggered correctly.

Repairs, maintenance and disposal of airbags

The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehicle.

If work is carried out on the airbag system or remove and fit parts of the

system when performing other repair work, parts of the airbag system may be

damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the

airbag inflates incorrectly or does not inflate at all.

The relevant safety requireme

components of the airbag are

Vehicle disposal centres are fa

WARNING

If repairs are not carried o incorrectly, the risk of severe fail to inflate, or could inflate

Do not cover or stick anyt plastic surface of the airbag and do not obstruct or modif

It is important not to atta phone mountings to the surf

To clean the steering whe water-moistened cloth. Neve surface with cleansers conta become porous. If the airbag cause substantial injuries.

Never attempt to repair, a system.

Any work on the airbag sy components for other repairs be performed only by a quali necessary tools, repair inform

We strongly recommend y on the airbag system.

Never attempt to alter the

The airbags provide prote they have deployed.

Airbag system 31

Safety fir Technical data

r is located in the steering wheel fig. 17 and

nger is located in the dash panel fig. 18.

word AIRBAG. On the driver side, the knee

ootwell, under the instrument panel.

elts, the front airbag system gives the front

ion for the head and chest in the event of a

e 34, Safety notes on the front airbag system.

nction of restraining the occupants, the seat

front passenger in a position where the airbags

tion in a frontal collision.

bstitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

e safety system. Please bear in mind that the

ffectively when the occupants are wearing their

djusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,

he seat belts at all times, not only because this

untries, but also for your safety page 18,

Fig. 18 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel

Exeo_EN.book Seite 31 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Front airbags

Description of front airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The front airbag for the drive

the airbag for the front passe

Airbags are identified by the

airbag* is found in the front f

In conjunction with the seat b

occupants additional protect

severe frontal collision pag

In addition to their normal fu

belts also hold the driver and

can provide maximum protec

The airbag system is not a su

of the vehicle's overall passiv

airbag system can only work e

seat belts correctly and have a

it is most important to wear t

is required by law in most co

Brief introduction.

Fig. 17 Driver airbag in the steering wheel and knee airbag in the dash panel

Airbag system32

gs

the risk of head or chest injury.

so that the airbags for the driver and front

evere frontal collision.

e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

the airbags fill with a propellant gas and

d front passenger fig. 19. The fully deployed

ovement of the front occupants and help to

head and the upper part of the body.

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag. After the collision, the

the front occupants to see forward.

extra protection in an accident, the airbags

ly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

Fig. 19 Inflated front airbags

Exeo_EN.book Seite 32 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

The main parts of the front airbag system are:

an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),

the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front

passenger,

a knee airbag* for the driver,

a warning lamp in the instrument panel page 29.

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning

lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on

(self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the warning lamp :

does not light up when the ignition is switched on page 29

it turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,

lights up or flashes while the car is moving.

The front airbag system will not be triggered if:

the ignition is switched off,

there is a minor frontal collision,

there is a side collision,

there is a rear-end collision,

the vehicle turns over.

WARNING

The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal collision the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Operation of front airba

Inflated airbags reduce

The airbag system is designed

passenger are triggered in a s

In certain types of accident th

gered together.

When the system is triggered,

deploy in front of the driver an

airbags cushion the forward m

reduce the risk of injury to the

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant pu

chest are surrounded and pro

airbag deflates sufficiently for

In order to provide the desired

have to deploy extremely rapid

Airbag system 33

Safety fir Technical data

g. 20 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags e triggered

Exeo_EN.book Seite 33 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

tion of fire in the vehicle.

Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered

The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver

and front passenger airbags are triggered fig. 20. The airbag covers

remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.

Fi ar

Airbag system34

airbag

des additional protection to front seat

roperly secured.

is located in the dash panel underneath the

nal protection to the driver's knees and upper

plement to the seat belts.

knee airbag also deploys in severe frontal colli-

nction, seat belts help keep the driver in posi-

n so that the airbags can provide protection.

stitute for seat belts. It is, on the other hand,

fety system of your vehicle. Always remember

Fig. 21 Driver knee airbag

Exeo_EN.book Seite 34 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Safety notes on the front airbag system

If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the

risk of injury in many kinds of accident.

WARNING

It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.

If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.

Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 46, Child safety.

The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

Knee airbag*

Description of the knee

The airbag system provi

passengers if they are p

The knee airbag for the driver

steering wheel fig. 21.

The knee airbag offers additio

and lower thigh areas as a sup

If the front airbags deploy, the

sions page 32.

Besides their normal safety fu

tion in case of a frontal collisio

The airbag system is not a sub

part of the overall occupant sa

Airbag system 35

Safety fir Technical data

g system can only provide protection when seating position.

ht comes on when the vehicle is being used, mediately by your Authorised Service Centre.

perly when the vehicle acceleration in a side eploy the airbag. See also page 65.

leg area is reduced by fully deployed

een designed so that the airbag for the driver is

ll frontal collisions.

Fig. 22 Inflated airbags protect in a frontal colli- sion.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 35 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

that the airbag system can only help to protect you if you are wearing your

seat belt and wearing it properly.

Remember too that airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds of

accidents - your seat belts are always there to offer protection in those acci-

dents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have already

deployed, for example when your vehicle strikes or is struck by another after

the first collision.

This is just one of the reasons why an airbag is not a substitute for the seat

belt. The airbag system works most effectively when used with the seat belts.

Therefore, always wear your seat belts correctly.

It is important to remember that while the supplemental airbag system is

designed to reduce the likelihood of serious injuries, other injuries, for

example, swelling, bruising, and minor abrasions can also be associated with

airbags.

The knee airbag system basically consists of:

The electronic control module

One inflatable airbag (airbag and gas generator) for the driver

An airbag indicator light in the dash panel

The knee airbag system will not deploy:

when the ignition is turned off

in frontal collisions when the deceleration measured by the control unit is

too low

in side collisions

in rear-end collisions

in rollovers

in the event of a system malfunction (warning/turn signal light illumi-

nated) page 65.

WARNING

Seat belts and the airba occupants are in the proper

If the airbag indicator lig have the system inspected im The airbag may not work pro collision is high enough to d

How knee airbags work

The risk of injury to the

knee airbags.

The knee airbag system has b

deployed in certain but not a

Airbag system36

st and the steering wheel/dash panel.

es and the lower part of the dash panel.

y increases if you lean forward or to the side, sitioned and you are not wearing your seat

more should the airbag deploy.

knee airbag can inflate without interference. d the airbag can increase the risk of injury in th the way the airbag deploys or by being deploys.

should be carried in the footwell area in front objects (shopping bags, for example) can

deployment of the airbag. Small objects can hicle if the airbag deploys and injure you or

acks, deep scratches or other damage in the the knee airbag is located.

seated, their risk of injury increases in the 6.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 36 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

If the front airbag deploys, the knee airbag also deploys in severe frontal colli-

sions.

When the system is deployed, the airbag starts to fill with a propellant gas,

and inflates between the lower part of the dash panel and the driver

page 35, fig. 22.

Although they are not a soft pillow, they can cushion the impact and in this

way they can help to reduce the risk of injury to the lower extremities.

All this takes place instantaneously, so fast that many people do not even

realize that the airbags have deployed. The airbags also inflate with a great

deal of force and it is important for occupant safety that nothing should be in

their way when they deploy.

Fully inflated airbags in combination with properly worn seat belts slow down

and limit the occupant's forward movement and help to reduce risk.

Important safety notes on the knee airbag system

Airbags are only supplemental restraints.

Always wear seat belts correctly and drive in a proper seated position. There

is a lot that you and your passengers must know and do to help the seat belts

and airbags to provide supplementary protection.

WARNING

An inflating knee airbag can cause serious injury. Wearing seat belts incor- rectly and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used.

The airbag system cannot protect you properly if you are seated too close to any of the airbag locations. When adjusting their seating posi- tions, it is important for drivers to keep their upper bodies and knees to the following minimum safe distances:

25 cm between the che

10 cm between the kne

The risk of personal injur or if the seat is improperly po belt. The risk increases even

Always make sure that the Objects between yourself an an accident by interfering wi thrust into you as the airbag

No objects of any kind of the driver's seat. Bulky hinder or prevent proper be thrown through the ve your passengers.

Make sure there are no cr area of the dash panel where

If children are incorrectly case of an accident page 4

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 37

Safety fir Technical data

ont seats and the outer rear seats in a position

rovide maximum protection.

bstitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

e safety system. Please bear in mind that the

ffectively when the occupants are wearing their

st important to wear the seat belts at all times,

ired by law in most countries, but also for your

oduction.

ot be triggered if:

ff,

sion,

,

n,

system are:

monitoring system (control unit),

he backrests of the front seats and the rear side

ar wheel housing.

instrument panel page 29.

is monitored electronically. The airbag warning

4 seconds every time the ignition is switched on

e side airbags will not work, if the sensors do essure increase on the interior of the doors,

the areas with holes or openings in the door

f the interior panels have been removed.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 37 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Side airbags*

Description of side airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The front side airbags are located in the driver seat and front passenger seat

backrests fig. 23. The rear side airbags* are located in the rear wheel

housing lining. The locations are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper

region of the backrests and in the rear wheel housing lining.

Together with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat occu-

pants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side

collision page 40, Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag

system.

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on

the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their

normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also

hold the passengers in the fr

where the side airbags can p

The airbag system is not a su

of the vehicle's overall passiv

airbag system can only work e

seat belts. Therefore, it is mo

not only because this is requ

safety page 18, Brief intr

The side airbag system will n

the ignition is switched o

there is a minor side colli

there is a frontal collision

there is a rear-end collisio

the vehicle turns over.

The main parts of the airbag

an electronic control and

The front side airbags in t

airbags in the lining of the re

a warning lamp in the

The airbag system operation

lamp will light up for approx.

(self-diagnosis).

WARNING

In a side-on collision, th not correctly measure the pr due to air escaping through panel.

Never drive the vehicle i

Fig. 23 Side airbag in driver seat

Airbag system38

rbags

reduce the risk of head or chest injury in

llisions.

e side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the

nt the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

red, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.

sired extra protection in an accident, the airbags

rapidly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

rbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

Fig. 24 Inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle

Exeo_EN.book Seite 38 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted.

Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been correctly closed.

Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers or other equipment are fitted in the interior door panels.

Any work carried out to the doors should be made in a qualified author- ised workshop.

The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, during a side collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Operation of side ai

Inflated airbags can

many side impact co

In some side collisions, th

vehicle fig. 24.

In certain types of accide

gered together.

When the system is trigge

In order to provide the de

have to deploy extremely

may develop when the ai

tion of fire in the vehicle.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 39

Safety fir Technical data

Exeo_EN.book Seite 39 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the

front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the

upper body.

The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.

Airbag system40

incorrect sitting position, they expose them- injury in the event of an accident. This is ild is travelling on the front passenger seat gered in an accident; this could have critical us injury or death page 46, Child safety.

ag system or removal and installation of the repairs (such as removal of the front seat) a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may m operation.

components of the airbag system in any way.

s are managed through sensors located in the ensure the correct functioning of the side and rs nor the door panels should be modified in kers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag

ly. All work carried out on the front door must hop.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 40 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system

If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the

risk of injury in side impact collisions.

WARNING

If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.

In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.

Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered.

Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been expressly approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the back- rest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness page 217, Accessories, parts replacement and modifications.

Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

When children assume an selves to an increased risk of particularly the case if the ch and the airbag system is trig consequences including serio

Any work on the side airb airbag components for other should only be performed by occur during the airbag syste

Do not attempt to modify

The side and head airbag interior of the front doors. To head airbags neither the doo any way (e.g. fitting loudspea system may not work correct be made in a qualified works

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 41

Safety fir Technical data

untries, but also for your safety page 18,

airbag system are:

monitoring system (control unit),

gs with gas generator) for the driver, front

n the rear seats,

instrument panel page 29.

is monitored electronically.

ll not be triggered

ff,

,

n,

ion,

airbag system, have the system checked imme- hop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a il to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 41 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Curtain airbags

Description of curtain airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors

fig. 25 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-

pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a

severe side collision page 42, Safety notes on the operation of the

curtain airbag system.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the

airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their

seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,

it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this

is required by law in most co

Brief introduction.

The main parts of the curtain

an electronic control and

the curtain airbags (airba

passenger and passengers o

a warning lamp in the

The airbag system operation

The curtain airbag system wi

the ignition is switched o

there is a frontal collision

there is a rear-end collisio

if the vehicle rolls,

during a minor side collis

WARNING

If a fault has occurred in the diately by a qualified works collision, the system may fa

Fig. 25 Location of head airbags on the left side of the vehicle

Airbag system42

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag.

ration of the curtain airbag system

tly, they can considerably reduce the

ds of accident.

gs to provide their maximum protection, the ust always be maintained with seat belts

rtain airbag must be disconnected in those ger compartment separation screen. See an make this adjustment.

ersons, animals or objects between the occu- the deployment space of the curtain airbags deploy without restriction and provide the

Therefore, sun blinds which have not been your vehicle may not be attached to the side

ssories, parts replacement and modifica-

ould be used only for lightweight clothing. Do -edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not gers.

ction for just one accident; replace them once

irbag system or removal and installation of her repairs (such as removal of the roof lining)

Exeo_EN.book Seite 42 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Operation of curtain airbags

Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in

a side collision.

During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side

of the vehicle fig. 26.

In certain types of accident the front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-

gered together.

When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the

process, the curtain airbag covers the side windows and door pillars.

In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags

have to deploy extremely rapidly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

tion of fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants and

help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant pu

chest are surrounded and pro

Safety notes on the ope

If you use airbags correc

risk of injury in many kin

WARNING

In order for the side airba prescribed sitting position m fastened while travelling.

For safety reasons, the cu vehicles fitted with a passen Authorised Service Centre to

There must be no other p pants of the outer seats and so that the curtain airbag can greatest possible protection. expressly approved for use in windows page 217, Acce tions.

The built-in coat hooks sh not leave any heavy or sharp hang the clothes on coat han

The airbags provide prote they have deployed.

Any work on the curtain a the airbag components for ot

Fig. 26 Deployed curtain airbags

Airbag system 43

Safety fir Technical data

Exeo_EN.book Seite 43 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system44

g is deactivated, this means that only the

d. All the other airbags in the vehicle

airbag

the key-operated switch in the glove

n OFF fig. 27.

lamp OFF on the instrument panel

en the ignition is switched on .

irbag

the key-operated switch in the glove

n ON fig. 27.

Fig. 28 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console

A0

A1

Exeo_EN.book Seite 44 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Deactivating airbags

Front passenger airbag deactivation

If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,

the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.

When the passenger airba

frontal airbag is deactivate

remain functional.

Disabling front passenger

Switch the ignition off.

Turn the ignition key in

compartment to positio

Check that the warning

fig. 28 remains lit wh

Enabling front passenger a

Switch the ignition off.

Turn the ignition key in

compartment to positio

Fig. 27 In the glove compartment: key for enabling and disabling front passenger airbag

Airbag system 45

Safety fir Technical data

er the front passenger airbag will deploy all your passengers of this.

key to activate / deactivate the passenger front ront airbag will be activated / deactivated. The on the passenger side will remain active.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 45 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Check that the warning lamp on the instrument panel does

page 44, fig. 28 not light up when the ignition is switched on

.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.

You should only deactivate the front passenger airbag when, in excep- tional cases, you have to use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat page 46, Child safety.

Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary in exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.

As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.

Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other- wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create a danger that in case of an accident, the airbag does not deploy properly or does not deploy at all.

When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up when the front passenger airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the airbag system:

Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work- shop.

Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju- ries.

It is predictable wheth during an accident! Warn

When using the ignition airbag, only the passenger f side airbag and head airbag

WARNING (continued)

Child safety46

the manufacturer's Child Seat instruction

oard documentation.

hild seats

s substantially reduces the risk of

onsible for any children you transport in

properly using appropriate child seats

seat belt is properly positioned according

ided by the manufacturer of the child

allow children to distract you from traffic.

uring long trips. Take a break at least

facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front nt passenger airbag has been disabled. This

ally fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is es, to transport a child in the front passenger ag must always be disabled page 44,

Exeo_EN.book Seite 46 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Child safety

Brief introduction

Introduction

Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear

seat than on the front passenger seat.

For safety reasons we recommend that children under 12 years of age are

transported on the rear seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a

child restraint system or the seat belts provided, depending on their age,

height and weight. It is advisable that children always travel in the rear seats,

the rear central position being the safest seat, since the risk of injuries in a

side collision is diminished.

The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to

children. page 19, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do

not have muscle and bone structures fully developed. This means that chil-

dren are subject to a greater risk of injury.

To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems

when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-

sories Programme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke1).

These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with

the ECE-R44. regulation.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and note

page 46, Safety notes on using child seats.

We recommend you to include

manual together with the on-b

Safety notes on using c

Proper use of child seat

injury in an accident!

As the driver, you are resp

your vehicle.

Protect your children by

page 48.

Always ensure that the

to the instructions prov

seat.

When travelling, do not

Take breaks regularly d

every two hours.

WARNING

Never install a child seat passenger seat unless the fro could lead to a risk of potenti necessary, in exceptional cas seat, the front passenger airb1) Not for all countries

Child safety 47

Safety fir Technical data

aximum protection only when the seat belt is 22, Seat belts.

py a child seat page 48, Child seats.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 47 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Deactivating airbags. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest position.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.

All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.

Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!

Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other passengers.

If children assume an improper sitting position when the car is moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly important if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is trig- gered in an accident; as this could cause serious injury or even death.

A suitable child seat can protect your child!

Never leave an unsupervised child alone on a child seat or in the vehicle.

Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.

Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.

Do not allow the seat belt to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor collision or in sudden braking manoeuvres.

The seat belt provides m properly positioned page

Only one child may occu

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Child safety48

ats

a correctly adjusted seat belt can

child.

t 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration fig. 29.

ut 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration.

ructions and observe any statutory require-

ing child seats.

the manufacturer's Child Seat instruction

oard documentation.

ormation and warnings concerning the use of notes on using child seats on page 46.

Fig. 29 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 48 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Child seats

Categorisation of child seats into groups

Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable

for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic

Commission for Europe Regulation

The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:

Group 0: children up to 10 kg

Group 0+: children up to 13 kg

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg

Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg

Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard

bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number

below it).

Group 0 and 0+ child se

A suitable child seat and

help you to protect your

Group 0: For babies from abou

suitable seats are those appe

Group 0+: For babies from abo

suitable seats are those appe

Follow the manufacturer's inst

ments when installing and us

We recommend you to include

manual together with the on-b

WARNING

Read and always observe inf child seats in Safety

Child safety 49

Safety fir Technical data

ats

d a correctly adjusted seat belt can

r child.

tructions and observe any statutory require-

ing child seats.

e the manufacturer's Child Seat instruction

board documentation.

weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best

ats together with properly adjusted seat belts.

eighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5

by seat cushions with head restraints together

fig. 31.

Fig. 31 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 49 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Group 1 child seats

A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can

help you to protect your child.

Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the

rear of the car are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing

between 9 and 18 kg.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats.

We recommend you to include the manufacturer's Child Seat instruction

manual together with the on-board documentation.

WARNING

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.

Group 2 and 3 child se

A suitable child seat an

help you to protect you

Follow the manufacturer's ins

ments when installing and us

We recommend you to includ

manual together with the on-

Group 2 child seats

Children under 7 years of age

protected by group 2 child se

Group 3 child seats

Children over 7 years of age w

metres tall are best protected

with properly worn seat belts

Fig. 30 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

Child safety50

Exeo_EN.book Seite 50 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

WARNING

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 22, Seat belts.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.

Child safety 51

Safety fir Technical data

n must be secured in the vehicle with a age, weight and size.

facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front ont passenger airbag has been disabled. This

the child! However, if, in exceptional cases, it hild in the front passenger seat, the front , Deactivating airbags must always be disa-

o its highest position, where possible.

information and warnings concerning the use ty notes on using child seats on page 46.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 51 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Securing child seats

Ways to secure a child seat

A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on

the front passenger seat.

You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the

following ways:

Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.

Seats for children aged 0, 0+ and 1 with the ISOFIX system can be

secured without fastening seat belts, using the ISOFIX and/or Top Tether

securing rings page 52.

U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age

category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult

seat belt).

*: Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, as high as

possible and always deactivate the airbag.

L: Suitable for retention systems using the ISOFIX anchors.

WARNING

When travelling, childre restraint system suitable for

Never install a child seat passenger seat unless the fr could cause fatal injuries to is necessary to transport a c passenger airbag page 44 bled and the seat adjusted t

Read and always observe of child seats in Safe

Category Weight

Seat locations

Front passenger

Rear outer Rear centre

Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U

Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/L U

Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U

Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U U

Child safety52

given by the child seat manufacturer

ing the seat.

the vehicle's ISOFIX anchorages

nd the seat fig. 32.

horages along the plastic guides until

FIX rings (when correctly closed, you will

eat should also have a visual indicator to

cured) fig. 33.

ystem is correctly secured by pulling on

e supplied with the child safety seat.

ntings are available from Dealers and specialist

Fig. 33 The ISOFIX child seat anchorings slide along the fitted plastic guides until secured in the vehicle's ISOFIX anchorages

Exeo_EN.book Seite 52 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Child seat mounting using the ISOFIX and/or Top Tether system

The child retention systems can be installed quickly and

safely on the rear seat using the ISOFIX and/or Top Tether

systems (fitted on the rear tray).

Following the instructions

when installing and remov

Fit the plastic guides on

between the backrest a

Slide the child seat anc

secured in the car's ISO

hear a click and the s

confirm it is correctly se

Check that the ISOFIX s

the child seat.

Detailed fitting instructions ar

Child seats with ISOFIX mou

retailers.

Fig. 32 Position of the ISOFIX anchorages on the side rear seat

Child safety 53

Safety fir Technical data

educe forwards movements of the safety seat in

sk of injuries to the head from hitting the inside

tive will introduce requirements related to the

tems by means of ISOFIX and Top Tether anchor-

or new types from 2010), which will entail

ld restraint seat and less head movement in

r-facing seats

rear-facing child safety seats fitted with a

y read and follow the safety seat manufacturer's

n how to install the retainer strap properly.

safety seat will increase the risk of injury in the

ap to a hook in the luggage compartment.

ge or other items to the lower anchorages Top Tether).

Exeo_EN.book Seite 53 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

The retainers employed for this child safety seat are specially designed for the ISOFIX system. Never secure other child seats, seat belts or other items into the retainers. If you do, you increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

Top Tether retainer straps

Some child restraint seats have a third Top Tether anchoring

point, apart from both ISOFIX anchoring points, which

allow better child retention.

The Top Tether system has an upper strap for attachment to the vehicle's

upper anchoring point, which is found on the rear luggage compartment

cover.

The retainer strap is used to r

a crash, helping reduce the ri

of the vehicle.

It is foreseen that an EU Direc

retention of child restraint sys

ages (probably compulsory f

improved retention of the chi

case of frontal collisions.

Use of retainer straps on rea

At present there are very few

retainer strap. Please carefull

instructions for information o

WARNING

An undue installation of the event of a crash.

Never tie the retainer str

Never secure or tie lugga (ISOFIX) or the upper ones (

Fig. 34 Position of the Top Tether rings on the rear tray

Child safety54

rap

ap in line with the instructions given by

nufacturer.

se it from the anchoring support.

WARNINGS page 53.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 54 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Fitting the Top Tether child restraint to the anchoring point

Securing the Top Tether child restraint to the anchoring point situated on the vehicle luggage compartment cover

Pull out the fastening belt of the child restraint seat according to

the manufacturer's instructions.

Lead the Top Tether fastening belt under the rear seat head

restraint fig. 35 (lift the head restraint where necessary).

Lift the luggage compartment cover anchorage cover -see detail-

fig. 35.

Slide the belt so that the Top Tether belt of the child restraint seat

is correctly secured to the luggage compartment cover

anchorage.

Firmly tighten the Top Tether belt following the child restraint

seat manufacturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining st

Release the retainer str

the child safety seat ma

Push the lock and relea

WARNING

Read and bear in mind all the

Fig. 35 Retainer strap: correct adjustment and fitting

55

Safety fir Technical data

Exeo_EN.book Seite 55 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

56

Fig. 3

Exeo_EN.book Seite 56 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

6 Some of the equipment listed in this section is only fitted on certain models or are optional extras.

Cockpit 57

Safety fir Technical data

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

t fitted: Sound system or navigation

ent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

indow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

c socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ving home: delayed lights off and

function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

146

152

31

157

126

164

147

147

66

169

137

222

119

118

173

31

Exeo_EN.book Seite 57 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Operating instructions

Cockpit

Overview

Dash panel overview

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Door handle

Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric adjuster for exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air outlets with thumbwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lever for turn signals and main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Levers and switches for:

Windscreen wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Depending on equipment fitted:

Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning lamp indicating that front passenger airbag has

been disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switch for acoustic parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drink holder . . . . . . . . .

Storage compartment

Depending on equipmen

system

Lockable glove compartm

Front passenger airbag

Air conditioner . . . . . . .

Switch for heated rear w

Thumbwheel for seat he

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual gear lever

Cigarette lighter / Electri

Auxiliary socket

Tyre pressure monitoring

Storage compartment

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . .

Seat memory* . . . . . . .

Bonnet lock release . .

Headlight range control

coming home and lea

anticipated lights on

Lever for cruise control

Steering wheel with:

Horn

Driver airbag . . . . . .

A1 108

A2

A3 100

A4 131

A5 162

A6 115

A7 122

A8 59

A9

128

85

87

A10 166

A11

68

44

170

127

A12 121

A13

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

A24

A25

A26

A27

A28

A29

A30

A31

A32

Cockpit58

Exeo_EN.book Seite 58 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Controls for radio and telephone*

Adjustable steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

On-board documentation compartment / knee airbag* . . . .

Note Separate operating instructions are enclosed if the vehicle is equipped

with a factory-fitted radio or navigation system.

The arrangement of switches and controls on right-hand drive models*

may be slightly different from the layout shown in page 56, fig. 36.

However, the symbols used to identify the controls are the same.

A33 165

A34 31

Cockpit 59

Safety fir Technical data

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

61

62

74

Exeo_EN.book Seite 59 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Instruments

Instrument panel overview

The instrument panel is the driver's information centre.

Fig. 37 Overview of instrument panel

Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rev counter incorporating digital clock and date . . . . . . . . . .

Warning and indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speedometer (incorporating odometer display) . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjuster buttons for

Digital clock and date

Instrument lighting .

Digital display with

Service interval displa

A1 60

A2 61, 61

A3 65

A4 63

A5 63

A6

A7

Cockpit60

dle will settle somewhere in the centre of the

ed running temperature. The temperature may

orking hard, especially at high outside temper-

ncern, provided the warning lamp does not

el.

display, this means that either the coolant

coolant level is too low page 78.

t and checking the coolant level, observe the 223.

en steam or coolant is being released from it. t until you can no longer see or hear escaping

nlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At

d high engine loads, there is a risk of the

Exeo_EN.book Seite 60 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHECK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Call-up button for service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reset button for trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coolant temperature gauge

The coolant temperature gauge fig. 38 only works when the ignition is

switched on. In order to avoid engine damage, please read the following

notes for the different temperature ranges.

Cold temperature

If the needle is still on the left of the dial, this indicates that the engine has

not yet reached operating temperature. Avoid high revs and heavy accelera-

tion and do not make the engine work hard.

Normal temperature

In normal operations, the nee

dial once the engine has reach

also rise when the engine is w

atures. This is no cause for co

light up in the instrument pan

Warning temperature

If the symbol flashes in the

temperature is too high or the

WARNING

Before opening the bonne warning information page

Never open the bonnet wh This could lead to burns. Wai steam or coolant.

Caution Accessories in front of the air i

high outside temperatures an

engine overheating.

71

A8 64

A9 74

A10 63

Fig. 38 Engine coolant temperature gauge

AA

AB

AC

Cockpit 61

Safety fir Technical data

nvironment help you to save fuel and minimise engine

d with a quartz clock.

using the and buttons.

n. The hour display will start to flash.

ons to set the hour.

Fig. 40 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Digital clock

+ -

Exeo_EN.book Seite 61 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Rev counter

The rev counter indicates the number of engine revolutions

per minute.

You should select a lower gear if the engine speed drops below 1500 rpm.

The start of the red zone on the dial indicates the maximum engine speed

which may be used when the engine is warm and after it has been run in prop-

erly. However, it is advisable to change up a gear or lift your foot off the accel-

erator before the needle reaches the red zone.

Caution The rev counter needle fig. 39 must only reach the red zone for a short

period, otherwise the engine could be damaged. The start of the red zone on

the dial is different for some engine versions.

For the sake of the e Changing up a gear early will

noise.

Digital clock and date

Your vehicle is equippe

The time and date are set

Setting the hour

Press the butto

Use the and butt

Fig. 39 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Rev counter

MODE

+ -

Cockpit62

off, the odometer and the digital clock with

on for a few seconds by pressing the CHECK

.

strument lighting can be adjusted as

increase the brightness of the instrument

educe the brightness of the instrument

and needles), the centre console illumination

plays are regulated by a photodiode incorpo-

depending on the outside light.

Fig. 41 Instrument panel lighting

Exeo_EN.book Seite 62 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Setting the minutes

Keep pressing the button until the minutes display

flashes.

Use the and buttons to set the minutes.

Setting the date

Keep pressing the button until the date display (day)

flashes.

Use the and buttons to set the day.

Keep pressing the button until the month display flashes.

Use the and buttons to set the month.

Keep pressing the button until the year display flashes.

Use the and buttons to set the year.

Disabling the date display

Keep pressing the button until the complete date display

flashes.

Use the button to disable the date display.

Enabling the date display

Keep pressing the button until the complete date display

flashes.

Use the button to enable the date display.

When the display stops flashing, this means the setting you are performing

is completed and the time and date have been successfully stored.

When the ignition is switched

date display can be switched

button page 59, fig. 37

Instrument lighting

The brightness of the in

required.

Press the "+" button to

lighting.

Press the "-" button to r

lighting.

The instrument lighting (dials

and the illumination of the dis

rated in the instrument panel,

MODE

+ -

MODE

+ -

MODE

+ -

MODE

+ -

MODE

-

MODE

+

A8

Cockpit 63

Safety fir Technical data

ment panel, the letters DEF will appear perma-

play. Please have the fault rectified as soon as

lted when the ignition is switched on.

e message SAFE will appear in the trip recorder

nger be started if that happens.

the ignition is switched on.

reserve zone, the symbol lights up in the

age 80. At this point there are still about 8 to 10

his is your reminder to fill up soon.

city of your vehicle in the page 303, Dimen-

.

dry. If there is an irregular fuel supply, misfiring

el could reach the exhaust system without

catalytic converter reheating and being

Exeo_EN.book Seite 63 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Speedometer with odometer

The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and the

distance travelled.

The distance is normally stated in kilometres (km). On some models,

however, the odometer will show miles.

Lower odometer

The lower odometer records the vehicle's total mileage.

Upper odometer (trip recorder)

The upper odometer shows the distance that has been travelled since the trip

recorder was last reset. It is used to measure short trips. The last digit of the

trip recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or tenths of a mile. The upper

odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the reset button fig. 42.

Fault display

If there is a fault in the instru

nently in the trip recorder dis

possible.

Electronic immobiliser

The vehicle key data is consu

If an uncoded key is used, th

display. The vehicle can no lo

Fuel reserve

The display only works when

When the needle reaches the

instrument panel display p

litres of fuel left in the tank. T

You can consult the tank capa

sions and capacities section

Caution Never run the tank completely

can occur. This means that fu

burning. This may lead to the

damaged.

Fig. 42 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Odometer

Cockpit64

the display page 75, or if the bulb monitor

lights page 82, the relevant driver informa-

briefly pressing the button. For

il level

om the display after about 5 seconds.

on to set speed limit warning 1 page 83,

while the vehicle is moving. Speed limit

g speed limit warning 2 can only be set when

CHECK

Exeo_EN.book Seite 64 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

CHECK button

The button has the following functions:

Enabling the digital clock and the odometer

When the ignition is switched off, the odometer and the digital clock with

date display can be enabled for a few seconds by pressing the button

fig. 43.

Starting check procedure (auto-check control)

The auto-check control page 75 checks important components and vehicle

systems. These background checks are run constantly, as long as the ignition

is switched on.

You can start the check procedure manually by pressing the button

with the ignition switched on. This function check can be started with the

engine either switched off or running, but not at road speeds above 5 km/h.

Calling up driver messages

If a Priority 1 symbol flashes in

detects a failure of one of the

tion can be called up again by

example:

Switch off engine, check o

The message will disappear fr

Speed warning

You can press the butt

Setting speed limit warning 1

warning 2* page 84, Settin

the ignition is switched off..Fig. 43 Detailed view of the instrument panel: CHECK button

CHECK

CHECK

CHECK

CHECK

Cockpit 65

Safety fir Technical data

nitored by the auto-check control page 75. If

his will be shown by the display in the instru-

symbol (priority 1 - danger) or a yellow symbol

page 67

als page 67

system (ABS) page 67

ng page 68

s page 68

ility Programme (ESP) page 68

page 69

dlights page 69

ment (alternative to ) page 69

m (alternative to ) page 70

ystem / handbrake is page 70

ls page 68

Exeo_EN.book Seite 65 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Warning and indicator lamps

General description

The warning and indicator lamps indicate a number of

different functions and possible faults.

Fig. 44 Instrument panel with warning and indicator lamps

Note A number of functions are mo

a malfunction should occur, t

ment panel either with a red

(priority 2 - warning).

Exhaust emission control system page 66

Airbag system page 66

Tyre pressure too low page 66

Cruise control

Trailer turn sign

Anti-lock brake

Seat belt warni

Left turn signal

Electronic Stab

Alternator

Main beam hea

Engine manage

Glow plug syste

Fault in brake s

applied

Right turn signa

Cockpit66

amp*

be corrected as soon as possible if

Fig. 45 Display: system fault

Fig. 46 Display: warning message

Exeo_EN.book Seite 66 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Exhaust emission control system

If the warning lamp lights up continuously you should take your vehicle to a

qualified workshop as soon as possible in order to have the fault rectified.

If the warning lamp flashes drive on at reduced speed and seek professional

help in order to avoid damage to the catalytic converter.

For further information on the catalytic converter, see page 193.

Airbag system

This warning lamp monitors the airbag and belt tension

device system.

The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is

switched on.

If the warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up, flashes or flickers when

the vehicle is moving, this indicates a malfunction in the system.

WARNING

If a malfunction should occur, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a risk that the airbag system and/or belt tensioners may not be triggered in an accident.

Tyre pressure warning l

The tyre pressure should

it is too low.

Cockpit 67

Safety fir Technical data

ashes when the turn signals are oper-

ravan or trailer.

es when the turn signals are operated if a trailer

hicle.

s not work, either on the trailer or on the towing

will not flash.

(ABS)

itors the ABS and the integrated elec-

EDL).

p for a few seconds when the ignition is

gine is being started. The lamp goes out again

ugh an automatic test sequence.

ot light up when the ignition is switched on,

ot go out again after a few seconds.

p when the vehicle is moving.

he normal way (except that the ABS control func-

ake the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon

ation on the ABS, see page 186.

in the ABS, the ESP warning lamp will also light

Exeo_EN.book Seite 67 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The yellow warning lamp remains on if the system is faulty or if

the pressure is too low in at least one tyre. In the event of a system

fault, the letters TPMS are displayed in the centre of the instrument

panel page 66, fig. 45. If the tyre pressure drops rapidly, the

message page 66, fig. 46 will be shown on the central display

of the instrument panel. If the pressure loss is more gradual, the

message page 66, fig. 46 will be shown on the central display

of the instrument panel. This message does not show the tyre

affected. Should any of these warnings be displayed:

Stop the vehicle.

Check the tyres. Although the warning corresponds to just one

tyre, you should also check the others.

Correct the tyre pressure page 238.

For more detailed information on the tyre pressure monitoring system, please

refer to page 237.

Cruise control system*

The indicator lamp on the instrument panel lights up when the cruise

control system is operating.

Trailer turn signals*

This turn signal lamp fl

ating while towing a ca

The turn signal lamp flash

is correctly coupled to the ve

Where a turn signal bulb doe

vehicle, the turn signal bulb

Anti-lock brake system

The warning lamp mon

tronic differential lock (

The warning lamp lights u

switched on and while the en

after the system has run thro

There is a fault in the ABS if:

The warning lamp does n

The warning lamp does n

The warning lamp lights u

The vehicle can still brake in t

tion is out of action). Please t

as possible. For further inform

If a malfunction should occur

up.

AA

AB

Cockpit68

*

s a reminder to the driver to fasten

, the warning lamp will remain lit until the

applicable) have fastened their seat belts.

a certain speed, you will also hear a warning

ill flash.

seat belts, see page 22.

warning lights

al is operated, either the left or right turn

signal lamps will flash when the hazard

.

signal lamp will start flashing twice as fast as

ing a trailer. Where a turn signal bulb does not

n the towing vehicle, the turn signal bulb will

on on the turn signals, see page 122.

ramme

itors the Electronic Stability

following functions:

Exeo_EN.book Seite 68 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Entire brake system fault

If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp

page 70 (with the handbrake released), this indicates not only a fault

in the ABS function, but probably also a malfunction in the main brake system

as well .

The symbol will light up in the instrument panel if a fault occurs in the brake system. Please refer to page 77.

Electronic differential lock (EDL) fault

The EDL works in conjunction with the ABS. The ABS indicator lamp will light

up to indicate an EDL fault. Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop

as soon as possible. For further information on the EDL, see page 187.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level, observe the warning information in page 223, Work in the engine compart- ment.

If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level has dropped below the "MIN" mark you must not drive on otherwise there may be an increased accident risk. Obtain technical assistance.

If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a fault in the ABS control function. As a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. Under certain circum- stances, the rear of the vehicle could suddenly sway from side to side, with the subsequent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the fault rectified.

Seat belt warning lamp

The warning lamp acts a

the seat belt.

After switching on the ignition

driver and front passenger (if

When the vehicle has reached

signal and the warning light w

For further information on the

Turn signals and hazard

Depending on which turn sign

signal lamp flashes. Both turn

warning lights are switched on

If one turn signal fails, the turn

normal.

This does not apply when tow

work, either on the trailer or o

not flash. For further informati

Electronic Stability Prog

This warning lamp mon

Programme (ESP).

The warning lamp has the

Cockpit 69

Safety fir Technical data

in the instrument panel lights up as well as the

driving page 78, stop the vehicle immedi-

e. In this case the coolant pump is no longer

isk of engine damage.

p when the main beams are on or when the

.

main beam headlights, see page 122.

itors the engine management system

nic Power Control) lights up while the function

hile the vehicle is moving, this indicates a fault

stem. The vehicle must be taken immediately to

the engine serviced.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 69 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

It will start flashing to indicate that ESP is counteracting an unstable

driving condition.

It lights up when the ignition is switched on for approx. 2 seconds while

the function is checked.

The warning lamp will light up if there is a malfunction in the ESP.

It will light up after the battery has been disconnected.

The warning lamp will light up if the ESP is switched off.

It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ESP

operates in conjunction with the ABS.

If the ESP warning lamp lights up and stays on after the engine is started, this

may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESP. In this

case the ESP can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then on

again. After this the warning lamp should go out to show that the system is

fully functional.

The warning lamp will light up when the ignition is switched on if the battery

has been disconnected and then reconnected. It should go out again after

driving a short distance if the steering wheel is turned slightly.

For further information on the ESP, see page 187.

Alternator

The warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator or in the

vehicle's electrical system.

The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should

switch off after the engine has started.

If the warning lamp lights up when you are driving, you can normally

continue as far as the nearest qualified workshop. However, given that the

battery will be running down, any electrical consumption not absolutely vital

should be switched off.

Caution If the coolant warning lamp

alternator waning lamp while

ately and switch off the engin

being driven, and there is a r

Main beam headlights

The warning lamp lights u

headlight flasher is operated

For further information on the

Engine management

This warning lamp mon

for petrol engines.

The warning lamp (Electro

is being checked.

Note If the warning lamp lights up w

in the engine management sy

a qualified workshop to have

Cockpit70

ts up when the handbrake is applied. In addi-

rning page 76 switches on after driving for 3

m/h.

t and checking the brake fluid level, observe page 223, Work in the engine compart-

does not go out, or if it lights up when in the reservoir is too low and this may cause top the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain

lights up together with the ABS warning control function of the ABS is out of action. As lock relatively easily when braking. Under ar of the vehicle could suddenly sway from uent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the nd have the fault rectified.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 70 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Glow plug system

The indicator lamp lights up while the glow plugs are

preheating.

The indicator lamp lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When

the indicator lamp goes out the engine should be started straight away. When

the engine is warm, or at outside temperatures above +8C, the warning lamp

will only light up very briefly.

Note If the glow plug indicator lamp should start flashing while the vehicle is

moving, this indicates a fault in the engine management system. The engine

should be serviced without delay.

If the indicator lamp fails to light up when the ignition is switched on, this

can mean that the glow plug system is defective. The engine should be

serviced.

Brake system

The warning lamp flashes when the handbrake is applied, or

if the brake fluid level is too low or if there is a fault in the ABS

system.

If the warning lamp flashes (and the handbrake is not applied), stop the

vehicle and check the brake fluid level page 232.

If a failure should occur in the ABS, the ABS warning lamp will light up

together with the brake warning lamp .

Handbrake applied

The warning lamp also ligh

tion to this, the handbrake wa

seconds at a speed above 5 k

WARNING

Before opening the bonne the warning information in ment.

If the brake warning lamp driving, the brake fluid level an increased accident risk. S technical assistance.

If the brake warning lamp lamp, this can mean that the a result, the rear wheels can certain circumstances, the re side to side, with the subseq nearest qualified workshop a

Cockpit 71

Safety fir Technical data

display will show a red or yellow warning

l indicates a serious malfunction page 77. A

tes a less serious malfunction page 79.

io and telephone* page 72

page 72

page 73

he 7-speed automatic gear- page 182

Multitronic* page 178

page 73

page 74

page 74

page 75

page 76

page 76

page 82

page 85

page 89

Separate operat-

ing instructions

Exeo_EN.book Seite 71 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Driver information system

General notes

The driver information system in the instrument panel shows

the status of various on-board systems at a glance.

The display for the driver information system is in the centre of the instrument

panel.

The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-

tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. The DIS system gives an

audible warning if a fault should occur or if servicing is required, and a red or

yellow warning symbol (in some cases with a corresponding driver message)

appears in the dashboard display.

The driver is informed on the audio system.

The driver information system includes the following functions:

Note If a fault should occur, the

symbol. A red warning symbo

yellow warning symbol indica

Fig. 47 Cockpit: Digital instrument panel display

Display of the CD reader, rad

Outside temperature display

Gear indicator*

Selector lever positions for t

box*

Selector lever positions with

Distance to empty

door catch/rear lid warning

Service indicator

auto-check control

Driving tips

Handbrake warning

Bulb monitor*

On-board computer*

Tyre pressure monitoring*

Navigation information*

Cockpit72

splay

wn in the display when the ignition is switched

an automatic gearbox, the display does not

gaged a gear.

snowflake symbol appears next to the temper-

he driver to take extra care when there is a risk

ehicle is stationary or travelling at very low

layed may be slightly higher than the actual

ult of heat coming from the engine.

ioner and the display is changed over to F

ide temperature display automatically changes

mperature display as an ice warning. Please e ice on the roads even at outside tempera-

patches.

Fig. 49 Display: Outside temperature display

Exeo_EN.book Seite 72 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

CD, radio and telephone display*

If the radio is switched on and no Priority 2 faults are indicated by the auto-

check control, the OK symbol will go out and the display will show the name

or frequency of the selected radio station and various other information,

depending on the type of radio fitted.

When in CD mode*, the display will show the current track.

If you have a compatible telephone*, the phone book or telephone dialled

can also be seen on this display.

These displays appear in addition to the display on the radio itself.

Outside temperature di

The outside temperature is sho

on fig. 49. On vehicles with

appear until the driver has en

At temperatures below +5C a

ature display. This is to warn t

of ice on the road. When the v

speeds, the temperature disp

ambient temperature as a res

If the vehicle has an air condit

(degrees Fahrenheit), the outs

over to F page 160.

WARNING

Do not rely on the outside te bear in mind that there may b tures of +5C beware of ice

Fig. 48 Display: addi- tional radio information

Cockpit 73

Safety fir Technical data

mend any gear-change while you are acceler-

he gear-change display deactivated by an

can help you to plan your trip.

isplayed in km. It shows how far the vehicle can

fuel left in the tank, assuming the same style of

layed in increments of 10 km.

n the basis of the fuel consumption over the last

will increase if you drive in a more economical

Exeo_EN.book Seite 73 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note When the display shows route guidance instructions from the navigation

system, the outside temperature appears in the second line of the radio

display.

Gear display*

This display helps to save fuel.

Use the gear display to save fuel. The display fig. 50 on the instrument

panel recommends that you select the gear indicated by the arrow. It may

also skip a gear, and recommend changing up from 4th gear to 6th gear, for

example.

Note The display may not recom

ating.

If desired, you can have t

Authorised Service Centre.

Fuel range

The fuel range display

The estimated fuel range is d

be driven with the amount of

driving. The fuel range is disp

The fuel range is calculated o

30 kilometres. The fuel range

manner.

Fig. 50 Gear display

Cockpit74

driver when the next routine service

rvice

tton briefly with the ignition switched on,

e vehicle can be driven before the next service

ed out with the engine stopped or running up

km and after the ignition cycle, the kilometres

spection are not displayed.

ssed before the first 500 km the following indi-

ith Extended Service Intervals*.

Fig. 52 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Service indicator

A1

Exeo_EN.book Seite 74 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Door catch/ rear lid warning

The door catch/rear lid warning symbol lights up if one or more of the doors,

or the bonnet or rear lid are not properly closed when the ignition is on. The

symbol also indicates which of these is not properly closed. The display in the

illustration fig. 51 shows that the front left door is open.

The corresponding part of the pictogram will flash if either the bonnet or rear

lid are open. The warning symbol goes out when the bonnet, rear lid and all

the doors are closed.

On vehicles with a driver information system and an on-board computer* the

door catches/rear lid warning symbol can be switched off by briefly pressing

one of the control switches for the on-board computer page 86. However,

the warning symbol will appear again if any of the doors or the bonnet or rear

lid is opened or closed.

Service indicator

This display reminds the

is due.

Displaying distance to next se

When you press the service bu

the display will show how far th

is due. This check can be carri

to 5 km/h. Before the first 500

and days before the service in

If the service button is pre

cation appears on screen:

Service in ----- km --- days

This is also valid for vehicles w

Fig. 51 Display: door catch/rear lid warning

A1

Cockpit 75

Safety fir Technical data

ease remember that it is essential to service the

d time limits to prevent its deterioration and to

arly that of the engine). The period between two

r than the time specified in the Service

ver a low mileage during this time.

dicator between services, otherwise the display

rvice indicator remains intact if the battery is

ervice cannot be called up if the system has

symbol).

m

s important components and vehicle systems.

run constantly, as long as the ignition is

instrument panel if a fault should occur or if any

rgently required. This is accompanied by an

nding on the priority of the fault, a red or yellow

he display.

anger, whereas the yellow ones represent a

s to assist the driver may be shown with the red

Exeo_EN.book Seite 75 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Service reminder

The instrument panel controls the distance travelled every day. Calculate the

average of these distances travelled and enable the service reminder suffi-

ciently in advance.

The display reverts back to the standard display after about 5 seconds. The

remaining distance to the next service is updated every time the ignition is

switched on, until the service becomes due.

Service due

When a service is due, SERVICE! will appear in the display immediately after

you switch on the ignition. The display reverts back to the standard display

after about 5 seconds.

Resetting the display

The display is reset by the workshop after the service has been carried out.

The service interval will be set to a LongLife Service (flexible service interval)

or Inspection Service (fixed service interval), depending on which engine oil

is used. It is only possible to reset the display via the instrument cluster when

an oil change is performed; in this case the display can only be reset to a fixed

service interval of 15,000 km. Proceed as follows:

Switch the ignition off.

Press the service button page 74, fig. 52 and hold while switching

on the ignition. The display will show one of these messages:

Service in ----- km or Service!

Now press and hold the reset button until the display shows

Service in ----- km --- days or Service!

The display switches out of the reset mode if you do not press the reset button

within 5 seconds.

Caution The system cannot calculate the figures for the service interval display if the

battery is disconnected from the vehicle, so no service reminder can be

displayed during this time. Pl

vehicle within the establishe

extend its useful life (particul

services must never be longe

Schedule, even if you only co

Note Do not reset the service in

will be incorrect.

The information in the se

disconnected.

The distance to the next s

detected a Priority 1 fault (red

Auto-check syste

Introduction

The auto-check system check

These background checks are

switched on.

A message is displayed in the

maintenance or repairs are u

audible warning signal. Depe

warning symbol lights up in t

The red symbols indicate a d warning. Additional message

or yellow symbols.

A1

A2

Cockpit76

ymbols

pears in the display, it will automatically be

nding driver message.

displayed to indicate that the windscreen

dition, the following message will appear:

ter a few seconds. If required, the message can

ressing the button.

applied and When stationary apply footbrake e called up a second time. They will remain in

e is released or until a gear is selected.

.

e handbrake still applied, you will hear a

y will show the message:

es on after driving for 3 seconds at speeds

CHECK

Exeo_EN.book Seite 76 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Driver messages

Additional messages to assist the driver are displayed

together with the warning symbols in the instrument panel.

Driver messages and red symbols

If a red warning symbol appears in the display, you can press the

button fig. 53 to call up an additional driver message.

For example: in the event of an oil pressure malfunction, the oil pressure

symbol will appear in the display. If you now press the button, the

following message will appear in the display:

Switch off engine, check oil level

The message will disappear from the display after about 5 seconds. If

required, the message can be called up again by briefly pressing the

button.

Driver messages and yellow s

If a yellow warning symbol ap

accompanied by the correspo

For example, the symbol is

washer fluid level is low. In ad

Top up washer fluid

The message will disappear af

be called up again by briefly p

Note The messages handbrake while selecting gear cannot b

the display until the handbrak

Handbrake warning

Release the handbrake

If you drive by mistake with th

warning buzzer and the displa

Handbrake applied

The handbrake warning switch

above 5 km/h.

Fig. 53 Instrument panel: CHECK button

CHECK

CHECK

CHECK

Cockpit 77

Safety fir Technical data

indicate a Priority 1 fault (serious malfunction).

by three warning chimes. The symbols will keep

orrected. If several Priority 1 faults are detected

ls are displayed one after the other for about 2

m

em should be rectified as soon as

n the display, there is a fault in the brake

ing messages will appear in the display

ake fluid and hydraulic fluid levels

e system (ABS) Please visit garage

evel page 232.

ing lamp will light up together with the brake

.

et and checking the brake fluid level, observe page 223, Work in the engine compart-

the reservoir is too low, this could result in an btain technical assistance.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 77 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Red symbols

A red symbol warns of a danger.

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the engine off.

Check the fault. Obtain professional assistance if necessary.

The red symbols are used to

A red symbol is accompanied

flashing until the faults are c

at the same time, the symbo

seconds.

Fault in the brake syste

A fault in the brake syst

possible.

If the symbol flashes i

system. One of the follow

together with the symbol:

Stop vehicle, check br

Warning! Fault in brak

Stop the vehicle.

Check the brake fluid l

If the ABS fails, the ABS warn

system fault symbol

WARNING

Before opening the bonn the warning information in ment.

If the brake fluid level in accident. Do not drive on! O

BRAKES

Fault in brake system page 77

COOLANT

Coolant level too low / coolant tem-

perature too high

page 78

OIL PRESSURE

Engine oil pressure too low page 78

Fig. 54 Display: Coolant level warning

Cockpit78

lights up as well page 69, it is possible that

has come on to indicate a fault in the cooling

sk of engine damage.

low

e is too low the fault must be rectified

n the display, the oil pressure is too low.

l appear in the display together with the

k oil level

vel page 226.

istance if necessary.

w, add more oil page 227.

the engine oil level is correct, obtain profes-

on! Do not continue to run the engine, even at

Exeo_EN.book Seite 78 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp, this can mean that the control function of the ABS is out of action. As a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. Under certain circumstances, the rear of the vehicle could suddenly sway from side to side, with the subsequent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the fault rectified.

Fault in the cooling system

Faults in the cooling system must be rectified immediately.

If the symbol flashes in the display, this means that either the

coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. The

following message will appear in the display together with the

symbol:

Switch off engine and check coolant level

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the engine off.

Check the coolant level page 229.

Add more coolant if necessary page 229.

Wait for the symbol to go out before driving on.

Obtain professional assistance if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction

of the radiator fan.

If the alternator warning lamp

the drive belt has broken.

Caution Do not drive on if the symbol

system, otherwise there is a ri

Engine oil pressure too

If the engine oil pressur

immediately.

If the symbol flashes i

The following message wil

symbol:

Switch off engine, chec

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the engine off.

Check the engine oil le

Obtain professional ass

Engine oil level too low

If the engine oil level is too lo

Engine oil level correct

If the symbol flashes and

sional assistance. Do not drive

idle speed.

WARNING (continued)

Cockpit 79

Safety fir Technical data

dicate a Priority 2 fault (warning).

oil level page 80

sor faulty* page 80

late filter* obstructed page 80

rain sensor faulty page 81

n page 81

g 1 page 81

light range control* page 81

lights* faulty page 81

evel low* page 81

g 2* page 81

e too high or too low* page 81

page 82

monitoring system*

re

page 89

monitoring system*

ailable

page 66

Exeo_EN.book Seite 79 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note The oil pressure warning lamp is not an indicator for the oil level. The oil

level should therefore be checked regularly, preferably every time you fill the

tank.

Yellow symbols

A yellow symbol indicates a warning.

Yellow symbols are used to in

Brake light failure warning light page 80

Fuel level low page 80

Engine speed governing page 80

Fig. 55 Display: Fuel level low

Check engine

Engine oil sen

Diesel particu

Light sensor/

Brake pad wor

Speed warnin

Dynamic head

faulty

Adaptive head

Washer fluid l

Speed warnin

Battery voltag

Bulb monitor*

Tyre pressure

Loss of pressu

TPMS Tyre pressure

System not av

Cockpit80

ase check the engine oil level as soon as

the oil at the next opportunity page 227.

tive*

e the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have

ntil then it is advisable to check the oil level

page 226.

obstructed

u may be able to contribute towards automatic

right manner. To do this, drive about 15

omatic gearbox: S gear range) at a speed of 60

at approximately 2000 rpm. The increase in

oot in the filter. When cleaning is successful,

not go off, take the vehicle to a qualified work-

diesel particulate filter, see page 194.

your speed to suit the weather, road, terrain commended driving speed must never lead to affic regulations.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 80 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Yellow symbols are accompanied by one warning buzzer. The function indi-

cated should be checked as soon as possible. If several Priority 2 faults are

detected at the same time, the symbols are displayed one after the other for

about 2 seconds at a time.

Brake light failure

This warning light will appear on the upper part of the display if any of the

brake lights has failed. A text message in the central part of the display indi-

cates which brake light has failed (left or right).

Fuel level low

When this symbol comes on for the first time, there are about 8 to 10 litres

of fuel left in the tank. You should fill up as soon as possible page 219.

Engine speed governing

Max. engine speed XXXX rpm

There is a fault in the engine management. In addition, the warning lamp

in the instrument cluster will light up. The engine speed will be governed to

the speed displayed in the driver information system. Please ensure that the

engine speed does not exceed the speed shown (for example, when

changing down a gear).

Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop immediately to have the fault

repaired.

Check engine oil level

If the symbol lights up, ple

possible page 226. Top up

Engine oil sensor defec

If the symbol lights up, tak

the oil level sensor checked. U

every time you fill up with fuel

Diesel particulate filter

If the symbol lights up, yo

filter cleaning by driving in the

minutes in 4th or 5th gear (aut

km/h, with the engine running

temperature will burn off any s

the symbol switches off.

If the light on symbol does

shop to repair the fault.

For further information on the

WARNING

It is essential that you adjust and traffic conditions. The re the driver disregarding the tr

Cockpit 81

Safety fir Technical data

aulty

aulty

t the adaptive headlight system is faulty. Take

kshop to have the headlights or the adaptive

d.

up the fluid for the windscreen washer and

page 230.

is means you are exceeding the speed that has

uce your speed accordingly page 82.

h or too low

ke the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have

hether the alternator warning lamp has come on

Exeo_EN.book Seite 81 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Light sensor/ rain sensor faulty

Automatic headlights / automatic wipers faulty

If the symbol lights up, this means that the photosensor/rain sensor is not

working. For safety reasons, the dipped beam headlights will then be

switched on permanently when the light switch is set to the AUTO position.

However, you can still switch the lights on and off in the normal way with the

light switch. If the rain sensor is faulty, the functions operated via the wind-

screen wiper lever will still be available. You should have the photo-

sensor/rain sensor checked by a specialised workshop as soon as

possible.

Worn brake pads

If the symbol lights up, have the front brake pads (and, for safety reasons,

the rear pads as well) inspected by a qualified workshop.

Speed warning 1

If the symbol lights up, this means you are exceeding the speed that has

been pre-set with the speed warning function. You should reduce your speed

accordingly page 82.

Headlight range control faulty

This symbol indicates a malfunction in the dynamic headlight range

control. Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop to have the dynamic head-

light range control function repaired.

Adaptive headlights* f

Adaptive headlights f

This symbol indicates tha

the vehicle to a qualified wor

headlight control unit repaire

Washer fluid level low

If the symbol lights up, top

headlight washer system*

Speed warning 2

If the symbol lights up, th

been pre-set. You should red

Battery voltage too hig

If the symbol lights up, ta

the following items checked:

Ribbed belt

Battery condition

It is also advisable to check w

page 69.

Cockpit82

to pressure. The glass can break when you y.

of gas discharge bulbs* (xenon light) must be , there is a risk of death.

tion can help prevent you exceeding

imum speed.

ill warn the driver if a pre-set maximum speed

an warning buzzer signal if the set speed is

Fig. 56 Display: Speed warning function

Exeo_EN.book Seite 82 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Bulb monitor

The bulb monitor checks whether the lights on the vehicle are

working.

If a defective bulb is detected, or if one of the lights has failed for any reason,

the bulb monitor symbol will appear in the display together with an addi-

tional message (which goes out after 5 seconds). For instance, if the rear left

turn signal is not working, the display in the instrument panel will show the

following message:

Left rear turn signal

The message disappears after 5 seconds. Press the CHECK button briefly if

you wish to call up the message again.

If the display indicates that one of the lights is not working, this can have a

number of causes:

Bulb failure page 259.

A blown fuse page 257, Changing fuses.

Faulty electrical wiring.

It is not necessary to have lamps replaced in a specialised workshop,

however the use of Xenon lamps is recommended.

LED lamps

If any of the LED (Light Emitting Diode) functions fail, the complete lamp

should be replaced.

The failure of the lamp is only displayed when the LED function goes out

completely. Sometimes, an LED will stop working, without displaying the

warning as the function continues to be effective.

WARNING

Bulbs are highly sensitive touch the bulb, causing injur

The high voltage element handled correctly. Otherwise

Speed warning*

Introduction

The speed warning func

a particular pre-set max

The speed warning function w

is exceeded. The system gives

Cockpit 83

Safety fir Technical data

n with the speed warning function, it is still

e car's speed with the speedometer and to

s.

rning 1

o set speed limit warning 1.

aximum speed.

n and hold it down until the symbol

ears.

Fig. 57 Detailed view of the instrument panel: CHECK button

Exeo_EN.book Seite 83 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

exceeded by about 10 km/h. A warning symbol will also appear in the display

fig. 56.

The speed warning function has two different warning speeds, which operate

independently and serve slightly different purposes:

Speed limit warning 1

With speed limit warning 1, the maximum speed can be changed while

driving. The speed limit that has been set remains stored until the ignition is

switched off, or until it is changed or cleared.

The speed limit warning symbol for speed warning 1 page 82, fig. 56

will appear in the display if you exceed the pre-set speed. It goes out again if

the speed is reduced below the set speed limit.

The symbol also goes out if the speed is increased to more than about 40

km/h above the set speed for at least 10 seconds. However, this does not

cancel the speed limit that was originally set.

Setting speed limit warning 1 page 83.

Speed limit warning 2

With speed limit warning 2, the speed limit can only be changed or cleared

when the ignition is switched off. You are recommended to store this speed

limit warning if you always wish to be reminded of a particular speed limit.

This could be when driving in countries with general speed limits, or if a

particular speed should not be exceeded when winter tyres are fitted etc.

The speed limit warning symbol for speed warning 2 will appear in the

display if you exceed the pre-set speed. Unlike speed limit warning 1, the

warning symbol only goes out once the road speed has dropped below the

set value again.

Setting speed limit warning 2 page 84.

Note Please bear in mind that, eve

important to keep a eye on th

observe the legal speed limit

Setting speed limit wa

Use the CHECK button t

Setting the speed limit

Drive at the desired m

Press the CHECK butto

page 82, fig. 56 app

Cockpit84

button in the instrument panel

odometer and the digital clock will light

for at least two seconds. The display will

hich is currently set or, if no speed limit

ed out warning symbol for speed limit 2.

it, press the top or bottom of the function

indscreen wiper lever fig. 58. The

ill then increase or decrease by 10 km/h

button in the instrument panel

odometer and the digital clock will light

for at least two seconds. The display will

hich is currently set.

Reset button on the windscreen wiper

l the crossed out warning symbol for

n the display.

ometer and digital clock goes off again a few

eased.

AA

Exeo_EN.book Seite 84 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Clearing the speed limit

Drive the vehicle at a minimum of 5 km/h.

Press the CHECK button for at least two seconds.

The speed warning symbol lights up briefly in the display when the button

is released to confirm that the selected speed has been stored. The speed

limit that has been selected remains stored until another speed is selected

with a brief push of the button, or until the memory is cleared with a long

push of the button.

Setting speed limit warning 2

Speed limit warning 2 is set using the switches on the wind-

screen wiper lever.

Setting the speed limit

Switch the ignition off.

Briefly press the CHECK

page 83, fig. 57. The

up.

Press the CHECK button

show the speed limit w

has been set, the cross

To change the speed lim

selector switch on the w

speed limit displayed w

at a time.

Clearing the speed limit

Switch the ignition off.

Briefly press the CHECK

page 83, fig. 57. The

up.

Press the CHECK button

show the speed limit w

Now press and hold the

lever fig. 58 unti

speed limit 2 appears o

The display lighting for the od

seconds after the button is rel

Fig. 58 Windscreen wiper lever: Function selector switch

AB

Cockpit 85

Safety fir Technical data

oard computer 1)

rocesses the information on a journey from the

on until it is switched off. If the journey is

ter the ignition is switched off, the new figures

the calculation. If the journey is interrupted for

d information is automatically erased when you

ard computer 2)

mory, the total-journey memory is not erased

n determine the period for which you wish the

figures.

isplayed in km. The fuel range is displayed in

e fuel consumption since the memory was last

tion

taneous fuel consumption in litres/100 km.

y, the computer will display the last value in the

e speed driven since the memory was last

of time which has elapsed since the memory

st possible period it can cover is 999 hours and

Exeo_EN.book Seite 85 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

On-board computer

Introduction

The on-board computer provides you with useful information

during a journey, including average and current fuel

consumption, average speed, fuel range, driving time and

distance covered.

Press RESET button page 86, fig. 60 to switch back and forward

between the functions of on-board computers 1 and 2.

The numbers in the display fig. 59 indicates which of the two memories is

currently in use. The figure 1 means that the display is showing the informa-

tion in the single journey memory (on-board computer 1). The figure 2 means

that the display is showing the information in the total journey memory (on-

board computer 2).

Single-journey memory (on-b

The single-journey memory p

time the ignition is switched

resumed within two hours af

are automatically included in

more than two hours the store

resume your journey.

Total-journey memory (on-bo

Unlike the single-journey me

automatically. Hence, you ca

on-board computer to supply

Fuel range

The estimated fuel range is d

increments of 10 km.

Average fuel consumption

This mode shows the averag

cancelled in litres/100 km.

Instantaneous fuel consump

The display shows the instan

When the vehicle is stationar

memory.

Average speed

This mode shows the averag

cancelled (in km/h).

Driving time

This display shows the period

was last cancelled. The longe

59 minutes.

Fig. 59 On-board computer: memory 1

AB

Cockpit86

is controlled by means of two

een wiper lever.

puter

repeatedly until the on-board

2) page 85, fig. 59 is displayed.

of the function selector switch

the functions of the on-board computer

et button for at least two seconds.

set to zero using the Reset button:

Fig. 60 Windscreen wiper lever: On-board computer controls

B

AA

AB

Exeo_EN.book Seite 86 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Driving time warning

After 2 hours of continuous driving, the display automatically switches over

to the driving time display of 2:00. At the same time the driving time display

starts flashing. This is to remind the driver to take a break.

The driving time warning can be switched off by briefly pressing the function

selector switch or the button fig. 60.

If you continue driving or take a break for less than 10 minutes, the driving

time warning will switch on once again when the total driving time is 4:00

hours, 6:00 hours, etc. However, if you take a break for more than 10 minutes,

the driving time warning clock will be erased.

Distance covered

This display shows the distance you have covered since the memory was last

cancelled. The longest possible distance which can be recorded is

9999.9 km.

Note The displays for fuel consumption (average and instantaneous), fuel

range and speed are shown in metric units.

The information in the memory is lost if the battery is disconnected.

Operation

The on-board computer

switches on the windscr

Enabling the on-board com

Press the reset button

computer (memory 1 or

Selecting the function

Press the top or bottom

fig. 60. This displays

in sequence.

Resetting to zero

Press and hold the Res

The following values can be re

Reset

A

Cockpit 87

Safety fir Technical data

Fig. 61 Windscreen wiper lever: Menu selection button

Fig. 62 Display: Main menu

Exeo_EN.book Seite 87 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Journey duration

Distance covered

Average fuel consumption

Average speed

The on-board computer can only be operated when the ignition is switched

on. When the ignition is switched on, the display shows the function that was

last selected.

As well as the figures from the on-board computer (computer 1 or 2), the

display can also show information from the navigation system*. Press the

Reset button briefly to switch back and forward between these displays.

Note If you keep the Reset button pressed for longer than two seconds, it will

reset the currently displayed figure to zero (for instance average fuel

consumption).

Faults detected by the auto-check control will be displayed even if the

display is off.

The information in the memory is lost if the battery is disconnected.

Menu display

Introduction

AB

Cockpit88

ed up via the button and the

dscreen wiper lever. Use these

and adjust the settings.

fig. 63 and the rocker switch :

until the menu display page 87,

to select one of the menus. Press "up" or

select the options accordingly.

.

Reset

Fig. 63 Windscreen wiper lever: Reset button and rocker switch

AA

Exeo_EN.book Seite 88 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Some of your vehicle's functions can be adjusted, activated and controlled by

menus. With the aid of the menus you can then also select the information

you wish to see displayed on the DIS display. This is only possible when the

ignition is on. The menu is enabled using the button on the wind-

screen wiper lever page 87, fig. 61.

The main menu lists the different display types (or basic commands):

Programming

Check

Menu off

Help

The main menu options have the following submenus:

Controlling the menu

The menu display is call

rocker switch on the win

controls to make checks

Functions of the

Enabling the menu

Press the button

fig. 62 appears.

Selecting and setting

Press the rocker switch

"down" on the switch to

Entering and confirming

Press the button

Programming Clock page 88

Computer page 88

Speed warning page 82

Radio info (on/off)

Units: for measuring dis-

tance, fuel consumption and

temperature

page 88

Language: you can select

one of 6 languages.

page 88

Check Service page 74

Menu off When the menu is switched off, the display shows the

same information as on vehicles without the menu func-

tion.

Help The help function may be used to understand the meaning

of symbols that can appear on different menus.

Reset

Reset AB

Reset

Reset

Cockpit 89

Safety fir Technical data

will rise accordingly. Therefore, you should only

n they are cold (i.e. approximately at ambient

re monitoring system works reliably, you should

st the tyre pressures at regular intervals and

eference values) in the system.

bel is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.

re when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!

tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and f the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!

nvironment creased fuel consumption and tyre wear.

g that the tyres are correctly inflated remains

n only provide assistance.

sted when the tyres are at ambient

Exeo_EN.book Seite 89 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Use the rocker switch to select the menus and adjust various values. The

selected values are highlighted on a red background.

By pressing the button, you can confirm the option you have selected

or the value you have set. Selected functions are marked with a tick.

The following symbols are used:

Tyre pressure monitoring*

Introduction

The tyre pressure monitoring system constantly checks the

pressure of the tyres.

The system warns the driver in the event of a loss of pressure by means of

symbols and messages in the instrument panel display. The system works

with the help of the ABS sensors in the wheels.

Please bear in mind that the tyre inflation pressure is also influenced by the

temperature of the tyre. Tyre pressure increases about 0.1 bar for each 10C

in tyre temperature increase. The tyre heats up while the vehicle is being

driven and the tyre pressure

adjust the tyre pressures whe

temperature).

To ensure that the tyre pressu

check and, if necessary, adju

store the correct pressures (r

A tyre pressure information la

WARNING

Never adjust tyre pressu even burst the tyres. Risk of

An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating o bead may be released or the

For the sake of the e Under-inflated tyres lead to in

Note Responsibility for ensurin

with the driver; the system ca

Pressure can only be adju

temperature.

Cursor Function selected Red background (active

function)

Tick Selected

Box Not selected

Triangle pointing upwards Previous page

Triangle pointing down-

wards

Next page

Reset

Cockpit90

Exeo_EN.book Seite 90 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Tyre pressure monitoring display

The tyre pressure should be corrected as soon as possible if

it is too low.

If the symbol appears, the tyre pressure on at least one of the

wheels is too low.

Stop the vehicle.

Check the tyre(s).

Correct the tyre pressure page 238.

For more detailed information on the tyre pressure monitoring system, please

refer to page 237.

Steering wheel controls 91

Safety fir Technical data

y pressing or scrolling the controls to on

eel fig. 64:

repeatedly to switch between modes, which

er information system fig. 65.

humbwheel to select a function from one of

* for the on-board phone system is enabled by

Pressing the talk button again disables speed

el up/down to raise/lower the volume as

Fig. 65 Driver informa- tion system

AA AD

B

AA

AD

Exeo_EN.book Seite 91 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Steering wheel controls

The multifunction steering wheel*

Introduction

You can use the multifunction steering wheel to quickly and

easily operate selected functions of the radio, CD, and tele-

phone*.

The functions are operated b

the multifunction steering wh

Press the button

are then displayed in the driv

Scroll and press the left t

the menus.

The speech control system

pressing the talk button .

control*.

Scroll the right thumbwhe

desired.

Fig. 64 Controls on the multifunction steering wheel

MODE A

AC

Steering wheel controls92

+ - Press

Volume up Volume down MUTE

Volume up Volume down MUTE

Volume up Volume down MUTE

AD

Exeo_EN.book Seite 92 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Steering wheel audio version controls

(Mode) (PTT)+ - Press

Radio mode

Station search.

Increase frequency

Station search.

Decrease fre-

quency

1st press: starts

the search.

2nd press: cancels

the search

One long press:

block the steering-

wheel controls

Short press:

activates the steer-

ing-wheel controls (if

they are blocked /

without specific func-

tion (if they are not

blocked)

No function

specified CD/

iPod-USB Mode

CD mode: next

track.

iPod/USB Mode:

next track

CD mode: previ-

ous track.

iPod/USB Mode:

previous track

CD mode: fast for-

ward.

iPod/USB Mode:

fast forward

MP3 mode

Next track Previous track Fast forward

AA AB AC

Steering wheel controls 93

Safety fir Technical data

+ - Press

Volume up Volume down MUTE

Volume up Volume down MUTE

Volume up Volume down MUTE

Volume up Volume down No function

specified

Volume up Volume down No function

specified

Volume up Volume down No function

specified

Volume up Volume down No function

specified

AD

Exeo_EN.book Seite 93 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls

(Mode) (PTT)+ - Press

Radio mode Station search.

Increase fre-

quency

Station search.

Decrease fre-

quency

1st press: starts

the search.

2nd press: cancels

the search

Change to

phone

Enable voice

recognition

CD/ iPod-USB Mode

CD mode: next

track.

iPod/USB Mode:

next track

CD mode: previ-

ous track.

iPod/USB Mode:

previous track

CD mode: fast for-

ward.

iPod/USB Mode:

fast forward

MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward

Phone mode Next name in

phone book

Previous name in

phone book Accept

Change to

radio / CD /

iPod-USB /

MP3

Incoming call mode

No function spec-

ified

No function

specified

One press: accept

call.

Held down: reject

call

No function

specified

No function

specified

Active call mode

No function spec-

ified

No function

specified End call

No function

specified

No function

specified

Voice activa- tion mode

No function spec-

ified

No function

specified

No function speci-

fied

No function

specified Cancel

AA AB AC

Steering wheel controls94

+ - Press

olume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

olume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

olume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

AD

Exeo_EN.book Seite 94 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Steering wheel controls, Navigation System* version

(Mode) (PTT)+ - Press

Radio mode Station search.

Increase fre-

quency

Station search.

Decrease fre-

quency

1st press: starts

the search.

2nd press: cancels

the search

No function

specified

No function

specified

V

CD/ iPod-USB Mode

CD mode: next

track.

iPod/USB Mode:

next track

CD mode: previ-

ous track.

iPod/USB Mode:

previous track

CD mode: fast for-

ward.

iPod/USB Mode:

fast forward

V

MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward V

AA AB AC

Steering wheel controls 95

Safety fir Technical data

+ - Press

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

Volume up Volume down No function

specified

AD

Exeo_EN.book Seite 95 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Steering wheel controls, Navigation System + Telephone* version

(Mode) (PTT)+ - Press

Radio mode Station search.

Increase fre-

quency

Station search.

Decrease fre-

quency

1st press: starts

the search.

2nd press: cancels

the search

Change to

phone

Enable voice

recognition

CD/ iPod-USB Mode

CD mode: next

track.

iPod/USB Mode:

next track

CD mode: previ-

ous track.

iPod/USB Mode:

previous track

CD mode: fast for-

ward.

iPod/USB Mode:

fast forward

MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward

Phone mode Next name in

phone book

Previous name in

phone book Accept

Change to

radio / CD /

iPod-USB /

MP3

Incoming call mode

No function spec-

ified

No function

specified

One press: accept

call.

Held down: reject

call

No function

specified

No function

specified

Active call mode

No function spec-

ified

No function

specified End call

No function

specified

No function

specified

Voice activa- tion mode

No function spec-

ified

No function

specified

No function speci-

fied

No function

specified Cancel

AA AB AC

Unlocking and locking96

our vehicle consists of the following items:

ontrol.

k and unlock the car and start the engine. Press

arrow- to unfold the key out of the handle and

ct the Technical Service. Have the remote

abled. You should therefore bring the plastic

with you. It is also important to notify your

the plastic key tab has been lost.

Fig. 67 Remote control key: Release button

Exeo_EN.book Seite 96 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Unlocking and locking

Remote control keys

Set of keys

The set of keys belonging to y

one remote control key.

one key without remote c

a plastic key tab*.

Remote control key

The remote control key will loc

the release button fig. 67 -

to fold it back in.

Replacing a key

If you lose a key, please conta

control coding for that key dis

key tab* and all available keys

insurance company if a key or

Fig. 66 Set of keys supplied with the vehicle

AA

AB

AC

Unlocking and locking 97

Safety fir Technical data

(arrow) flashes when one of the buttons is

does not light up or flash, this means that the

st be replaced.

ge 97.

ery

the batteries changed in a qualified work-

nge the used battery yourself, follow the

e key fig. 69 and the cover

irection of the arrow.

Fig. 69 Master key: Opening the cover

AA AB

Exeo_EN.book Seite 97 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. This is particularly important if there are children in the car, as they might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could lead to injuries.

Wait for the vehicle to come to a standstill before removing the ignition key from the lock! Otherwise, the steering lock could engage suddenly, causing an accident.

Indicator light on the remote control key

The condition of the battery in the remote control key is moni-

tored by the indicator light.

Condition of the key battery

The indicator light fig. 68

pressed. If the indicator light

battery is exhausted and mu

Replacing the batteries pa

Replacing the key batt

We recommend you have

shop. If you decide to cha

steps below:

Carefully prise apart th

using a coin.

Remove cover in the d

Fig. 68 LED on the remote control key

Unlocking and locking98

rted using an original SEAT key with the correct

tart the engine with the key if there is another

ake of vehicle on the same key tab.

m enables you to lock and unlock all

nd the tank flap together.

your vehicle locks and unlocks all the doors

sly. The rear lid is unlocked when the vehicle is

must be used to open it. The vehicle can be

e remote control page 104 or by turning the

or.

ally opened or closed using the central locking

oof* can be closed but not opened using the

ombined with an anti-theft security system. If

ey from the outside, the interior opening levers

unauthorised persons from entering the

tem fail to work, you can still normally enable

uel tank flap can be released manually if neces-

tank flap page 220.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 98 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Remove the used battery from the cover.

Insert the new battery. Make sure that the + symbol on the

battery is facing downwards. The correct polarity is indicated on

the cover.

After inserting the battery, align the cover and key and press the

two parts together.

For the sake of the environment Used batteries must be disposed of appropriately and must not be discarded

with ordinary household waste.

Note The system must be re-synchronised after each battery replacement to be

able to lock and unlock the car using the remote control page 106.

The new battery must be of the same type as the original.

Electronic immobiliser

The electronic immobiliser is designed to prevent unauthor-

ised persons from starting up the vehicle.

There is an electronic chip inside the key which automatically deactivates the

immobiliser when the key is inserted into the ignition lock. The electronic

immobiliser is enabled automatically when the ignition key is removed from

the ignition lock after coming to a stop.

If an uncoded key is used, the message SAFE will appear in the trip recorder

display.

Note The engine can only be sta

code.

It may not be possible to s

ignition key from a different m

Central locking

Description

The central locking syste

the doors, the rear lid a

The central locking system on

and the tank flap simultaneou

opened. However, the handle

locked and unlocked using th

key in the lock in the driver do

The windows can also be centr

system page 110. The sunr

central locking system.

The central locking system is c

the vehicle is locked with the k

stop working, which prevents

vehicle.

Should the central locking sys

all the locks individually. The f

sary. For manual release of the

Unlocking and locking 99

Safety fir Technical data

ith the key

turn the key in the driver door to position

n the door.

rs, the rear lid and the tank flap simultaneously.

tem will be disabled.

h the key

n the key in the driver door to position

and the rear lid.

Fig. 70 Turning the key to enable the open and close functions

AB

Exeo_EN.book Seite 99 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Automatic locking function (Auto Lock)*

The Auto Lock* function automatically locks all doors and the rear lid when

the vehicle exceeds a speed of about 15 km/h.

The vehicle is unlocked again automatically when the ignition key is

removed. Alternatively, the driver can also unlock the vehicle using the

central locking switch or by opening one of the doors.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the car if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

Note Should the central locking system fail to work, you can still lock and

unlock the driver door and the rear lid using the key. For manual release of the

tank flap page 220. Locking the doors manually if central locking fails to

work page 102.

The anti-theft mechanism and the anti-theft alarm* cannot be enabled if

the central locking is not working.

Never leave any valuable items in the vehicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a safe.

Unlocking the vehicle w

To unlock the vehicle,

fig. 70.

Pull the handle to ope

This will unlock all the doo

The anti-theft security sys

Locking the vehicle wit

To lock the vehicle, tur

fig. 70 .

This will lock all the doors

AA

Unlocking and locking100

ocked using the central locking system when it

locked separately after it has been closed. This

g locked out of the vehicle.

m can be enabled from inside the

l locking switch on the driver door.

button.

n using the central locking switch to lock your

Fig. 71 Detail of the driver door: Central locking switch

Exeo_EN.book Seite 100 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

The interior lights are switched off, provided the light switch is in the cour-

tesy light position.

The windows and the sunroof* will close as the key is held in the locking

position.

The anti-theft security system will be enabled immediately.

Locking the vehicle without enabling the anti-theft security system

With the anti-theft security system enabled, it is more difficult to break into

the vehicle. If the anti-theft security system has been enabled, the inside

door handles and the central locking switch will not work .

If you are leaving passengers in the vehicle while it is parked, it is possible to

lock the vehicle without enabling the anti-theft security system.

To do so, turn the key in the driver door twice in quick succession to position

page 99, fig. 70.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the car if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

Caution If the driver door is locked using the key while open, the car will be automat-

ically immobilised and the alarm triggered.

Note Please note that when the vehicle is locked without enabling the anti-

theft mechanism, the anti-theft alarm* remains operative. You should there-

fore switch off the interior monitoring* before locking the vehicle, as other-

wise the alarm* could be triggered unintentionally.

The driver door cannot be l

is still open. The door must be

helps to prevent you from bein

Central locking switch

The central locking syste

vehicle using the centra

Locking the vehicle

Press the fig. 71

Unlocking the vehicle

Press button .

Please note the following whe

vehicle:

AB

Unlocking and locking 101

Safety fir Technical data

g*

king feature allows you to only unlock

tank flap. All other doors and the rear

and tank flap

e unlock position, or press the unlock

ontrol once.

he rear lid and the tank flap

in five seconds, or press the unlock button

twice within five seconds.

nti-theft alarm* are immediately disabled if you

ithout unlocking the other doors page 106.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 101 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The doors and the rear lid cannot be opened from the outside (for security

reasons, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).

You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the inside

door handle.

When the driver door is open, it cannot be locked by pressing the central

locking switch and then closing the door. This helps to prevent you from

being locked out of the vehicle. The door has to be locked separately after it

has been closed.

In the event of an accident in which the airbags inflate, doors locked from

the inside will be automatically unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

WARNING

The central locking switch is still operative when the ignition is switched off. This switch can be used to automatically lock all the doors and the rear lid. However, since this makes it difficult to enter the car from the outside, you should never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

Note The central locking switch inside the vehicle will not be operative if the anti-

theft mechanism has been enabled.

Security central lockin

The security central loc

the driver door and the

lid remain locked.

Unlocking the driver door

Turn the key once to th

button on the remote c

Unlocking all the doors, t simultaneously.

Turn the key twice with

on the remote control

The security system and the a

unlock only the driver door, w

Unlocking and locking102

nly visible when the door is open) is

enger airbag door and the rear doors.

o turn the cap slightly and then fold it

lot inside fig. 73 and turn it as far as

egrees to the right (doors on right side)

e left side).

d it can no longer be opened from the outside.

the inside by pulling the door handle. If the

one of the rear doors, the door can be opened

dle once and then opening the door from the

Exeo_EN.book Seite 102 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Locking the doors manually if the central locking fails to work

Should the central locking system fail to work at any time (for

instance if there is no electrical power supply), each door will

have to be locked separately.

A manual locking device (o

provided on the front pass

Open the door.

Use the key fig. 72 t

downwards.

Insert the key into the s

the stop, i.e. about 90 d

or to the left (door on th

Once the door has been close

The door can be opened from

childproof lock is engaged on

by pulling the inside door han

outside.

Fig. 72 Manual locking device

Fig. 73 Enabling manual locking

Unlocking and locking 103

Safety fir Technical data

on the remote control key or press

driver door fig. 74. The rear lid will

. If your vehicle is equipped accordingly,

utomatically*.

nd let it drop into the latch .

e interior trim to make it easier to pull down the

, always check that the catch has engaged ld open while driving, even if it has been

be completely closed when the vehicle is aust fumes may be drawn into the vehicle.

symbol lights up in the instrument panel if the

when the ignition is switched on page 74.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 103 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Rear lid

Rear lid: opening and closing

Opening the rear lid

Press the centre button

the switch* on the

open.

Then lift up the rear lid

the rear lid will open a

Closing the rear lid

Pull down the rear lid a

Use the recessed handle in th

rear lid.

WARNING

After closing the rear lid properly. If not, the boot cou locked. Risk of accident!

The rear lid must always moving, otherwise toxic exh Danger of poisoning!

Note The door/rear lid warning

rear lid is not properly closed

Fig. 74 Driver door: Unlocking the rear lid

Fig. 75 Luggage compartment: opening from the outside

Unlocking and locking104

abled, the inside door handle will not work and

rom the outside.

y

ill lock and unlock the vehicle

the key in the lock.

ailable:

the vehicle

s confirmation when the vehicle is locked or

erior lights will automatically light up when the

t when the vehicle is locked, provided that the

ght position.

and the battery are integrated into the handle

e interior of the vehicle. The maximum range

ances. The range is reduced when the battery

s a foldaway key that can be used to manually

well as to start the engine.

ed or replaced, or if a replacement key is used,

mming by a qualified workshop. Only then will

ntrol again.

elevant authorisation requirements and has

Approvals Office for Telecommunications of the

All components are marked in accordance with

Exeo_EN.book Seite 104 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Childproof lock

Childproof locks on rear doors

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being

opened from the inside.

The rear doors are equipped with childproof locks. These can be

operated using the ignition key. The childproof locks are only visible

with the doors open.

Enabling the childproof lock

Turn the key in the direction of the arrow fig. 76.

Disabling the childproof lock

Turn the key in the opposite direction of the arrow.

When the childproof lock is en

the door can only be opened f

Remote control ke

Description

The remote control key w

without having to insert

The following functions are av

Locking and and unlocking

Unlocking the rear lid

All the turn signals will flash a

unlocked. Furthermore, the int

vehicle is unlocked and go ou

switches are in the courtesy li

The remote control transmitter

of the key. The receiver is in th

depends on different circumst

starts to lose power.

The remote control incorporate

lock or unlock the vehicle, as

If the receiver has been repair

the system will need re-progra

you be able use the remote co

The remote control meets all r

been approved by the Federal

Federal Republic of Germany.

Fig. 76 Childproof lock on the rear doors

Unlocking and locking 105

Safety fir Technical data

out 1 second.

old for at least one second.

ce as confirmation when you unlock the car. The

utomatically if you do not open one of the doors

ds after unlocking the car with button . This

from remaining unlocked if the unlocking

.

central locking* feature, you can unlock just the

y pressing button once or the whole vehicle

hen the vehicle is locked to confirm that the

ly locked.

ng the vehicle, the seat* and mirror* memory

ivated. The driver seat and exterior mirrors will

the positions stored in the memory.

tically light up when the vehicle is unlocked and

ked, provided that the switch is in the courtesy

ally children) in the car if it is locked from the curity system is enabled, as the doors and ned from the inside. Locked doors could delay

, potentially putting lives at risk.

AA

AA

Exeo_EN.book Seite 105 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

the current legal requirements. This certification forms the basis for official

approval for use in other countries.

Note The remote control is automatically disabled when the ignition is

switched on.

The function of the remote control may be impaired by interference from

other nearby radio signals (e.g. from a mobile phone or TV transmitter) if

these are in the same frequency range.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

Unlocking the vehicle

Press button fig. 77 for about 1 second.

Locking the vehicle

Press button for ab

Opening the rear lid

Press button and h

The turn signals will flash twi

vehicle will be locked again a

or the rear lid within 60 secon

function prevents the vehicle

button is pressed by mistake

On vehicles with the security driver door and the tank flap b

by pressing the button twice.

The turn signals flash once w

doors and rear lid are proper

Moreover, apart from unlocki

programmed in the key is act

be automatically adjusted to

The interior lights will automa

go out when the vehicle is loc

light position.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especi outside and the anti-theft se windows cannot then be ope assistance in an emergency

Fig. 77 Remote control key: Control buttons

AA

AB

AC

Unlocking and locking106

ystem*

larm if anyone attempts to break into

revent the vehicle being broken into or stolen.

nce with the vehicle, it triggers an audible and

enabled automatically when the vehicle is

l or by turning the key in the driver door (if the

alarm is enabled about 30 seconds after the

abled when the vehicle is unlocked using the

ll lock again automatically if none of the doors

fter pressing the remote control button.

rning the key in the driver door, all the other

k flap will remain locked.

ed with the key in the driver door, the key must

k and the ignition switched on within 15

n order to disable the alarm. The alarm will be switched on within 15 seconds.

r the alarm?

are monitored when the vehicle is locked:

net)

Exeo_EN.book Seite 106 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Note The remote control should only be used when the doors and the rear lid

are closed.

The remote control should not be used when the vehicle is out of sight.

The anti-theft alarm* can be accidentally triggered and the vehicle locked

if you press the locking button on the remote control inside the vehicle

before inserting the key in the ignition. If this should happen by mistake,

press the unlock button .

Re-synchronising

Should the remote control fail to lock or unlock the vehicle,

the system must be re-synchronised.

If the vehicle is locked, use the key to unlock the driver door.

Press the unlock button on the remote control.

Insert the key into the ignition and switch on the ignition.

Switch off the ignition and remove the key.

Press the unlock or the lock button .

Anti-theft alarm s

Description

The system triggers an a

the vehicle.

The anti-theft alarm helps to p

If the system senses interfere

visible alarm.

How is the system enabled?

The anti-theft alarm system is

locked with the remote contro

door is closed). The anti-theft

vehicle is locked.

How is the system disabled?

The anti-theft alarm is only dis

remote control. The vehicle wi

is opened within 60 seconds a

If the vehicle is unlocked by tu

doors, the rear lid and the tan

If the vehicle has been unlock

be inserted in the ignition loc

seconds of opening the door i

triggered if the ignition is not

When does the system trigge

The following parts of the car

Engine compartment (bon

Luggage compartment

Unlocking and locking 107

Safety fir Technical data

mediately if one of the battery cables is discon-

m is enabled.

triggers an alarm if it detects move-

.

terior monitoring if there is a possibility

iggered, e.g. by a pet or by an object

ar . The tow-away protection

d into the alarm system, should be disa-

ed or transported (e.g. by rail or ship).

Fig. 78 Interior moni- toring switch

Exeo_EN.book Seite 107 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Doors

Tilt angle (tow-away protection)

Ignition

Radio (only with a factory-fitted SEAT radio)

Interior page 107

If any of the named areas are entered, the alarm will be triggered.

How is the alarm disabled?

The alarm can be switched off by unlocking the vehicle using the remote

control, or by switching on the ignition with the key, thus disabling the

alarm system. The alarm will also switch off when it comes to the end of its

cycle.

Turn signals

The turn signals flash briefly when the vehicle is locked to confirm that the

doors, the engine bonnet and the rear lid are properly closed and locked.

If the indicators do not flash, check the doors, the bonnet and the rear lid to

make sure they are properly closed. The turn signals will also flash briefly if

one of the doors or the rear lid or engine bonnet are closed after the alarm

system has been enabled.

LED

When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driver door trim will flash

rapidly for about 30 seconds and then continue flashing slowly. This is to

indicate that the anti-theft alarm system (including the interior monitoring

and tow-away protection) is operative. If the LED lights up continuously for

about 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked instead of flashing, this means

the alarm system is not working properly.

Note To make sure that the alarm is fully operative when leaving the vehicle,

briefly check that all the doors and windows and the sunroof* are closed.

The alarm is triggered im

nected while the alarm syste

Interior monitoring*

The interior monitoring

ment inside the vehicle

You should disable the in

that the alarm could be tr

moving about inside the c

feature, which is integrate

bled if the car is being tow

Unlocking and locking108

dows

river door window

nger airbag door window.

ows

or window

oor window

you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only ime. This is particularly important if there are ight otherwise be able to start the engine or

Fig. 79 Detail of the driver door: Control switches

Exeo_EN.book Seite 108 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Disabling the interior monitoring

Open the door and pull out the switch (with the symbol ) to

one side of the storage compartment, in the driver door

page 107, fig. 78.

Then lock the vehicle.

Disabling the tow-away protection

Open the door and pull out switch (with the symbol ) to one

side of the storage compartment, in the driver door page 107,

fig. 78.

Then lock the vehicle.

The LED on switch will light up when the interior monitoring is disabled.

The LED on the top of the driver door trim will also light up for about 3

seconds. When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driver door trim

will flash rapidly for about 3 seconds. About 30 seconds later it starts flashing

slowly. The interior monitoring is automatically enabled again the next time

the vehicle is locked.

The LED on switch will light up when the tow-away protection function is

disabled. The LED on the top of the driver door trim will also light up for about

3 seconds. When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driver door

trim will flash rapidly for about 3 seconds. The tow-away protection is auto-

matically enabled again the next time the vehicle is locked.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the car if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

Electric windows

Control switches

Switches for front electric win

Switch fig. 79 for the d

Switch for the front passe

Switches for rear electric wind

Switch for the rear left do

Switch for the rear right d

Safety switch

WARNING

Always take the key with intend to be gone for a short t children in the car, as they m

AA

AB

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

Unlocking and locking 109

Safety fir Technical data

8, fig. 79 can deactivate the rear door

nly be operated from the rear when the safety

e safety switch when the electric windows in the

ch not pressed in).

out ten minutes after the ignition has been

dow switches are only disabled when the driver

irbag door is opened.

senger airbag door and on the rear

s a switch for its own window.

AE

Fig. 80 Switch on front passenger airbag door

Exeo_EN.book Seite 109 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could lead to injuries. The electric window switches are only disabled when the driver door or the front passenger airbag door is opened.

Never close the windows in a careless or uncontrolled manner, as there is a risk of causing injuries.

When locking the vehicle from the outside, make sure that nobody is inside the vehicle, as the windows cannot be opened from the inside in an emergency.

Switches in the driver door

The driver can operate all the electric windows in the vehicle.

The electric windows are controlled by two-stage switches:

Opening the windows

Press the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the

window has moved to the desired position.

Press the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will

automatically open all the way.

Closing the windows

Pull the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the window

has moved to the desired position.

Pull the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will

automatically close all the way.

Safety switch

The safety switch page 10

switches. The windows can o

switch is pressed in.

The symbol lights up on th

rear doors are disabled (swit

Note The windows will work for ab

switched off. The electric win

door or the front passenger a

Switch on the front pas doors

Each of these doors ha

WARNING (continued)

Unlocking and locking110

g the ignition key

ith the key and hold the key in the unlock

ndows are open.

the remote control

button until all windows are closed

the ignition key

h the key and hold the key in the lock

ndows are closed .

when you release the remote control button or

position in the door lock.

he windows to ensure nobody is hurt.

ould only use the remote control open and 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid injuries, indows when pressing the button to close ing as soon as the button is released.

ction not working

function will not work if the battery has been

function can be restored as follows:

it will go by lifting and holding the window

Exeo_EN.book Seite 110 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

The electric windows are controlled by two-stage switches:

Opening the windows

Press the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the

window has moved to the desired position.

Press the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will

automatically open all the way.

Closing the windows

Pull the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the window

has moved to the desired position.

Pull the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will

automatically close all the way.

Note The windows will work for about ten minutes after the ignition has been

switched off. The electric window switches are only disabled when one of the

front doors is opened.

Opening and closing the windows using the central locking function

The windows can be opened or closed simultaneously when

the vehicle is unlocked or locked.

Opening the windows using the remote control

Press and hold the unlock button on the remote control until

the windows reach the desired position.

Opening the windows usin

unlock the driver door w

position until all the wi

Closing the windows using

Press and hold the lock

.

Closing the windows using

Lock the driver door wit

position until all the wi

The windows will stop moving

turn the key back to its initial

WARNING

Be careful when closing t

For safety reasons, you sh close functions within about always keep an eye on the w them. The windows stop mov

Possible malfunctions

Automatic open and close fun

The automatic open and close

temporarily disconnected. The

Close the window as far as

switch.

Unlocking and locking 111

Safety fir Technical data

less wind noise if it is opened in the

engages at position fig. 81. The

pen as far as the comfort setting which

nd noise.

tion and hold it until the sunroof

sition. This position can cause more wind

ition .

Fig. 81 Details of head- liner: Sliding/tilting sunroof control

A1

A2

A0

Exeo_EN.book Seite 111 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Release the switch and then lift it again for one second. This will re-enable

the automatic function.

Sliding/tilting sunroof*

Description

The sliding/tilting sunroof is operated using the rotary control fig. 81. The

rotary control for sliding the roof open can be adjusted to several different

settings (with click stops). This control only works when the ignition is

switched on. The rotary control must be in the position if you want to tilt

the roof up at the rear.

The sunroof will work for about ten minutes after the ignition has been

switched off. However, it is immediately disabled when one of the front doors

is opened.

Sliding/Tilting

The sunroof will create

comfort setting.

Comfort setting

Turn the control until it

sunroof will now only o

means there is less wi

Opening completely

Turn the switch to posi

reaches the desired po

noise.

Tilting open

Turn the control to pos

A0

Unlocking and locking112

unroof. There is a risk of suffering injury. For the ignition key when leaving the vehicle.

n

closed from outside the vehicle.

on the driver door and hold it in the lock

ck button on the remote control until the

he way .

unroof. There is a risk of suffering injury.

er the air conditioner fan.

same way as the normal sliding/tilting sunroof.

sunroof and cannot be opened and closed

Exeo_EN.book Seite 112 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

With the control in position 0, press the control briefly to make

the roof tilt open all the way.

To open the roof as far as an intermediate setting, press and hold

the control until the roof has moved to the desired position.

When you release the switch it will automatically spring back from position

to position .

The sliding sun blind in the headliner automatically opens when the sunroof

is slid open. If required, it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.

It is advisable to close the sun blind when the vehicle is left standing in the

sun. It is important to remember to close the sunroof when parking the

vehicle or if it suddenly starts raining especially when the sun blind is

extended.

For further information on the automatic close function, see page 112.

Closing

Closing

Turn the control to position page 111, fig. 81 to close the

sunroof .

Closing the sunroof from the tilt position

Pull the specially formed rear end of the control and hold it until

the sunroof has moved down to the desired position.

Pull the switch briefly to lower the sunroof automatically to the

fully closed position. If required, the sunroof can be stopped in

any position by briefly pulling the control again .

WARNING

Take care when closing the s this reason, always take out

Automatic close functio

The sunroof can also be

Turn the key in the lock

position or press the lo

sunroof has closed all t

WARNING

Take care when closing the s

Sliding/tilting sunroof*

The solar cells in the roof pow

The sunroof is operated in the

The interior trim is fixed to the

separately.

A2 A1

A0

Unlocking and locking 113

Safety fir Technical data

nually

ed by hand if the electrical system

Fig. 82 Details of head- liner: Points for applying screwdriver

Fig. 83 Details of head- liner: Crank handle for manual operations

Exeo_EN.book Seite 113 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Closing the sunroof by overriding the safety cut-out

It is possible to override the safety cut-out to close the

sunroof.

The sliding sunroof mechanism is equipped with a safety cut-out. If

the roof should fail to close normally, it can be closed by overriding

the safety cut-out.

Turn the control to position page 111, fig. 81.

Pull on the control switch until the roof closes.

WARNING

Take care when closing the sunroof. There is a risk of suffering injury. For this reason, always take out the ignition key when leaving the vehicle.

Closing the sunroof ma

The sunroof can be clos

should fail to operate.

A0

Unlocking and locking114

Exeo_EN.book Seite 114 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Carefully insert the flat end of a screwdriver (from the car's tool

kit) at the rear of the glass cover on the interior light page 113,

fig. 82.

Carefully lever off the glass cover.

Take the crank handle from its mounting on the inside of the fuse

box cover page 257.

Insert the crank handle all the way into the hexagonal socket

page 113, fig. 83.

Hold the crank handle in position and turn it to close the sunroof.

Reinstall the glass cover: insert the plastic lugs first and then

press the cover upwards.

Have the fault repaired.

Note You can use the screwdriver handle to make it easier to turn the crank. Detach

the handle from the screwdriver and then fit the handle onto the crank.

A1

A2

Lights and visibility 115

Safety fir Technical data

ever forward page 122.

position O.

hicles for countries where daytime running

l vehicles with AFS headlights, daytime running

the ignition. Daytime running lights have main

not the dipped beam headlight function

will only work with the ignition on. The head-

hed to side lights after the ignition has been

beam headlights are turned on, the symbol

e lights switch.

r the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,

iver door is opened.

requirements when using the signalling and

ere.

nditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog

urn signals may be temporarily misted. This has

e of the lighting system. By switching on the

h the beam of light is projected will quickly be

s may continue to be misted.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 115 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Lights and visibility

Lights

Lights: switching on and off

Switching on the side lights

Turn the light switch fig. 84 to position .

Switching on dipped or main beam headlights (driving lights)

Dipped beam headlights

Turn the lights switch to position .

Main beam headlights

Turn the lights switch to position .

Press the main beam l

Switching off the lights

Turn the light switch to

Daytime running lights: In ve

lights are obligatory and in al

lights are turned on or off with

beam flashers, as usual, but

The dipped beam headlights

lights are automatically switc

switched off.

If the side lights or the dipped

will come on together with th

Note If the lights are left on afte

a buzzer sounds when the dr

Observe all relevant legal

lighting systems described h

Depending on weather co

lights, the tail lights and the t

no influence on the useful lif

lights, the area through whic

demisted. However, the edge

Fig. 84 Detailed view of the dash panel: Light switch

Lights and visibility116

ile using the automatic headlights function

ing through a tunnel), but do not disable them

eadlights will come on the next time the lights

. To be able to use the main beam headlights

ain beam lever back to the "off" position and

"on".

g lights and rear fog light can still be switched

y by using lights switch page 115.

h sensors that measure the ambient light. The

e switched on automatically if the available

reset value (for instance when driving through

switch off again automatically when the light

m headlights are only intended to assist the m headlights do not relieve the driver of his or them and turn off or turn on the lights manu- ighting conditions. The light sensors are, for n and fog - you should therefore always switch ts manually in these conditions and when

l requirements when using the signalling and ere.

tching is activated, when the ignition is turned

ts are turned off, and when the key is removed

ts are turned off.

pe of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so

so could prevent the automatic dipped beam

Exeo_EN.book Seite 116 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Automatic headlight switch* (sensor-controlled)

If you set the light switch to AUTO, the dipped headlights

will switch on and switch off automatically according to the

ambient light level.

Turning on dipped beam headlights

Turn the light switch fig. 85 to the AUTO position.

Turning off dipped beam headlights

Turn the light switch to position O.

The symbol on the switch lights up when the switch is in the AUTO position.

The dipped beams, side lights, tail lights and number plate lights come on

together when the headlights are switched on automatically.

When you are using the automatic headlights switch, you can also operate

the main beam headlights, however, please note the following: If you enable

the main beam headlights wh

during the day (e.g. when driv

again, only the dipped beam h

are automatically switched on

again, you must first pull the m

then push it forward again to

The side lights, headlights, fo

on manually in the normal wa

The interior mirror is fitted wit

dipped beam headlights will b

light drops below the factory p

a tunnel, etc.). The headlights

level increases .

WARNING

The automatic dipped bea driver. Automatic dipped bea her responsibility to control ally according to weather or l example, unable to detect rai on the dipped beam headligh driving after dark.

Observe all relevant lega lighting systems described h

Note If automatic headlight swi

off the dipped beam headligh

from the ignition the side ligh

If you have to attach any ty

in front of the sensors. Doing

Fig. 85 Detailed view of the dash panel: Light switch

Lights and visibility 117

Safety fir Technical data

switch to the second stop to switch on

o the switch will light up when the rear fog light

ravan equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle

racket*, only the rear fog light on the trailer or

ehind you, the rear fog light should only be used

lations.

A2

Exeo_EN.book Seite 117 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

headlight or anti-dazzle function from working correctly or even from working

at all.

The warning symbol will appear on the instrument panel if a malfunc-

tion occurs page 81.

Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling and

lighting systems described here.

Front fog lights

The light switch can also be used to turn on the front fog

lights.

Switching on the front fog lights

Do not turn the light switch page 115, fig. 84 to symbol .

First turn the light switch to the position or .

Then pull the light switch out to the first stop .

The front fog light symbol next to the switch will light up when the front fog

lights are on.

Rear fog light

The light switch can also be used to turn on the rear fog light.

Do not turn the light switch page 115, fig. 84 to symbol .

First turn the light switch page 115, fig. 84 to position

or .

Then pull out the light

the rear fog light.

The symbols and next t

is switched on.

If you are towing a trailer or ca

with a factory-fitted towing b caravan will light up.

Caution To avoid dazzling the traffic b

in accordance with legal regu

A1

Lights and visibility118

to prevent the setting from being

y.

home functions are controlled by light sensors

The system will function when the following

1.

ition are switched off.

rs register little or no light.

nd it is dark, the corresponding exterior lights

r door is opened.

for up to a maximum of 2 minutes as long as

is open.

bout 30 seconds to light up the area in front of

the rear lid have been closed.

t, but you can have it changed by a qualified

uirements (max. setting is 60 seconds).

d on when the vehicle is unlocked with the

ey.

n the driver door is opened or after 60 seconds

gain automatically page 105.

move the key from the ignition, as the lights home is enabled. This will lead to battery own.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 118 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Coming home and leaving home functions*

The coming home and leaving home functions are used to

light up the surroundings in the dark. The front fog lights, the

rear side lights and the number plate light switch on.

Enabling the functions

Briefly press the knob fig. 86 to release it from its set position.

Turn the knob to position 1.

Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being

changed unintentionally.

Disabling the functions

Briefly press the knob fig. 86 to release it from its set position.

Turn the knob to position 0.

Press the knob in again

changed unintentionall

The coming home and leaving

in the interior mirror housing.

requirements are met:

The knob is set to position

The headlights and the ign

Dark conditions; the senso

Coming home

When the system is enabled a

switch on as soon as the drive

The exterior lights will stay on

one of the doors or the rear lid

The exterior lights stay on for a

the car after all the doors and

This time interval is factory-se

workshop to suit your own req

Leaving home

The exterior lights are switche

button on the remote control k

The exterior lights go out whe

when the vehicle locks itself a

WARNING

Before leaving the vehicle, re will not go out if the coming discharge and vehicle breakd

Fig. 86 Detailed view of the dash panel: Coming home and leaving home functions

Lights and visibility 119

Safety fir Technical data

increase the brightness.

reduce the brightness.

n

plays will adjust automatically, depending on

tched on

switched on, the brightness of the instrument

console lighting can be varied by pressing the

l

headlights are switched on, the range

e adjusted to suit the load being

Fig. 88 Headlight range control

Exeo_EN.book Seite 119 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note If you always wish to use the coming home and leaving home functions,

you can leave them permanently switched on. As the system is controlled via

a light sensor, it will only work in dark conditions.

Permanent use of the coming home and leaving home functions, particu-

larly on short journeys, will increase the load on the battery. To make sure the

battery is always sufficiently charged, occasionally drive longer distances.

If the fog lights have been switched on by the coming home and leaving

home functions, they will always be switched off when you switch on the igni-

tion.

Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling and

lighting systems described here.

Instrument lighting

The brightness of the instrument lighting, displays and

centre console lighting can be varied as required.

Press the button to

Press the button to

With the ignition switched o

The lighting of the digital dis

the ambient light.

With the vehicle's lights swi

When the vehicle's lights are

lighting, displays and centre

and buttons.

Headlight range contro

When the dipped beam

of the headlights can b

carried.

Fig. 87 Instrument panel lighting

+

-

+ -

Lights and visibility120

*

hts turn on automatically when the

fig. 89 to release it from its set position.

n 1.

to prevent the setting from being

y.

fig. 89 to release it from its set position.

n 0.

Fig. 89 Daytime running lights switch

Exeo_EN.book Seite 120 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Briefly press the knob page 119, fig. 88 to release it from

its set position.

Turn the knob to the required setting.

Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being

changed unintentionally.

Settings

The settings roughly correspond to the following load conditions:

Two front occupants, luggage compartment empty

Full load of occupants, luggage compartment empty

Full load of occupants, luggage compartment loaded

Driver only, luggage compartment loaded

Caution Always adjust the headlights to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Make sure

you lower the headlights when the vehicle is more heavily laden.

Dynamic headlight range control

On vehicles with xenon gas-discharge bulbs, the headlights automatically

adapt to suit the load being carried when the ignition is switched on. The

headlights are also automatically adjusted when the vehicle is in motion (e.g.

when accelerating and braking).

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lig

ignition is switched on.

Enabling the functions

Briefly press the knob

Turn the knob to positio

Press the knob in again

changed unintentionall

Disabling the functions

Briefly press the knob

Turn the knob to positio

AO

A1

A2

A3

Lights and visibility 121

Safety fir Technical data

ives better illumination of the curve zone and

ving around a bend fig. 90. The dynamic

utomatically depending on the speed and the

are regulated automatically when you drive

n how far you turn the steering wheel. The two

rent angles to avoid that the front of the vehicle

peed of about 10 km/h.

hts are used to draw the attention of

r vehicle in emergencies.

Fig. 91 Centre console: Switch for hazard warning lights

Exeo_EN.book Seite 121 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being

changed unintentionally.

This button activates or deactivates the daytime running lights function. With

the function activated, when the ignition is switched on the daytime running

lights are turned on automatically.

Note Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your

country.

Adaptive headlights* (for driving round bends)

When driving around bends, the headlights will light the

most important areas of the road.

The dynamic cornering light g

the side of the road when dri

cornering light is controlled a

steering wheel angle.

The dipped beam headlights

around a bend, depending o

main headlights move at diffe

is left completely in the dark.

Note The system operates from a s

Hazard warning lights

The hazard warning lig

other road users to you

Fig. 90 Adaptive head- lights when driving

Lights and visibility122

ain beam headlight lever

n beam headlight lever also operates

he headlight flasher.

eam headlight lever has the following

ay up to indicate right or all the way down

2.

wn just as far as the point of resistance

rn signals flash for as long as you hold

hen changing a lane).

p or down as far as the point of resistance

briefly (the turn signals flash three times).

Fig. 92 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever

Exeo_EN.book Seite 122 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Press the switch page 121, fig. 91 to switch the hazard

warning lights on or off.

All four turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are

switched on. The hazard warning light indicator lamps and the turn

signal indicator lamp itself flash at the same time. The hazard warning

lights also work when the ignition is switched off.

In an accident in which the airbags are triggered, the hazard warning lights

are switched on automatically.

Note You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, e.g.

When reaching the tail end of a traffic jam

If your vehicle breaks down or there is an emergency

If your vehicle is being towed away or if you are towing another vehicle

Turn signal and m

The turn signal and mai

the parking lights and t

The turn signal and main b

functions:

Indicators

Move the lever all the w

to indicate left fig. 9

Move the lever up or do

and hold it there: the tu

the lever (for instance w

Move the lever briefly u

and release it to signal

Lights and visibility 123

Safety fir Technical data

adlights or the headlight flasher if this would

d glove compartment light

lso incorporates the reading lights for

er.

g. 93 for the front interior light has the

Fig. 93 Details of head- liner: front interior lights

Exeo_EN.book Seite 123 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Main beam headlights

Press the lever forward to switch on the main beams.

Pull the lever back towards you to switch the main beam head-

lights off again.

Headlight flasher

Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the flasher.

Parking light

Switch the ignition off.

Move the lever up or down to turn on the right or left-hand

parking lights respectively.

Notes on these functions

The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The turn

signal lamp or flashes in the instrument panel when the turns signals

page 65 are working.

The turn signals are cancelled automatically when the steering wheel is

returned to the straight-ahead position.

The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam

headlights are already on. The main beam headlight indicator lamp then

comes on in the instrument panel.

The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever, even if no

other lights are switched on. The main beam headlight indicator lamp

then comes on in the instrument panel.

When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the tail light

on one side of the car light up with reduced intensity. The parking lights will

only work with the ignition off.

Caution Never use the main beam he

dazzle oncoming traffic.

Interior lights

Front interior lights an

The front interior light a

the driver and passeng

The rocker switch fi

following functions:

AA

Lights and visibility124

automatically adjusted by a dimmer when they

illuminates a number of minor

come on automatically when the ignition is

reen* also comes on when the side lights or

e centre console is illuminated from above.

not be switched off manually.

Fig. 94 Details of head- liner: background lighting

Exeo_EN.book Seite 124 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Door light position

Move switch to the centre position.

Interior light switched on

Move switch to position I.

Interior light switched off

Move switch to position O.

Front reading lights

Press one of the switches to turn the left and right reading

lights on and off.

Glove compartment light

Open the glove compartment on the front passenger side. The

glove compartment light will come on automatically if the side

lights or headlights are switched on, and will go out again when

the glove compartment is closed.

Footwell* and door lighting

This is switched on when the doors are opened and off when they

are closed.

If the switch is in the courtesy light position, the interior light comes on auto-

matically when the vehicle is unlocked or the doors are opened. The light also

comes on when the key is pulled out of the ignition. The light turns off about

30 seconds after closing the doors. The interior light is switched off immedi-

ately when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.

If a door is left open, the light is switched off after about 10 minutes to

prevent the battery from running flat.

The brightness of the lights is

are switched on.

Background lighting*

The background lighting

controls.

The lights in the door handles

switched on.

The lighting above the windsc

headlights are switched on. Th

The background lighting* can

AA

AA

AA

AB

Lights and visibility 125

Safety fir Technical data

lighting

of the luggage compartment. A second light is

the rear lid opening.

n automatically when the rear lid is opened. The

switched off automatically if the rear lid is left

minutes.

Fig. 96 Detailed view of the top of the luggage compartment: luggage compartment lighting

Exeo_EN.book Seite 125 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Rear reading lights

The reading lights are switched on and off with the switches .

Luggage compartment

The light is in the upper part

provided on the inside, below

The light fig. 96 switches o

luggage compartment light is

open for more than about 10

Fig. 95 Details of head- liner: rear reading lights

Lights and visibility126

vironment ow as soon as the rear window has demisted.

can also save fuel.

ove visibility and contribute to safety.

r and the front passenger can be pulled out of

of the vehicle and turned towards the doors

isor have covers. On opening the cover , the

adliner is automatically switched on. The light

ver is closed and when the sun visor is pushed

Fig. 98 Sun visor

A2

Exeo_EN.book Seite 126 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Visibility

Heated rear window

The rear window heating clears the rear window of condensa-

tion.

Press button to switch the rear window heating on or off

fig. 97.

The heated rear window only works when the ignition is switched on. An indi-

cator lamp in the button lights up when the rear window heater is switched

on.

The heated rear window switches off automatically after about 10 minutes if

the outside temperature is above 0C.

Depending on the outside temperature, the exterior mirrors are also heated

while the heated rear window is turned on.

For the sake of the en Switch of the heated rear wind

By saving electrical power you

Sun visors

The sun visors can impr

The sun visors for the drive

their mountings in the centre

fig. 98.

The vanity mirrors in the sun v

mirror light* located in the he

switches itself off when the co

back up.

Fig. 97 Switch for heated rear window

A1

Lights and visibility 127

Safety fir Technical data

ows)

ook it into the hooks at the top of the door

extend or retract the electric sun blind for

. 100.

dow switches off automatically when it reaches

ade to move in the other direction before it

riefly pressing the switch a second time. If the

e blind is still moving, it continues until it

ore switching off.

e triggered if the sun blind for the rear window

will then be a short delay before the blind can

blind is less flexible at low temperatures, the

ff when the temperature in the car is below -5C.

rated when the temperature inside the car rises

Exeo_EN.book Seite 127 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Sun blind*

Sun blinds are provided for the rear window and the rear side

windows.

Sun blinds (rear side wind

Pull out the blind and h

frame fig. 99.

Sun blind (rear window)

Press the switch to

the rear window fig

The sun blind for the rear win

the end position. It can be m

reaches its end position by b

ignition is turned off while th

reaches the end position bef

Note An overload cut-out may b

is operated repeatedly. There

be operated again.

As the material of the sun

electric actuator is switched o

The sun blind can only be ope

above this level.

Fig. 99 Sun blind extended to cover rear side window

Fig. 100 Switch for elec- tric sun blind on rear window

Lights and visibility128

ith a rain sensor*, you can move the

to set the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

sition .

sition .

he steering wheel, , to activate the

asher will stop and the wipers will keep

ely 4 seconds.

wiper

osition .

ork only when the ignition is switched on.

ic lights, the wiper speed will automatically be

automatically be set to the intermittent wipe

re heated when the ignition is switched on.

rmittent wipe setting are also varied automati-

eed (in addition to the manual delay setting).

n you should only pull the lever briefly to wash

headlight washers* will also be enabled. This

nt of fluid from the reservoir.

A3

A4

A5

A0

Exeo_EN.book Seite 128 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Windscreen wipers

Windscreen wipers

The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers

and the automatic wash and wipe.

The windscreen wiper lever fig. 101 has the following settings:

Brief wipe

Move the lever down to position to give the windscreen a brief

wipe.

Intermittent wipe / Rain sensor* (enabling)

Move the lever up to position .

Move the switch up or down to set the wiper intervals.

On vehicles equipped w

switch up and down

Slow wipe

Move the lever up to po

Continuous wipe

Move the lever up to po

Automatic wash and wipe

Pull the lever towards t

windscreen washer.

Release the lever. The w

running for approximat

Disabling the windscreen

Pull the lever to basic p

General notes

The washers and wipers will w

If you stop briefly, e.g. at traff

reduced. The rain sensor* will

function.

The windscreen washer jets a

The wiper intervals in the inte

cally according to the road sp

When the lights are switched o

the windscreen, otherwise the

will use an unnecessary amou

Fig. 101 Windscreen wiper lever

A1

A2

AA

AA

Lights and visibility 129

Safety fir Technical data

the windscreen wiper system (lever in position

tic car wash. This will avoid inadvertent trig-

sible damage to the wiper system.

id reservoir is full before starting a long journey.

.

s can cause smearing on the glass which can

of the rain sensor*. Check the condition of wind-

r intervals.

em

n, operate the automatic wash and wipe

, and keep the lever pulled towards you for

Fig. 102 Headlight with extended washer jet

Exeo_EN.book Seite 129 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Rain sensor

The rain sensor* will only function in the intermittent wipe position. The inter-

mittent wipe function is enabled automatically when it starts to rain.

If the windscreen wiper lever was in the intermittent wipe position when the

ignition was off, the rain sensor will not activate until you reach a speed of 6

km/h.

Use control to set the sensitivity of the rain sensor*.

If you have selected a high sensitivity level for the rain sensor the windscreen

wipers will react sooner to any moisture on the windscreen.

The wiper intervals in the intermittent wipe setting are also varied automati-

cally according to the road speed (in addition to the sensitivity setting).

WARNING

For correct visibility and safe driving, the wiper must be in perfect condition page 212. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

The rain sensor* is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is still obliged to manually operate the windscreen wipers as required depending on visibility.

Do not use water-repellent coatings on the windscreen. In bad visibility conditions such as light rain, low sun or when driving at night, these coat- ings can cause increased dazzle, which is a serious safety hazard. Such coatings can also cause the wiper blades to judder.

Caution In the event of frost, check that the wiper blade has not frozen before

enabling the windscreen wipers. Should the windscreen wiper system be

enabled when the blade is frozen, this could damage it or even the wind-

screen wiper system motor.

Make sure you switch off

0) before you use an automa

gering of the wipers and pos

Note Check that the washer flu

Fill the reservoir page 230

Worn or dirty wiper blade

also impair the effectiveness

screen wiper blades at regula

Headlight washer syst

With the lights switched o

page 128, fig. 101

at least 1 second.

AA

A5

Lights and visibility130

ror with automatic adjustment*

le function can be switched on and off

unction

103. Indicator lamp goes off.

unction

103. The indicator lamp will light up.

ivated every time the ignition is switched on.

s up in the mirror housing.

is enabled, the interior mirror will darken auto-

unt of light it receives. The anti-dazzle function

Fig. 103 Interior mirror with anti-dazzle setting: Indicator lamp and on/off switch

AB

AB

Exeo_EN.book Seite 130 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

The headlight washer jets come out of the bumper automatically (under water

pressure) page 129, fig. 102.

Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the lenses at regular intervals, for

instance when filling the tank.

To ensure that the system works properly in winter, keep the nozzle holders

free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer spray.

Rear view mirrors

Interior mirror with manual anti-dazzle setting

Normal setting

Point the lever at the bottom of the mirror forwards.

Anti-dazzle setting for the interior mirror

Point the lever at the bottom of the mirror to the rear.

Anti-dazzle interior mir

The automatic anti-dazz

as desired.

Switching off anti-dazzle f

Press button fig.

Switching on anti-dazzle f

Press button fig.

Anti-dazzle function

The anti-dazzle function is act

The green indicator lamp light

When the anti-dazzle function

matically according to the amo

is disabled if:

AA

AA

Lights and visibility 131

Safety fir Technical data

adjusted electrically.

rrors

to position fig. 104 (left exterior

(right exterior mirror).

ired to adjust the exterior mirror for a good

irrors

on .

rior mirrors, for example when parking or when

s.

Fig. 104 Detailed view of the armrest: Adjuster knob

AL

AA

Exeo_EN.book Seite 131 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

the interior lighting is switched on

reverse gear is engaged

Sensors for automatic headlights*

When the light switch is set to the AUTO position, the dipped beam head-

lights are switched on and off automatically according to the ambient light

level with the aid of the sensors located in the interior mirror page 116.

WARNING

Electrolyte fluid can leak from a broken mirror. This fluid can cause irrita- tion to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. Wash thoroughly with clean water should you come into contact with this fluid. Seek medical assist- ance if needed!

Caution Electrolyte fluid leaking from a broken mirror can cause damage to plastic

surfaces. Use a sponge or similar to remove the fluid as soon as possible.

Note The interior mirror automatic anti-dazzle function* will only work properly

if the sun blind* for the rear window is retracted and if there are no other

objects preventing light from reaching the mirror.

If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in

front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the automatic headlight or anti-

dazzle function from working correctly or even from working at all.

Exterior mirrors

The exterior mirrors are

Adjusting the exterior mi

Turn the adjuster knob

mirror) or position

Move the knob as requ

view behind you.

Retracting both exterior m

Turn the knob to positi

It is advisable to fold the exte

driving through narrow space

AR

Lights and visibility132

Exeo_EN.book Seite 132 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Heated mirrors

The mirrors are heated (depending on the outside temperature) when the

heated rear window page 126 is switched on.

Memory for exterior mirrors*

On vehicles with memory function for the driver seat, the setting of the exte-

rior mirrors is automatically stored together with the seat position

page 137.

Tilting function for exterior mirror on the passenger side* (only if equipped with memory for exterior mirrors)

When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror surface tilts slightly downwards,

provided the mirror control is switched to the exterior mirror on the passenger

side (knob in position page 131, fig. 104). This provides a better view

of the kerb when parking.

The mirror returns to its original position as soon as reverse gear is disen-

gaged and the vehicle is driven forwards at a speed above 15 km/h, or when

the mirror control is turned to position or to the neutral position .

Caution Rear view convex or aspheric* mirrors increase the field of vision,

although objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. Therefore,

you should not rely on these mirrors for judging the distance of vehicles

behind.

If one of the mirror housings is knocked out of position (e.g. when

parking), the mirrors must first be fully retracted with the electric control. Do

not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as this will interfere with the mirror

adjuster function.

Note If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be adjusted

by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.

AR

AL A0

Seats and storage compartments 133

Safety fir Technical data

rds and backwards

. 105 and move the seat to the desired

and move the seat further until the

moved forwards and backwards when the lure to do so could result in an accident.

ht*

. 105 up repeatedly until the seat is in the

n repeatedly until the seat is in the

eat must not be adjusted while driving. Failure ccident.

A1

Exeo_EN.book Seite 133 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Seats and storage compartments

Manual adjustment of the front seats

Seat adjuster controls

There are several seat adjustment functions for your conven-

ience

Some of the equipment listed is only fitted on certain models or is an optional

extra.

Control switches

Moving the seat backwards or forwards

Raising/lowering the seat

Adjusting the backrest angle

Adjusting lumbar support

Moving the seats forwa

Lift the lever fig

position.

Then release the lever

catch engages.

WARNING

The driver seat must only be vehicle is at a standstill. Fai

Adjusting the seat heig

Raising the seat

Pull the lever fig

desired position.

Lowering the seat

Press the lever dow

desired position.

WARNING

The height of the driver s to do so could result in an a

Fig. 105 Adjuster controls on driver seat

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A2

A2

Seats and storage compartments134

Exeo_EN.book Seite 134 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Be careful when adjusting the seat height. Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention.

Adjusting the backrest angle

Lean forwards to take your weight off the backrest.

Turn the adjuster wheel page 133, fig. 105 to set the angle

of the backrest as required.

WARNING

The front backrests must not be reclined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and the airbag system might not protect as they should, with the subse- quent danger of injury.

Adjusting lumbar support*

Do not exert any pressure on the backrest and turn adjuster

wheel page 133, fig. 105 to adjust lumbar support.

As you make the adjustments, the curvature of the cushioned area of the

lumbar region becomes more or less acute. In this way, it adapts to the

natural curvature of the spine.

WARNING (continued)

A3

A4

Seats and storage compartments 135

Safety fir Technical data

for the seat and backrest correspond with

seats can be adjusted merely by pressing

in the required direction.

/ backwards

106 forwards or backwards fig. 107

t

down .

t part of the seat

h up or down .

part of the seat

up or down .

Fig. 107 Front seat: Seat adjustment switches

A1

AA A2

AA A3

Exeo_EN.book Seite 135 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Electric adjustment of front seats*

Adjusting the seat

The arrangement of the switches corresponds with the design

of the seats.

The adjustment switches

the design of the seat. The

the corresponding switch

Moving the seat forwards

Press switch fig.

.

Raising/lowering the sea

Press switch up or

Raising/lowering the fron

Press the front of switc

Raising/lowering the rear

Press the rear of switch

Fig. 106 Front seat: Adjuster controls AA

AA

Seats and storage compartments136

appropriate direction of the arrow

backrest .

be reclined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts not protect as they should, with the subse-

be adjusted to fit the natural curve of

Fig. 109 Front seat: Adjuster switch for lumbar support

Exeo_EN.book Seite 136 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Control switches

Seat adjustment

Backrest adjustment

Lumbar support*

WARNING

The electrical seat adjustment also works when the ignition is off or when the key is not in the ignition. To avoid accidental injuries, never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

For safety reasons, the seat must only be adjusted when the vehicle is at a standstill. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Be careful when adjusting the seat height. Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention.

Adjusting the backrest angle

Press the button in the

fig. 108 to adjust the

WARNING

The front backrests must not and the airbag system might quent danger of injury.

Lumbar support*

The lumbar support can

the spine.

AA

AB

AC

Fig. 108 Front seat: Back- rest adjuster switch

Seats and storage compartments 137

Safety fir Technical data

r seat*

e driver door can be used to store and

nt positions for the driver seat and

3 and 4 fig. 110, you can store and recall the

ions for up to four different drivers.

bled if the button is in the up position

will light up next to the button (only

itched on).

main in the memory. However, the seat and the

be adjusted using the conventional electrical

Fig. 110 Driver door: Memory system

STOP

STOP

Exeo_EN.book Seite 137 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Adjusting the contour of lumbar support

Press the front part of the adjuster switch page 136, fig. 109

to increase the contour of the lumbar support.

Press the rear part of the adjuster switch to decrease the contour

of the lumbar support.

Adjusting the height of lumbar support

Press the top part of the adjuster switch to move the lumbar

support upwards.

Press the bottom part of the adjuster switch to move the lumbar

support down.

The lumbar support provides effective support for the natural curvature of the

spine to give a more relaxed seating position, especially on long journeys.

Memory for drive

Description

The recall buttons in th

recall up to four differe

exterior mirrors.

Memory buttons

Using the recall buttons 1, 2,

seat and exterior mirror posit

button

The seat memory will be disa

(press and release). The word

visible when the lights are sw

The stored settings will all re

exterior mirrors can now only

STOP

Seats and storage compartments138

the settings stored in memory buttons 1 to 4.

at any time.

ecalled using either the memory

ntrol (remote control key).

n, press the desired memory button

ed, press and hold down the appropriate

e seat and exterior mirrors reach their

.

g the remote control and open the driver

minutes.

to be called up using the memory buttons if the

in 10 minutes after unlocking the vehicle with

at must only be adjusted when the vehicle is o could result in an accident.

ory function can be stopped at any time by by briefly pressing any of the memory

Exeo_EN.book Seite 138 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

adjustment. Use of the button is recommended to disable the memory

system when the vehicle is being driven temporarily by a different driver

whose settings do not need to be stored in the memory.

Note You can also use the remote control to call up the stored settings

page 139.

Storing settings

The button must be in its down position (pressed in) before

you can store the desired settings.

Adjust the driver seat as required page 135.

Adjust both exterior mirrors page 131.

Press and hold the button. At the same time, press one of

the memory buttons for at least a second.

Release both buttons. The setting is now stored on the selected

memory button.

Any new setting selected automatically cancels the existing setting stored on

the memory button. It is best to begin with memory button No. 1 for the first

driver and then assign the other memory buttons to each subsequent driver.

The seat and mirror positions are stored when the car is locked with the

remote control and are assigned to the remote control key. The exterior

mirrors adjust automatically to the previous position when you unlock the

car; the driver seat adjusts automatically when you open the driver door.

However, this does not delete

These settings can be enabled

Enabling settings

Stored settings can be r

buttons or the remote co

Using the memory buttons

If the driver door is ope

briefly.

If the driver door is clos

memory button until th

programmed positions

Using the remote control

Unlock the vehicle usin

door within the next ten

The seat adjustment will have

driver door is not opened with

the remote control.

WARNING

For safety reasons, the se at a standstill. Failure to do s

In an emergency, the mem pressing the STOP button or buttons.

STOP

STOP

MEMO

Seats and storage compartments 139

Safety fir Technical data

perly worn seat belts, the head

protection, provided they are prop-

height of the occupant.

t

of the head restraint with both hands.

int.

int

wer the head restraint.

Fig. 111 Front seats: Head restraints

Exeo_EN.book Seite 139 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Assigning remote control keys

The key must be assigned to a memory button so that the

positions stored in the memory can also be recalled using the

remote control key.

Assigning the remote control key to a memory button

Using the memory button, recall the settings that are to be

programmed onto the key.

Keeping the memory button pressed down, press the unlock

button on the remote control key within 10 seconds.

Wait for about 2 seconds before releasing the memory button.

Deleting assignment of the remote control key to the memory button

Press and hold the button and press the unlock button on

the remote control key within 10 seconds.

Wait for about 2 seconds before releasing the button.

The previous settings are automatically cancelled when the keys are re-

assigned to different memory buttons.

Head restraints

Front head restraints

In combination with pro

restraints offer effective

erly adjusted to suit the

Raising the head restrain

Take hold of the sides

Pull up the head restra

Lowering the head restra

Press button and lo

MEMO

MEMO

AA

Seats and storage compartments140

f the head restraint with both hands.

p as far as it will go.

t

112 and lower the head restraint.

int

p as far as it will go.

112 and pull out the head restraint.

t in its guides until it clicks into place.

wer the head restraint.

cupied, the head restraints should be moved

they do not obstruct the driver's field of

Exeo_EN.book Seite 140 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Removing the head restraints

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Press button and pull out the head restraint.

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place.

Press button and lower the head restraint.

The height of the head restraints is adjustable. They should be set to suit the

height of the occupant. In combination with the seat belts, the head

restraints offer effective protection, provided they are properly adjusted.

For best protection, the top of the head restraint should be at least at eye level

or higher.

Head restraints on the side rear seats

Raising the head restraint

Take hold of the sides o

Pull the head restraint u

Lowering the head restrain

Press button fig.

Removing the head restra

Pull the head restraint u

Press button fig.

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restrain

Press button and lo

When the rear seats are not oc

to the lowest position so that

vision.

AA

AA

Fig. 112 Outer rear seats: Head restraints

AA

AA

AA

Seats and storage compartments 141

Safety fir Technical data

ccupied the head restraints should be moved to

ey do not obstruct the driver's field of vision.

sted to several positions and incorpo-

tment.

of the armrest, fold the armrest all the way

radually until it engages in the desired

partment

fig. 114.

Fig. 114 Armrest between the driver seat and front passenger seat

Exeo_EN.book Seite 141 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Central head restraint of the rear seat

Raising the head restraint

Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Lowering the head restraint

Press button fig. 113 and lower the head restraint.

Removing the head restraint

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Press button fig. 113 and pull out the head restraint.

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place.

Press button and lower the head restraint.

When the rear seats are not o

the lowest position so that th

Armrests

The armrest can be adju

rates a storage compar

Adjusting the armrest

To adjust the position

down.

Then lift the armrest g

position.

Opening the storage com

Press the release lever

Fig. 113 Centre rear seat: Head restraints

AA

AA

AA

Seats and storage compartments142

luggage compartment can suddenly shift and g of the vehicle.

n manoeuvre, loose objects in the passenger rward and might injure vehicle occupants.

the luggage compartment and use appro- articularly in the case of heavy objects.

y objects, always bear in mind that a change lso cause changes in vehicle handling.

on page 7.

usted according to the load. Consult the label

s inside the fuel tank flap where required

Exeo_EN.book Seite 142 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Please note that the armrest can restrict the driver's movements when it is

lowered. The armrest should therefore be raised when driving in city traffic.

Luggage compartment

Loading the luggage compartment

Loads in the luggage compartment should be safely secured.

To maintain safe handling on the road, please observe the following

points:

Distribute the load evenly.

Position heavy items as far forward as possible fig. 115.

WARNING

Unsecured objects in the cause changes in the handlin

In an accident or a sudde compartment can be flung fo

Always keep all objects in priate grips to secure them, p

When you transport heav of the centre of gravity can a

Please refer to the notes

Note The tyre pressure must be adj

containing the pressure value

page 219, fig. 163.

Fig. 115 Position heavy items as far forward as possible.

Seats and storage compartments 143

Safety fir Technical data

ackrest is securely locked in position so that per protection on the centre rear seat.

lways be securely latched so that objects rtment will not fly forward during sudden

to an upright position, make sure that the seat

re in their guides, so that they cannot be caught

es for the backrest.

the rear backrest can be used to store

rd objects on the rear shelf. These could cause ied suddenly.

could chafe against the wires of the heating

nd cause damage.

een the rear window and the storage shelf are

red ventilation.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 143 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Extending the luggage compartment

The two sections of the backrest can be folded forwards either

together or separately to increase the capacity of the luggage

compartment.

Folding the backrest forwards

Press the release lever fig. 116 in the direction indicated

by the arrow.

Fold down the backrest.

Returning the backrest to its upright position

Push the backrest up until it engages securely . The red

marking on the tab should no longer be visible when the

backrest is properly secured.

WARNING

Make sure that the rear b the seat belt can provide pro

The rear backrest must a stored in the luggage compa braking.

Caution When returning the backrest

belts for the outer rear seats a

up and damaged in the catch

Rear shelf

The storage tray behind

light items of clothing.

WARNING

Do not store any heavy or ha injury if the brakes are appl

Caution Please note that hard objects

element in the rear window a

Note Make sure that the slots betw

kept clear to ensure unimpai

Fig. 116 Backrest release lever

AA

AB

Seats and storage compartments144

for the ski bag cover fig. 117 -arrow-

wnwards.

ar armrest.

partment, press down the release catch

d pull out the cover.

ski bag.

be loaded through the luggage compart-

.

t fig. 118 of the ski bag into the

.

to tighten.

ad-through hatch in the luggage

ski bag.

f the load-through hatch from the

t.

AA

AB

AC

Exeo_EN.book Seite 144 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Ski bag*

You can use the "ski bag" to transport skis or other extra-long

objects safely inside the vehicle without soiling or damaging

the upholstery.

Loading

Open the rear lid.

Press the release catch

and swivel the cover do

Pull down the centre re

From the passenger com

for the ski bag cover an

Pull out and unfold the

The long items can now

ment into the ski bag

Securing

Insert the fastening bel

centre seat belt buckle

Pull the free end of belt

Storing

Close the cover of the lo

compartment.

Carefully fold away the

Close the inside cover o

passenger compartmen

Fig. 117 Detailed view of the rear of the rear back- rest: Ski bag cover

Fig. 118 Securing the ski bag on the centre seat belt buckle on the rear seat bench

Seats and storage compartments 145

Safety fir Technical data

ttached at the marked points only.

must be fitted exactly between the points

of sealing strip fig. 119. The arrows are only

f must be securely attached. The car's

enever you carry loads on the vehicle.

of of your vehicle is 75 kg. Use the weight of the

he load as a basis to calculate the roof load.

sed, the roof rack must not be loaded to the

If less resistant systems are used, these must

Fig. 119 Attachment points for basic support units

Exeo_EN.book Seite 145 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

The ski bag must be secured in place with the fastening belt after it has been loaded.

Note Do not fold away the ski bag after use if it is still damp.

Roof rack

Description

Additional luggage can be carried on the roof rack.

Note the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:

There are aerodynamic drainage channels on the roof of the vehicle and,

therefore, normal roof racks cannot be used. We recommend using the basic

support units from the range of original SEAT accessories.

These basic supports are the base of a complete roof rack system. For

safety reasons, however, the corresponding additional fastenings must be

fitted to carry luggage, bicycles, surfboards, skis and boats. All the parts of

this system are available from SEAT Authorised Services.

Caution Any damage to the vehicle caused by the use of other types of roof rack or

incorrect installation will not be covered by the factory warranty. The roof rack

system must therefore be installed exactly according to the instructions

provided.

Attachment points

The roof rack must be a

Installation

The feet of the support units

marked with arrows on the ro

visible with the doors open.

Roof load

Loads carried on the roo

handling is affected wh

The authorised load on the ro

roof rack system and that of t

If less resistant systems are u

maximum weight permitted.

Seats and storage compartments146

r, press the symbol on the drink holder

r, press it in until it engages.

in the drink holder while the vehicle is f the hot liquid is spilt.

s or glasses. These could cause injury in the

Fig. 120 Detailed view of the dash panel: Drink holders

Exeo_EN.book Seite 146 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

only be loaded to the maximum weight permitted indicated in the assembly

instructions.

WARNING

Loads carried on the roof must be securely attached. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Do not exceed the maximum roof load for the vehicle, the maximum axle loads or the maximum gross vehicle weight. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

When transporting heavy or bulky loads on the roof, bear in mind that the car's handling is affected by the extra weight on the roof and a possible susceptibility to cross winds. Adjust your speed and driving style accord- ingly to avoid accidents.

For the sake of the environment Roof racks are often left attached for convenience, even when they are not

being used. However, the increased air resistance means that the vehicle

uses more fuel. For this reason you should always take off the roof rack when

it is not in use.

Drink holders

Front drink holder

To open the drink holde

lid fig. 120

To close the drink holde

WARNING

Do not put any hot drinks moving. You can be scalded i

Do not use hard china cup event of an accident.

Seats and storage compartments 147

Safety fir Technical data

ps or glasses. These could cause injury in the

te lighter* and power

part of the ashtray fig. 122.

of the ashtray fig. 122 and lift it out.

Fig. 122 Centre console: Open ashtray

AA

AB

Exeo_EN.book Seite 147 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Drinks holder in the rear armrest*

Opening the drink holder

Press the symbol fig. 121.

Adjusting the retainer arm

To adjust one of the retainer arms , release it by pressing in

the direction indicated (arrow) and move it as required.

The retainer arm should be positioned against the drinks holder so that it is

held securely.

One or two drinks holders can be held in the centre console.

WARNING

Do not put any hot drinks in the drink holder while the vehicle is moving. You can be scalded if the hot liquid is spilt.

Do not use hard china cu event of an accident.

Ashtray*, cigaret points*

Front ashtray*

Opening the ashtray

Lightly press the front

Removing the ashtray

Take hold of the sides

Fig. 121 Drink holder in the rear armrest

AA

AB

WARNING (continued)

Seats and storage compartments148

tray and press the casing into the

ll go.

ashtray, as this could cause a fire.

e cigarette lighter can also be used as

r electrical appliances.

ghter knob.

op out slightly.

Fig. 124 Cigarette lighter in the centre console

Exeo_EN.book Seite 148 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Fitting the ashtray casing

Insert the casing and press it into its mountings.

WARNING

Never put waste paper in the ashtray, as this could cause a fire.

Rear ashtray

Opening the ashtray

Lift the lid.

Removing the ashtray

Take hold of the lid fig. 123 and lift out the ashtray.

Fitting the ashtray casing

Open the lid on the ash

mounting as far as it wi

WARNING

Never put waste paper in the

Cigarette lighter*

The 12-volt socket for th

a power source for othe

Using the cigarette lighter

Press in the cigarette li

Wait for the lighter to p

Fig. 123 Rear ashtray

Seats and storage compartments 149

Safety fir Technical data

n be connected to the 12 Volt socket.

t cover fig. 125.

lectrical appliance into the socket.

onnected to the 12-volt socket. The appliances

t not exceed a power rating of 100 W.

herefore, any appliances connected to them tion is switched on.

f plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.

Fig. 125 Detailed view of the side trim in the luggage compartment: 12-volt socket

Exeo_EN.book Seite 149 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Pull out the cigarette lighter immediately.

Use the glowing heater element of the cigarette lighter to light

your cigarette.

Put the cigarette lighter back in its socket.

Operating the socket

Take out the cigarette lighter.

Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the cigarette

lighter socket.

The cigarette lighter page 148, fig. 124 employs a standard 12-volt

socket, which can also be used as a power source for electrical appliances.

The appliances connected to the socket must not exceed a power rating of

100 W.

WARNING

Be careful when using the electric cigarette lighter. Carelessness or negligence when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns.

The lighter will only work when the ignition is switched on.

The electrical sockets and, therefore, any appliances connected to them will only work when the ignition is switched on.

Caution Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.

Note The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a

battery discharge.

Electrical socket*

Electrical equipment ca

Lift the electrical socke

Insert the plug of the e

Electrical equipment can be c

connected to the socket mus

WARNING

The electrical sockets and, t will only work when the igni

Caution Always use the correct type o

Seats and storage compartments150

e socket. The childproof safety device on

d.

uroplug as far as possible into the socket

inserted and will not jump out of place

p or similar.

et

ected

ed to connect electrical equipment with a Euro-

er consumption in this socket must not exceed

).

liance is connected, the total consumption of

ceed 150 watt. If necessary, please refer to the

m the power consumption of the connected

ld be in perfect working order without any

ectors (for example, power blocks) which Europlug socket may damage the socket with

oof safety device is disconnected. The socket

use

ault, for example, disconnection due to

ent or temperature

Exeo_EN.book Seite 150 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Note The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a

battery discharge.

230 volt socket for Europlug*

Electrical equipment can also be connected to the 230 volt

socket in the centre of the centre console.

The 230 Volt socket can only be used when the engine is running

.

In vehicles with folding cover:

Hold the cover of the socket at the lower lip.

Lift the cover to open fig. 126.

Insert the Europlug

Insert the Europlug in th

the socket is deactivate

If necessary, press the E

to ensure it is correctly

while driving over a bum

LED warning lamp above sock

Equipment which may be conn

The 230 volt socket can be us

plug. Please note that the pow

150 watts (peaks of 300 watts

Even when more than one app

all the appliances must not ex

manufacturer's label to confir

equipment.

All connected appliances shou

faults.

WARNING

Heavy appliances or conn hang down directly from the the resultant risk of injury.

Fig. 126 Centre of the centre console: 230 volt socket

Steady green

light:

The childpr

is ready for

Flashing red

light:

There is a f

excess curr

Seats and storage compartments 151

Safety fir Technical data

t, and which have been left switched on, will

.

ps to the socket. For technical reasons, these

ppliances to the 230 volt power socket, as they

ent of query, please check the manufacturer's

supply accepted by the appliance.

for example for laptops, the built-in overload

computer prevents the equipment from

n excessive start-up current. In this case, discon-

ower supply and try to reconnect after ten

may cause interference to the radio or vehicle

a built-in childproof device and only carries live

correctly plugged in.

t operate correctly in the absence of adequate

cket is 115 volts. Therefore the socket should

ted at the factory. You can obtain re-equipment

hnical Service. Do not connect 115 Volt appli-

pment in the vicinity of the aerial in the rear

ce to the reception of stations broadcasting in

Exeo_EN.book Seite 151 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Ensure that appliances connected to the socket are secure to prevent them from being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking or an accident. This could result in severe injury or loss of life page 16, Stowing luggage.

Never spill liquid over the socket there is a risk of death. If any mois- ture enters the socket, ensure that it is thoroughly dry before using.

Improper use of the sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire, with the resultant risk of injury.

Children must never be left alone in the car with the engine running. They could cause an accident.

Appliances connected to the socket do not behave in the same way as when they are connected to the mains power supply. They may overheat during use and cause injury.

When using adapters and extension leads, the childproof safety device on the 230 volt socket is disconnected and the socket is live. Risk of injury!.

Never insert objects which conduct electricity, such as a needle, in the pins of the 230 volt socket. There is a risk of death.

Always switch off electrical appliances connected to the socket if the inverter goes off as a result of overheating. Failure to comply could result in injuries.

Caution The instructions for handling appliances connected to the socket must be

observed.

If the power consumption of the appliances connected exceeds 150

watts, the socket inverter will overheat. If the temperature exceeds a certain

value, the inverter will switch off. It may also be disconnected, even though

the power consumption is OK if the outside temperature is very high. The

inverter will switch on again automatically after it has cooled down. Appli-

ances connected to the socke

automatically come back on

Do not connect neon lam

could break down.

Do not connect 115 volt a

could be damaged. In the ev

label for details of the power

With some power blocks,

disconnection system of the

switching on in the event of a

nect the appliance from the p

seconds.

Note Non-insulated equipment

electronics.

The Europlug socket has

current when the Europlug is

Some appliances may no

power (watts).

In some countries this so

have a different inverter moun

kits from your Authorised Tec

ances to the 230 Volt socket.

The use of electrical equi

window may cause interferen

AM.

WARNING (continued)

Seats and storage compartments152

s equipped with a light.

tment

id in the direction indicated (arrow)

e lid.

ment

it in until it engages.

are switched on, the light in the glove compart-

ned.

or a pen and a note pad.

Fig. 127 Glove compart- ment

Exeo_EN.book Seite 152 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Compartments

Overview

There are several storage compartments at various points in

the vehicle.

Your vehicle has the following storage compartments:

Some of the compartments listed are only provided in certain models / model

years or are optional extras.

Glove compartment

The lockable glove box i

Opening the glove compar

Pull the handle on the l

fig. 127 and open th

Closing the glove compart

Close the lid and push

If the side lights or headlights

ment comes on when it is ope

The lid has separate holders f

First-aid kit*

Emergency triangle*

Glove compartment page 152

Storage compartment in the centre console

On-board documentation compartment*

Compartments in the door trims page 153

Coat hooks page 153

Rear shelf page 143

Side storage compartment in luggage com-

partment

Seats and storage compartments 153

Safety fir Technical data

ove each of the rear doors.

y items of clothing hanging from the coat view to the rear.

nly be used for lightweight clothing. Do not jects in the pockets.

ers to hang up the clothing, as this could inter- head-protection airbags*.

Fig. 129 Area above the rear doors: Coat hooks

Exeo_EN.book Seite 153 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

For safety reasons, the glove compartment must always be closed when the vehicle is moving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Compartments in the door trim

Storage compartments are provided in the door trims.

WARNING

The storage compartments in the door trims should only be used to store small objects. Make sure that they are stored safely inside the compart- ment, as they might otherwise impair the protection offered by the side airbags.

Coat hooks

There is a coat hook ab

WARNING

Please make sure that an hooks do not obstruct your

The coat hooks should o leave any heavy or sharp ob

Do not use clothes hang fere with the function of the

Fig. 128 Door trim with storage compartment

Seats and storage compartments154

Exeo_EN.book Seite 154 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Compartments in the front seats*

There is a storage compartment with a lid at the front of each

front seat.

Opening

Pull the handle to open the compartment.

Closing

Close the lid and push it in until it engages.

Note The compartments will hold a maximum weight of 1 kg.

Air conditioning 155

Safety fir Technical data

ure outside the vehicle are high, condensation

the air cooling system and form a pool under-

mal and does not indicate a leak.

low, the blower normally only switches to a

t has warmed up sufficiently (this does not

engine power, the air conditioner compressor is

n pulling away from standstill with full throttle.

s off if the coolant temperature is excessively

ine cooling under extreme loads.

d particulate filter and activated charcoal filter)

purities in the outside air, including dust and

k with maximum efficiency, the pollution filter

the intervals specified in the Service Schedule.

s with a high level of air pollution and the filter

may be necessary to change the filter element

conditioner system is damaged, switch over to

r damage and have the system checked by a

ner require specialist knowledge and special

contact a qualified workshop if the system is not

Exeo_EN.book Seite 155 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Air conditioning

2C-Climatronic

Description

The air conditioner is designed to automatically keep the

passenger compartment at the temperature you find most

comfortable at all times of the year.

Recommended settings:

Set the temperature to 22C (71F).

Press the button page 157, fig. 130.

The following setting quickly provides a comfortable temperature inside the

vehicle. We therefore recommend you do not modify the setting unless you

find this temperature uncomfortable or where circumstances require as such.

The air conditioner provides heating and ventilation and also cools and dehu-

midifies the air inside the vehicle.

The air conditioner is fully automatic and will constantly maintain the temper-

ature which has been set. To achieve this, the temperature of the air supplied

to the interior, the blower speed (volume of air delivery) and the air distribu-

tion are regulated automatically. The system also takes solar radiation into

account and, therefore, no subsequent manual readjustments are required.

Therefore, automatic mode page 158 should be used for the comfort of all

the passengers in virtually all conditions throughout the year.

Please note the following points:

The humidity of the air is automatically reduced when the system cools the

interior of the vehicle. This helps to prevent condensation on the windows.

If the humidity and temperat

can drip off the evaporator in

neath the vehicle. This is nor

If the outside temperature is

higher speed once the coolan

apply to the defrost setting).

In order to achieve maximum

temporarily switched off whe

The compressor also switche

high to ensure adequate eng

Pollution filter

The pollution filter (a combine

serves as a barrier against im

pollen.

For the air conditioner to wor

element must be replaced at

If the vehicle is driven in area

is no longer fully effective, it

more frequently.

Caution If you suspect that the air

ECON mode to prevent furthe

qualified workshop.

Repairs to the air conditio

tools. For this reason, please

working properly.

AUTO

Air conditioning156

Exeo_EN.book Seite 156 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Note Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen clear of snow, ice and

leaves to ensure unimpaired heating and cooling and to prevent the windows

misting over.

The air from the outlets flows through the passenger compartment and

out through the slots below the rear window. Therefore, do not cover these

slots with items of clothing or other objects.

The air conditioner operates most effectively with the windows and the

sliding/tilting sunroof* closed. However, if the vehicle has heated up after

standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more quickly

by opening the windows briefly.

Air conditioning 157

Safety fir Technical data

er.

g. 130 Air conditioner controls

g

tic mode

ature selection for the driver

nt passenger sides

l air recirculation mode

s off air cooling

s off air conditioner (instead of )

tic air recirculation mode (instead of )

OFF

Exeo_EN.book Seite 157 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Controls

This overview will help you become quickly familiar with the controls for the air condition

The left-hand display shows the temperature selected for the left-hand side

and the right-hand display the temperature for the right-hand side.

The functions can be switched on or off by briefly pressing the buttons. The

diode on the buttons lights up when the function is enabled.

The grille between buttons and must be kept clear, as the tempera-

ture sensors are located behind the grille.

Do not cover the grille.

Do not clean the grille with a vacuum cleaner, as this could damage the

temperature sensors located behind the grille.

Fi

Button(s) Meanin

Automa

(left and right

sides)

Temper

and fro

Defrost

Manua

Switche

Switche

Automa

AUTO

- +

ECON

OFF

Air conditioning158

ed automatically. The temperature is not regu-

n the driver side pressed for several seconds,

ger side can be set to the temperature of the

isplay indicates the new temperature value.

re

can be selected for the driver and

ns below the displays page 157,

d temperature is selected for the driver

side.

ature setting is shown in the display above the

n the driver side pressed for several seconds,

ger side can be set to the temperature of the

splay indicates the new temperature value. The

can be restored by resetting the display on the

quired.

- +

Exeo_EN.book Seite 158 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

The , and buttons (which regulate air distribution) can either be

selected individually or in combination.

Automatic mode

Standard setting for all seasons.

Switching on automatic mode

Select a temperature between +18C (64F) and +29C (86F).

Press the button page 157, fig. 130.

The automatic mode maintains a constant temperature inside the vehicle and

dehumidifies the air. Air temperature, air delivery and air distribution are

regulated automatically to reach the desired interior temperature as quickly

as possible, and then to maintain this temperature. The system automatically

compensates for any variations in the outside temperature and for the effect

of direct sunlight.

The automatic temperature regulation only operates at temperature settings

between +18C and +29C. If a temperature below +18C is selected, LO

appears on the display. If a temperature is selected which is higher than

+29C, the display will show HI. In the two extreme settings, the climate

control operates continuously with maximum cooling or heating output and

the temperature is not regulat

lated.

Note By keeping the button o

the temperature of the passen

driver side or vice versa. The d

Selecting the temperatu

Separate temperatures

front passenger sides.

Press the or butto

fig. 130 until the desire

side or front passenger

The currently selected temper

buttons.

By keeping the button o

the temperature of the passen

driver side or vice versa. The di

previous temperature setting

driver or passenger side as re

(centre buttons)

Adjusts blower speed

Air to the windows

Air from the dashboard outlets

Air to the footwells

Button(s) Meaning

- +

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

- +

AUTO

Air conditioning 159

Safety fir Technical data

nnel or in queues of traffic, to prevent exhaust

e vehicle.

h the air recirculation mode enabled because, ected, the windscreen may mist up because no rior of the vehicle, with the subsequent risk of

fuel.

button page 157, fig. 130.

button again or select the

ECON mode. The heating and the blower are

N stands for Economy. Disconnecting air

s fuel consumption.

emperature must not be lower than the outside

he blower does not cool or dehumidify the air in

ld therefore mist up.

ementary heater is switched off in ECON mode

on continues to light up when the ECON mode

e air conditioner has been switched on) this is

ECON

CON

CON AUTO

Exeo_EN.book Seite 159 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Defrosting

The windscreen and side windows are defrosted or demisted

as quickly as possible.

To enable this mode, press the page 157, fig. 130 button.

To disable, press the button again or select the button.

The temperature is regulated automatically. The air output is increased to

maximum and most of the air comes out of outlets 1 and 2 page 162.

The air recirculation and ECON modes are switched off when the button is

pressed.

Air recirculation: manual enabling

The air recirculation setting prevents fumes etc. from entering

the interior.

Enabling air recirculation mode

Press the page 157, fig. 130 button.

Disabling air recirculation mode

Press the button again or

Press the button or

Press button .

In this setting, the air in the vehicle is constantly recirculated. We recommend

using the air recirculation mode in the following circumstances:

When driving through a tu

gas entering the interior of th

WARNING

Do not drive for too long wit if the compressor is disconn fresh air is entering the inte accidents.

ECON Mode (economy)

ECON mode helps save

To enable, press the

To disable, press the

button.

Air cooling is disconnected in

adjusted automatically. ECO

cooling (compressor) reduce

Please note that the interior t

temperature in ECON mode. T

the interior. The windows cou

On diesel vehicles, the suppl

to save fuel.

Note If the diode on the ECON butt

has been switched off (i.e. th

AUTO

AUTO

E

E

Air conditioning160

mode should normally be left switched on at

approx. 30 seconds after the engine ignition

his initial period, fresh air is fed into the car.

ir conditioner detects a certain concentration

e control unit will either pass the incoming air

automatically switch on the air recirculation. If

f pollution in the outside air, the air conditioner

ecirculation and the supply of air from the

he level of pollution decreases, air is fed into

gain.

operates for a maximum period of 12 minutes.

he automatic air recirculation is on, press the

switches itself off under certain circumstances

lected). In ECON and at temperature of below

tomatic air recirculation mode is limited to 12

ure display from C to F and vice

can be switched from C (degrees

ahrenheit) and vice versa.

button for air recirculation mode and

utton of the left-hand temperature

ig. 130.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 160 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

due to a defect in one of the air conditioner components. If a malfunction

should occur, please contact a specialised workshop.

Air recirculation: automatic activation*

If the outside air is polluted by diesel and petrol emissions,

an air purity sensor in the vehicle will automatically switch on

the air recirculation.

Enabling air recirculation mode

Press the button fig. 131.

Disabling air recirculation mode

Press the button again or

Press the button or

Press button .

The automatic air recirculation

all times.

The system is ready to operate

key has been turned. During t

If the air purity sensor in the a

of fumes in the outside air, th

through the pollution filter or

there is a high concentration o

automatically switches to air r

outside is cut off. As soon as t

the vehicle from the outside a

The automatic air recirculation

If the windows mist up when t

button immediately.

The automatic air recirculation

(for instance if or is se

approx. 8C below zero, the au

seconds.

Switching the temperat versa

The temperature display

Celsius) to F (degrees F

Press and hold the

briefly press the plus b

selector page 157, f

Fig. 131 Button for auto- matic air recirculation

AUTO

Air conditioning 161

Safety fir Technical data

ted blower speed can be reduced or

ttons in the centre of the control panel

o set the blower to the desired speed (and

air delivery).

tomatically regulates the blower speed

erature. However, you can also adjust the air

t blower setting is illustrated by a bar in the

ttons).

assenger temperature

the passenger temperature like the driver

button on the driver side for 2 seconds approx-

ally set the driver temperature like the

s the button on the passenger side for 2 AUTO

Exeo_EN.book Seite 161 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Switching the air conditioner on/off

Switching the air conditioner off: models with an button

Press the button. The air conditioner is switched off and the

supply of air from outside the car is cut off.

Switching the air conditioner off: models with a button

Keep pressing the button for the blower until the display

segment is empty. The air conditioner is switched off and the

supply of air from outside the car is cut off.

Switching the air conditioner on: models with an button

Press the button again, or

Press the button or

Press one of the air distribution buttons , or .

Switching the air conditioner on: models with a button

Press the button for the blower, or

Press the button or

Press one of the air distribution buttons , or .

The air conditioner also starts to operate if one of the blower or temperature

selector buttons is pressed.

Blower speed

The automatically selec

increased manually.

Press the and bu

page 157, fig. 130 t

regulate the volume of

The air conditioner system au

according to the interior temp

delivery manually. The curren

middle display (above the bu

Automatic change of p

In order to automatically set

temperature, press the

imately. In order to automatic

passenger temperature, pres

seconds approximately.

OFF

OFF

-

OFF

OFF

AUTO

+

AUTO

- +

- +

AUTO

Air conditioning162

ir conditioner is mainly issued from outlets

ooling, outlets and should therefore

ammed air distribution can be

an be operated either separately or in combi-

ally controlled air distribution, switch off the

or press the button

. 132 Dash panel: Location of air outlets

A3

A3 A4

AUTO

Exeo_EN.book Seite 162 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Air outlets

The air outlets fig. 132 and can be operated as follows:

Outlets and

The outlets can be opened and closed by turning the left thum-

bwheels.

The direction of air delivery from the outlets can be varied as

required using the adjuster in the centre of each outlet grille. The

direction of air flow can be adjusted horizontally and vertically as

desired.

The flow of air from the outlets is controlled either automatically or manually,

depending on the operating mode selected. All the outlets can provide air

that is either heated, unheated or cooled.

The heater outlets for the rear footwells are located under the front seats.

They are controlled together with outlets .

Note The cool air provided by the a

and . To ensure adequate c

never be closed completely.

Air distribution

The automatically-progr

altered manually.

The buttons , and c

nation. To return to automatic

selected functions separately

Fig

A3 A4

A3 A4

A5

A4

Air conditioning 163

Safety fir Technical data

ed up after standing in the sun, open the

r a short time to cool the vehicle.

nvironment e the amount of pollutants emitted from your

itched on, the air conditioner settings

selected automatically.

elected are automatically stored and assigned

ehicle is started, the air conditioner automati-

igned to the key. Hence, every driver automati-

d settings without having to select them manu-

e key and enter other settings, the previous

Exeo_EN.book Seite 163 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Each of the three buttons has a specific function. The numbers relate to the

air outlets page 162, fig. 132.

Air directed to windows

This setting directs all the air to outlets 1 and 2. Unlike in setting , the

volume of air delivery remains the same.

Air to the driver/front passenger

All the air comes from outlets 3 and 4 in the dash panel and from the rear of

the centre console.

Air to the footwells

Most of the air emerges from outlets 5 and the outlets under the front seats.

Some of the air will also be issued from outlets 3 and 4.

Note In all of the above air distribution settings, a small amount of air will still

come from the other outlets.

Economical use of the air conditioner

Economical use of the air conditioner will help save fuel.

Engine power is reduced and fuel consumption increases when the

air conditioner is in cooling mode. To ensure that the system is only

switched on when it is really necessary, please note the following

points:

Select ECON mode if you wish to save fuel.

Select ECON mode if you decide to open the windows or sunroof*

while driving.

If the vehicle has heat

windows and doors fo

For the sake of the e By saving fuel you also reduc

vehicle.

Key settings

When the ignition is sw

assigned to the key are

The air conditioner settings s

to the key in use. When the v

cally selects the settings ass

cally obtains his/her preferre

ally.

Note Should another driver use th

settings will be deleted.

Air conditioning164

t of the front seats can be electrically

fig. 133 to switch on and adjust the

front seats.

en the thumbwheel is set to 0. The temperature

g elements of the seat heating, please do not

rp pressure to a single point.

Fig. 133 Detailed view of the dash panel: Thum- bwheel controls for seat heating

Exeo_EN.book Seite 164 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Solar-powered blower/sunroof*

If the vehicle is parked in sufficiently strong sunlight, the

blower will operate in solar-powered mode when the ignition

is switched off.

After the ignition is switched off, the blower is supplied with electrical power

from the sunroof. Please ensure that outlets 3 and 4 are open page 162,

fig. 132 to ensure the best possible ventilation.

The blower only works when the sunroof is closed or tilted open at the rear.

If the air recirculation mode is on when you switch off the engine, the air

conditioner will automatically switch to fresh air ventilation.

Supplementary heating*

Diesel vehicles are fitted with supplementary heating2) to raise the tempera-

ture of the interior as quickly as possible. At outdoor temperatures below

+5C and with the engine running, the supplementary heating will switch on

and off automatically depending on the temperature of the coolant.

In order to save fuel, the supplementary heating can be can be switched off

by briefly pressing the button on the air conditioner.

Seat heating*

The surface and backres

heated.

Turn thumbwheel or

heating on the left or right

The heating is switched off wh

settings range from 1 to 6.

Caution To avoid damaging the heatin

kneel on the seat or apply sha

2) For Nordic countries only.

A1 A2

Driving 165

Safety fir Technical data

n of the steering wheel when the vehicle is an accident.

ver must always be securely engaged when t the position of the steering wheel cannot

se this could cause an accident.

programme (ESP)

safer in certain situations.

Fig. 135 Detailed view of the centre console: ESP button

Exeo_EN.book Seite 165 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Driving

Address

Adjusting the steering wheel position

The height and reach of the steering wheel can be adjusted as

required to suit the driver.

Push the lever fig. 134 down .

Move the steering wheel to the desired position.

Then push the lever back up against the steering column until it

engages in position.

WARNING

Never adjust the positio moving, as this could cause

For safety reasons, the le the vehicle is moving, so tha shift unexpectedly. Otherwi

Safety

Electronic stabilisation

ESP helps make driving

Fig. 134 Lever beneath steering column

Driving166

onding warning notes on ESP in page 185,

to start and stop the engine.

this position. To engage the steering wheel the wheel until you hear the pin engage. You

ering lock when you leave the vehicle. This will

Fig. 136 Ignition key positions

Exeo_EN.book Seite 166 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) contains the electronic differential

lock (EDL) and the traction control system (TCS). The ESP function works

together with the ABS. If a fault in the ABS occurs, both warning lamps light

up, but if the ESP fails, only the ESP warning lamp lights up.

The ESP is started automatically when the engine is started.

The ESP switch deactivates both TCS and ESP functions. The ESP, in spite of

being deactivated, will always self-connect when necessary if brakes are

being used.

The TCS can be deactivated when in cases where wheel sliding is desirable.

For example:

When driving with snow chains,

when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,

when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for

example.

Next, the button should be pressed to reactivate the TCS.

When does the warning light switch on or flash ?

On switching the ignition on, it lights up for about two seconds to carry

out a function control.

The warning lamp will start flashing when the vehicle is moving if the ESP

or the TCS is activated.

It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.

WARNING

The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Please refer to the corresp Intelligent technology.

Ignition lock

Ignition key positions

The ignition key is used

Position

The ignition key is inserted in

lock, take out the key and turn

should always engage the ste

help to deter thefts .

WARNING (continued)

A1

Driving 167

Safety fir Technical data

earbox: After switching off the ignition, you can

if the gear lever is in position P (parking lock).

the ignition key has been removed.

ping the engine

started with an original SEAT key.

ine:

the clutch pedal all the way down.

o neutral (automatic gearbox: gear lever to

Fig. 137 Ignition key positions

Exeo_EN.book Seite 167 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Switching on the ignition/pre-heating glow plugs

If the key is difficult to turn in the lock, move the steering wheel (to take the

load off the steering lock mechanism) until the key turns freely. In the case of

vehicles with a diesel engine, the key is turned to this position to preheat the

glow plugs.

Starting the engine

The engine is started in this position. Electrical components with a high

power consumption are switched off temporarily.

After the engine has started, the ignition key returns to position by itself.

The ignition key has to be turned back to position before re-starting the

engine. The starter inhibitor in the ignition lock prevents the starter motor

from engaging when the engine is running, as this could cause damage.

Switching off the ignition

Turn the ignition key to this position.

WARNING

Never remove the ignition key until the vehicle is stationary! Otherwise the steering lock could engage suddenly, which could cause an accident.

Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. This is particularly important if there are children in the car, as they might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could lead to injuries.

Note If the battery has been disconnected and then reconnected, it will be

necessary to leave the key in position for about 5 seconds before starting

the engine.

Vehicles with automatic g

only remove the ignition key

The gear lever is locked after

Starting and stop

Starting the engine

The engine can only be

Vehicles with a petrol eng

Use the foot brake.

Manual gearbox: Push

Move the gear lever int

P or N) .

A2

A3

A2

A1

A1

A2

Driving168

t outside temperatures above +8C, the glow

ome on for about one second. This means that

ediately.

ned spaces, as the exhaust gases are

l throttle and extreme load conditions until the

l operating temperature, otherwise this can

vironment running the engine with the vehicle stationary.

lp avoid unnecessary exhaust emissions.

position page 167, fig. 137.

ff until the vehicle is stationary.

A1

Exeo_EN.book Seite 168 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Turn the ignition key to position without pressing the acceler-

ator.

Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts (the starter

motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine).

Vehicles with a diesel engine:

Use the foot brake.

Manual gearbox: Push the clutch pedal all the way down.

Move the gear lever into neutral (automatic gearbox: gear lever to

P or N) .

Turn the ignition key to position . The pre-heating indicator

light comes on while the glow plugs are preheating.

When the indicator light goes out, turn the ignition key to

position . Do not press the accelerator.

Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts (the starter

motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine).

When starting a very cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few

seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.

This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.

If the engine fails to start straight-away, switch off the starter after about 10

seconds and try again after about half a minute.

Glow plug system*

To assist starting at low temperatures, diesel engines are equipped with a

glow plug preheating system. The preheating time depends on the coolant

temperature and the outside temperature. Start the engine as soon as the

glow plug indicator light goes out.

When the engine is warm or a

plug indicator light will only c

the engine can be started imm

If the engine will not start...

page 283

page 286

page 219, Refuelling

WARNING

Never run the engine in confi poisonous.

Caution Avoid high engine speeds, ful

engine has reached its norma

damage the engine.

For the sake of the en Do not warm up the engine by

Start immediately. This will he

Stopping the engine

Turn the ignition key to

WARNING

Never switch the engine o

A3

A2

A3

Driving 169

Safety fir Technical data

be applied firmly to prevent the

ly rolling away.

er up all the way.

y and at the same time press in the release

ow-.

n pressed and push the lever all the way

Fig. 138 Detailed view of the centre console: Hand- brake applied

Exeo_EN.book Seite 169 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The brake servo and the power steering system work only when the engine is running. You need more strength to steer and brake the vehicle when the engine is switched off. Given that you will be unable to steer and brake as usual, this could lead to a risk of accidents and injuries.

Caution If the engine has been running hard for a long time, there is a risk of heat

building up in the engine compartment after the engine has been switched

off; this could cause engine damage. Therefore, you should idle the engine

for approx. 2 minutes before you switch it off.

Note After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10

minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. It may also start running again

after some time if the coolant temperature rises due to a build-up of heat

under the bonnet, or if the engine is already warm and the engine compart-

ment is heated up further by direct sunlight.

Handbrake

Handbrake

The handbrake should

vehicle from accidental

Applying the handbrake

Pull the handbrake lev

Releasing the handbrake

Pull the lever up slightl

button fig. 138 -arr

Keep the release butto

down .

WARNING (continued)

Driving170

t the, if the vehicle moves, it will do so towards

ecially children) in the vehicle when it is elay assistance in an emergency, potentially

pervised in the vehicle. They could release ver, moving the vehicle and causing an

tic system

to help you when parking or manoeuvring in

e equipment fitted on your vehicle.

s an acoustic warning if there are any obstacles

arking System Plus warns you acoustically and

ont of and behind the vehicle page 171.

aid works properly, the sensors must be kept

.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 170 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

If you drive by mistake with the handbrake still applied, you will hear a

warning buzzer and the display will show the message:

Handbrake applied

The handbrake warning switches on after driving for 3 seconds at speeds

above 5 km/h.

The handbrake warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied

with the ignition on.

WARNING

Please note that the handbrake should be released all the way. If it is only partially released, this will cause rear brakes overheating, which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead to an accident.

Caution Once the vehicle has come to a standstill, always apply the handbrake firmly

and then, on a manual gearbox, engage a gear, or select P on an automatic.

Parking

The following points will ensure there is no risk of the car

rolling away accidentally after it is parked.

Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle.

Apply handbrake firmly.

Switch the engine off.

On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear or on an automatic move

the gear lever to P .

When parking on slopes:

Turn the steering wheel so tha

the curb.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (esp locked. Locked doors could d putting lives at risk.

Never leave children unsu e.g. the handbrake or gear le accident.

Parking aid acous

General notes

Various systems are available

tight spaces, depending on th

The SEAT Parking System give

behind your car page 171.

When you are parking, SEAT P optically about obstacles in fr

Note To ensure the acoustic parking

clean and free of snow and ice

Driving 171

Safety fir Technical data

s detected by the system may no longer be

he car moves closer, so the system will not give

inds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,

raw bars, etc) may not always be detected by the

amage the vehicle in such cases.

n towing page 172.

lus*

m Plus is an acoustic parking aid.

nt and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect

y acoustic signals (beeps). The measuring

t about:

ith increasing frequency as you approach the

less than approx. 0.30 m away from the

ll sound continuously. Stop moving immedi-

eps will be gradually reduced after about 4

s at a constant distance from a detected

e permanent acoustic signal).

de 0.90 m

ntre 1.20 m

de 0.60 m

ntre 1.60 m

Exeo_EN.book Seite 171 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

SEAT Parking System*

The SEAT Parking System is an acoustic parking aid.

Sensors are located in the rear bumper. When the sensors detect an obstacle,

you are alerted by acoustic signals (beeps). The measuring range of the

sensors starts at about:

The acoustic signals sound with increasing frequency as you approach the

obstacle. When the vehicle is less than approx. 0.30 m away from the

obstacle, the warning tone will sound continuously. Do not drive on!

The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4

seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected

obstacle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).

The parking aid is switched on automatically when reverse gear is engaged.

You will hear a brief acknowledgement tone.

WARNING

The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.

The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered. Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci- dents.

Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full use of the rear view mirrors.

Caution Please note that low obstacle

registered by the sensors as t

any further warning. Certain k

thin painted posts or trailer d

system, so take care not to d

Note Please refer to the notes o

SEAT Parking System P

The SEAT Parking Syste

Sensors are located in the fro

an obstacle, you are alerted b

range of the sensors starts a

The acoustic signals sound w

obstacle. When the vehicle is

obstacle the warning tone wi

ately!

The volume of the warning be

seconds if the vehicle remain

obstacle (it does not affect th

Rear Side 0.60 m

Centre 1.60 m

Front Si

Ce

Rear Si

Ce

Driving172

placement for driver awareness. The driver is fe parking and other manoeuvres.

ots in which obstacles are not registered. dren and animals because the system will not ay attention when reversing to avoid acci-

n the area around the vehicle and make full

detected by the system may no longer be

e car moves closer, so the system will not give

inds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,

w bars, etc) may not always be detected by the

mage the vehicle in such cases.

n towing page 172.

e picture display.

g aid sensors are not enabled when you select

h . This function may not be guaranteed on

ctory fitted. This results in the following restric-

Exeo_EN.book Seite 172 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Enabling/Disabling

Enabling

Engage reverse gear or

Press the button on the centre console fig. 139 or on the

gear selector gate. You will hear a brief acknowledgement tone

and the LED on the switch will light up.

Disabling

Drive forwards faster than 10 km/h, or

Press the button or

disconnect the on button or

go out of reverse gear.

WARNING

The parking aid is not a re personally responsible for sa

The sensors have blind sp Always look out for small chil always detect them. Always p dents.

Always keep a close eye o use of the rear view mirrors.

Caution Please note that low obstacles

registered by the sensors as th

any further warning. Certain k

thin painted posts or trailer dra

system, so take care not to da

Note Please refer to the notes o

There is a slight delay in th

Towing bracket*

In towing mode, the rear parkin

reverse gear or press the switc

towing brackets that are not fa

tions:

Fig. 139 Centre console: switch for parking aid

Driving 173

Safety fir Technical data

instrument panel lights up when the cruise

e control system should not be used in dense s (with ice, slippery surfaces, loose grit or

an accident.

arbox: do not go into neutral if the device is

eleasing the clutch, as the engine will increase

nditions, could break down.

intain a constant speed when travelling down

to accelerate under its own weight. Change

time or use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 173 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

SEAT Parking System*

There is no distance warning.

SEAT Parking System Plus*

There is no rear distance warning. The system will still give a warning when

obstacles are detected while driving forwards.

Fault messages*

If you hear a long beep for a few seconds and the LED on the switch * starts

flashing when you switch on the parking aid, a system fault has occurred.

Please have the fault corrected by a Dealer or qualified workshop.

Note If the fault is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, it will only be

indicated by the flashing LED on the switch * the next time you switch on

the parking aid.

Cruise control* (GRA)

Introduction

The cruise control system allows you to maintain a constant

speed.

Using this equipment, any speed over 30 km/h can be kept constant up to the

power output of the engine. This is subject to power output and braking

ability of the engine. This helps to reduce fatigue, especially on long jour-

neys.

The indicator lamp on the

control system is operating.

WARNING

For safety reasons, the cruis traffic or poor road condition gravel), as this could cause

Caution On vehicles with a manual ge

enabled without previously r

its revs and, under certain co

Note The cruise control cannot ma

steep hills. The vehicle tends

down to a lower gear in good

Driving174

ed can be adjusted up or down as

wards fig. 140 .

re the current cruising speed.

n towards fig. 140 .

re the current cruising speed.

t speed in steps of 2 km/h by briefly

p towards fig. 140 .

et speed in steps of 2 km/h by briefly

own towards fig. 140 .

or pedal momentarily to increase speed. The

will be automatically resumed when the accel-

s the programmed speed by more than 10

, the programmed speed will be deleted. You

ed again.

A+

A-

A+

A-

Exeo_EN.book Seite 174 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Setting speed

The desired cruising speed needs to be stored in the memory.

Drive at the desired speed.

Pull the lever to position fig. 140 to enable the system.

Briefly press button .

When button is released, the current speed is stored in the memory and

the vehicle will then maintain this speed.

Adjusting stored speed

The desired cruising spe

required.

Acceleration

Move the lever up to

Release the lever to sto

Decelerating

Move the lever dow

Release the lever to sto

Pressing lever briefly

You can increase the se

pressing the lever u

You can decrease the s

pressing the lever d

You can also use the accelerat

previously programmed speed

erator pedal is released.

However, if the vehicle exceed

km/h for more than 5 minutes

will then need to enter the spe

Fig. 140 Controls for the cruise control system

AA A1

AB

AB

AA

AA

AA

AA

AA

Driving 175

Safety fir Technical data

eed only if this is not excessive for the current do so could result in an accident.

ntrol

174, fig. 140 to position (click stop

nary

.

A2

Exeo_EN.book Seite 175 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Disabling cruise control temporarily

Press the brake pedal or

the clutch or

press the lever fig. 141 to position (click stop not

engaged).

Any intervention of the TCS or the ESP will switch off the cruise

control.

The speed stored at this point remains in the memory if the system is only

temporarily deactivated.

To resume the programmed cruising speed, release the clutch or brake pedal

and pull the lever to position .

If no speed was stored when the system was temporarily disabled, a new

speed can be set as follows: drive at the desired cruising speed and briefly

press button page 174, fig. 140 (SET).

WARNING

Retrieve the programmed sp traffic conditions. Failure to

Disabling the cruise co

While driving

Move lever page

engaged).

While the vehicle is statio

Switch the ignition off

Fig. 141 Controls for the cruise control system

AA Aa

AA Ab

AB

AA

Driving176

ng, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a ch released.

ear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-

e gear lever while driving. The pressure of your

ear on the selector forks in the gearbox.

should always depress the clutch fully to avoid

e.

e clutch on hills. This causes premature wear

x*

7-speed gearbox)

tronic gearbox

n electronically controlled continuously vari- ). Unlike conventional automatics, the gear

teps but continuously variable. This gives

akes for better fuel economy.

atio and shifts up or down automatically

programmes stored in the control unit

Exeo_EN.book Seite 176 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Manual gearbox

Driving with a manual gearbox

Engaging the reverse gear

The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press the

clutch down thoroughly.

Place the gear lever into neutral and push the lever downwards.

Slide the gear lever to the left, and then into the reverse position

shown on the gear lever.

The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When

the engine is running and before engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds

with the clutch pressed down thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.

The reverse lights light up when the reverse gear is selected and the ignition

is on.

WARNING

When the engine is runni gear is engaged and the clut

Never select the reverse g dent.

Note Do not rest your hand on th

hand could cause premature w

When changing gear, you

unnecessary wear and damag

Do not hold the car on th

and damage to the clutch.

Automatic gearbo

Introduction

multitronic, tiptronic (

Applies to vehicles with multi

The vehicle is equipped with a

able transmission (Multitronic

ratios are not shifted in fixed s

smoother transmission and m

The gearbox selects the gear r

according to the gear change

page 181.

Fig. 142 Detailed view of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox

Driving 177

Safety fir Technical data

dstill

ke pedal.

rlock button (the button in the selector

e selector lever to the desired position, for

e the interlock button.

engage the gear (a slight movement can

press the accelerator .

hold the vehicle when stationary (for

s).

from rolling away, apply the parking brake

teep gradients .

ate as normal, the parking brake will auto-

nd the vehicle will start moving.

ke pedal .

e.

rlock button, move the selector lever to P

ck button.

d when the selector lever is at P or N.

t to move the selector lever to P. On slopes, first

then put the selection lever into the P position.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 177 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If desired, you can also select the gears manually (tiptronic mode) page 182.

Please note that on vehicles with a multitronic gearbox, torque is trans-

mitted via a multi-plate clutch, and not via a torque converter as on conven-

tional automatics. This means that the car will not creep as much as

conventional automatics when the engine is idling if you stop temporarily

with the selector lever in position D, S or R.

Applies to vehicles with tiptronic gearbox

The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled 7-speed automatic

gearbox. The gearbox changes up and down automatically.

If desired, you can also select the gears manually (tiptronic mode) page 182.

Driving instructions

The gears are changed automatically.

Moving away from a stan

Press and hold the bra

Press and hold the inte

lever handle), move th

instance D, and releas

Wait for the gearbox to

be felt).

Release the brake and

Stopping briefly

Apply the foot brake to

instance at traffic light

To prevent the vehicle

before moving off on s

As soon as you acceler

matically be released a

Parking the vehicle

Press and hold the bra

Apply the parking brak

Press and hold the inte

and release the interlo

The engine can only be starte

On level ground it is sufficien

engage the parking brake and

Fig. 143 Detailed view of the centre console: Selector lever with lock button

Driving178

e selector lever positions.

ition is shown in the instrument panel.

echanically. The parking brake should only be

dy stopped .

n in the selector lever handle) must be pressed

e depressed before moving the selector lever

his is only possible when the ignition is on.

the gearbox automatically selects the lowest

ged only when the vehicle is stationary and the

Fig. 144 Display: Selector lever positions

Exeo_EN.book Seite 178 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

This avoids overloading the locking mechanism and it will be easier to move

the selector lever from position P.

Vehicles with multitronic gearbox: Your vehicle is equipped with the hill hold assist function which makes it easier to start off on a slope. The system

is activated when you press and hold the brake pedal for a few seconds.

When you release the brake pedal the braking force will be maintained for a

moment in order to prevent the vehicle rolling back when you drive away.

WARNING

While you are selecting a gear and the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, do not accelerate. Failure to do so could result in an acci- dent.

Please note that some power will still be transmitted when you stop temporarily with the selector lever in position D, S or R. To do this, when stopping you will need to press the brake with the force required to hold the vehicle still. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving, as this could cause an accident.

Vehicles with multitronic gearbox: Please note that some power will still be transmitted when you stop temporarily with the selector lever in position D, S or R. To do this, when stopping you will need to press the brake with the force required to hold the vehicle still. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Selector lever positions

This section covers all th

The current selector lever pos

P - parking lock

This locks the driving wheels m

used when the vehicle is alrea

The interlock button (the butto

in and the brake pedal must b

either in or out of position P. T

R - Reverse gear

When reverse gear is engaged

gear ratio.

The reverse gear may be enga

engine is idling .

Driving 179

Safety fir Technical data

rtment) when a gear is engaged with the cle could otherwise start moving immediately rking brake is engaged) and possibly cause an

y the parking brake and put the selector lever the bonnet and working on the vehicle with bserve the important safety warnings

ngine compartment.

iptronic gearbox:

entally to N when driving, release the acceler-

drop to idling before selecting D or S again.

my (and the environment), the gearbox ratios on

o that maximum speed is only obtained when

.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 179 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

To move the selector lever to position R, press in the interlock button and at

the same time press the brake pedal. Depending on the model, one or two

reverse lights will come on in selector lever position R (when ignition is

switched on).

N - Neutral (idling)

In this position the gearbox is in neutral .

D - Drive (forwards)

In this position, the gearbox selects the optimal transmission ratio

depending on the engine load, speed and the dynamic gear regulation

programme (DRP).

Press the brake pedal when moving the selector lever from N to D if the

vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 5 km/h .

Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in mountains or towing a

trailer or caravan) it can be advantageous to switch temporarily to Tiptronic

mode page 182, so that the gear ratios can be selected manually to suit

the driving conditions.

S - Sport position

To drive in sports mode, select the position S. The engine power reserve is

used to its maximum. When accelerating the gear shifts will be noticeable.

Press the brake pedal when moving the selector lever from N to S if the

vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 5 km/h .

WARNING

Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

In selector position D or S the vehicle must always be held with the foot brake when the engine is running. This is because an automatic gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed, and the vehicle tends to creep. The throttle must on no account be opened inadvertently (for instance by

hand from the engine compa vehicle stationary. The vehi (in some cases even if the pa accident.

To avoid accidents, appl in position P before opening the engine running. Please o page 223, Work in the e

Note Applies to vehicles with t

If the lever is moved accid

ator and let the engine speed

For the sake of fuel econo

some models are designed s

the gear lever is at position S

WARNING (continued)

Driving180

rks if the vehicle is stationary or driving at

r speeds the selector lever lock in the N posi-

lly.

ngaged if the selector lever is moved quickly

shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for

backwards and forwards if it is stuck in snow

engages automatically if the brake pedal is not

position N for more than about a second.

lector lever handle prevents the driver from

lar gears. Press the button in to disengage the

r lever positions in which the lock button has

e illustration, highlighted in colour fig. 145.

ey

ned off, the key may be removed only if the gear

the key is not in the ignition, the selector lever

designed to give maximum accelera-

tronic gearbox

pressed right down past the point of resistance

ll select a lower gear ratio, depending on road

le you keep the accelerator depressed the

controlled to give your vehicle maximum accel-

Exeo_EN.book Seite 180 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Selector lever lock

The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged

inadvertently, so that the vehicle is not set in motion uninten-

tionally.

The selector lever lock is released as follows:

Switch the ignition on.

Press the brake pedal and at the same time press in the interlock

button.

Automatic selector lever lock

With the ignition turned on, the selector lever is locked in the positions P and

N. To remove it from these positions, press on the brake. The following

message appears in the instrument panel as a reminder for the driver when

the selector lever is in position P or N:

WHEN STATIONARY APPLY FOOTBRAKE WHILE SELECTING GEAR

The selector lever lock only wo

speeds up to 5 km/h. At highe

tion is disengaged automatica

The selector lever lock is not e

through position N (e.g. when

instance, to rock the vehicle

or mud. The selector lever lock

depressed and the lever is in

Interlock button

The interlock button on the se

inadvertently engaging particu

selector lever lock. The selecto

to be pressed are shown in th

Safety interlock for ignition k

Once the ignition has been tur

selector is in position P. While

is locked in position P.

Kick-down feature

The kickdown feature is

tion.

Applies to vehicles with multi

When the accelerator pedal is

at full throttle, the gearbox wi

speed and engine speed. Whi

engine speed is automatically

eration.

Fig. 145 Selector lever lock functions

Driving 181

Safety fir Technical data

earbox: the gearbox continuously adapts the

brake pedal is pressed on a downhill gradient

ifts to a lower gear ratio. This increases the

ox: in mountainous areas, the gearbox adapts

ownhill gradients. This prevents the gearbox

necessarily on uphill gradients.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 181 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Applies to vehicles with tiptronic gearbox

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down past the point of resistance

at full throttle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road

speed and engine speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed until

the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slippery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.

Dynamic gear control programme (DCP)

The automatic gearbox is controlled electronically.

The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled gearbox. The gear

ratios are selected automatically according to preset gearshift programmes.

When you drive at moderate speeds the gearbox will select the most econom-

ical shift programme. It will then change up early and delay the downshifts to

give better fuel economy.

If you drive at higher speeds with heavy acceleration, if you open the throttle

quickly, or if you use the kick-down or the car's maximum speed, the gearbox

will automatically select the more sporty shift programmes.

The gearbox is self-adapting, and continuously selects the most suitable shift

programme. At the same time, the driver can also make the gearbox switch to

a more sporty programme by pressing the accelerator quickly. Depending on

road speed, this makes the gearbox shift down early into a lower gear ratio

for more rapid acceleration (for instance to pass another vehicle), without

having to press the accelerator all the way down into the kick-down position.

After the gearbox has shifted back up it returns to the original programme,

depending on your style of driving.

Vehicles with multitronic g

gear ratios to gradients. If the

the gearbox automatically sh

engine braking effect.

Vehicles with tiptronic gearb

the gearshifts for uphill and d

from shifting up and down un

Driving182

ual programme

from the position D to the right-hand

lector lever has entered the tiptronic rail,

played on the screen.

r lever forwards (in the Tiptronic gate)

lever backwards (in the Tiptronic gate)

driver can manually choose between eight (on

even (on vehicles with tiptronic) different gear

ramme can be selected either with the vehicle

x automatically shifts up into the next gear

ngine speed is reached.

wer than the gear shown in the instrument

x will only shift down when there is no longer

ne.

(for instance when braking), the gearbox auto-

next gear when the minimum engine speed is

r increases the engine braking effect on down-

pressed right down past the point of resistance

ll select a lower gear ratio, depending on road

Exeo_EN.book Seite 182 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode)

With the manual shift programme (tiptronic) the driver can

manually select pre-programmed gears.

Switching over to the man

Move the selector lever

side. As soon as the se

the gear engaged is dis

Shifting up a gear

Briefly push the selecto

fig. 146 .

Shifting down a gear

Briefly pull the selector

.

With the tiptronic system, the

vehicles with multitronic) or s

programmes. The manual prog

stationary or on the move.

When accelerating, the gearbo

shortly before the maximum e

If you select a gear which is lo

display fig. 147, the gearbo

a risk of over-revving the engi

When the vehicle slows down

matically shifts down into the

reached.

Changing down to a lower gea

hill gradients.

When the accelerator pedal is

at full throttle, the gearbox wi

speed and engine speed.

Fig. 146 Centre console: Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode)

Fig. 147 Display: Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode)

A+

A-

Driving 183

Safety fir Technical data

ddle levers

e steering wheel enable the driver to

grammed ratios or gears.

d paddle lever to change down to a

nd paddle lever to change up to a

ed when the gear lever is in position D or S, or

hift programme (tiptronic).

can, of course, still be operated using the gear

Fig. 148 Steering wheel: Tiptronic controls

A

A+

Exeo_EN.book Seite 183 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Back-up programme

A back-up system is in place if a fault should occur in the

control system.

The automatic gearbox switches to the back-up programme if a fault should

occur in the control system. This is indicated by a gear-wheel symbol which

lights up on the instrument panel display (the symbol represents a gear

pinion).

It is still possible to move the selector lever to all positions. The manual shift

programme (Tiptronic) is not available when the back-up programme is

active.

Vehicles with Tiptronic gearbox: when the gear lever is in position D or S or in

the manual shift programme, the gearbox will remain in 3rd gear if 1st, 2nd

or 3rd gears were engaged when the fault occurred. The gearbox will remain

in 5th gear if 4th, 5th or 6th gears were engaged. The gearbox will then

engage 3rd gear when you drive away from a standstill or after the engine is

restarted.

It will still be possible to use reverse gear in the normal way. However, the

electronic lock for reverse gear will be switched off.

Caution Should the gearbox ever switch into the back-up programme, you should take

the vehicle to a technical service or qualified workshop as soon as possible.

Steering wheel with pa

The paddle levers on th

manually select pre-pro

Briefly pull the left-han

lower gear.

Briefly pull the right-ha

higher gear.

The paddle levers are activat

the position for the manual s

The manual shift programme

lever in the centre console.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 184 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Intelligent technology 185

Safety fir Technical data

BS), the electronic differential lock (EDL) and

S) are all integrated into the Electronic Stability

s data from the three integrated systems. It also

rovided by other high-precision sensors. These

about the vertical axis (yaw rate), lateral accel-

teering wheel angle.

wheel angle and road speed to calculate the

by the driver, and constantly compares them

the vehicle. If the desired course is not being

e car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen-

g the appropriate wheel.

ed wheel bring the car back to a stable condi-

es (tendency of the rear to leave the road), the

eel facing the outside of the bend. If the vehicle

eave the bend), the braking force is applied to

de of the bend.

with the ABS page 186. If a malfunction

ESP will also be out of action.

ally when the engine is started and performs a

Exeo_EN.book Seite 185 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Practical tips

Intelligent technology

Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)

General notes

The Electronic Stability Programme increases the vehicle's

stability on the road.

The ESP is designed to increase the degree of control in situations where the

car approaches the limits of adhesion, especially when accelerating and

cornering. It reduces the risk of skidding and improves stability in all road

conditions. The system is active across the entire speed range.

The anti-lock brake system (A

the traction control system (TC

Programme.

How it works

The ESP control unit processe

processes additional inputs p

register the vehicle's rotation

eration, brake pressure and s

The system uses the steering

changes of direction desired

with the actual behaviour of

maintained (for instance, if th

sates automatically by brakin

The forces acting on the brak

tion. If the vehicle over swerv

brakes will act on the front wh

under swerves (tendency to l

the rear wheel facing the insi

The ESP works in conjunction

should occur in the ABS, the

Disabling

The ESP is enabled automatic

self-test routine.

Fig. 149 Centre console with ESP switch

Intelligent technology186

self-check when the car reaches a road speed

accompanied by a noise from the ABS pump.

ning very slowly in relation to the road speed

system will reduce the pressure in the brake

made aware of this adjustment process by a

nd an audible noise. This is a deliberate

or more of the wheels is tending to lock up and

ntervened. In this situation it is important to

ressed so the ABS can regulate the brake appli-

brake pedal.

till subject to the physical limits of adhesion. ecially on wet or slippery roads. If you notice

ounteract locked wheels under braking), you tely to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do

res tempt you into taking any risks when result in an accident.

in the ABS, this is indicated by a warning lamp

helps the driver to achieve optimum

to increase braking power and thus to achieve

the driver presses the brake pedal very quickly,

Exeo_EN.book Seite 186 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

If required, the ESP can also be enabled and disabled manually by briefly

pressing the switch page 185, fig. 149. The ESP warning lamp lights

up when the system is switched off, see page 68.

In general, the ESP should be left switched on at all times. In particular

circumstances where a certain amount of wheel slip is desirable, it may be

advisable to switch off the ESP. Examples:

when driving with snow chains

when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces

when rocking the car backwards and forwards to free it.

The ESP should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.

WARNING

The ESP is not able to overcome the physical limits of adhesion. Even with ESP, you should always adjust your speed to suit the conditions. Please bear this in mind, especially on wet or slippery road surfaces. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

ABS prevents the wheels from locking up under braking.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active

safety system. However, the ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter stop-

ping distances in all conditions. For instance, on loose gravel or fresh snow

on top of an icy surface (conditions which anyway require extreme care and

reduced speed), the stopping distance with ABS may even be slightly longer.

How the ABS works

The system runs an automatic

of about 6 km/h. This may be

When one of the wheels is tur

and is close to locking up, the

line to this wheel. The driver is

vibration of the brake pedal a warning to the driver that one

the ABS control function has i

keep the brake pedal fully dep

cation, but do not pump the

WARNING

The grip provided by ABS is s Always bear this in mind, esp that the ABS is working (to c should reduce speed immedia not let the extra safety featu driving. Failure to do so could

Note If a malfunction should occur

page 67.

Brake assist system

The brake assist system

braking effect.

The brake assist system helps

a shorter stopping distance. If

ESP

Intelligent technology 187

Safety fir Technical data

orks up to a speed of approx. 80 km/h. The

e it is working.

ll

d starts spinning (for instance, if one of the

pressing the accelerator gradually until the car

he braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts

to excessive loads. In this case, the vehicle will

the same running properties as those of another

automatically when the brake has cooled down.

niformly slippery surface (for instance all four s the accelerator gradually and carefully. els may otherwise start to spin. This could . Risk of accident.

ld always adjust your speed to suit the condi- fety features tempt you into taking any risks o could result in an accident.

s up, this can also mean there is a fault in the

o a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 187 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

the brake assist system automatically boosts the braking force to the

maximum level, up to the point where the anti-lock brake function (ABS) inter-

venes to stop the wheels from locking. You should then keep the brake pedal

pressed until the vehicle has braked to the required speed. The brake assist

system switches itself off as soon as you release the brake pedal.

The brake assist system will not be operative if there is a malfunction in the

ABS or the ESP.

WARNING

Please remember that the accident risk always increases if you drive too fast, especially in corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow too close behind the vehicle in front of you. An increased accident risk cannot be compensated even by the brake assist system. Risk of accident.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)

The electronic differential lock prevents the loss of traction

caused if one wheel starts spinning.

General notes

The electronic differential lock (EDL) helps the car to start moving, accelerate

and climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may otherwise be diffi-

cult or even impossible.

How it works

The EDL works automatically, i.e. without the driver's involvement. With the

aid of the ABS sensors, the system monitors the rotational speed of the

driven wheels page 186. If a considerable difference in revs is detected

(approx. 100 rpm) in the speed of the driven wheels, e.g. when only one part

of the surface supporting the wheels is slippery, the system applies the brake

to slow down the skidding wheel so that more of the power is directed to the

other wheels. The systems w

system will make noises whil

Moving away from a standsti

If one wheel has less grip an

driven wheels is on ice), keep

starts moving.

Overheating of the brakes

To prevent the brake disk of t

out automatically if subjected

continue to run and will have

without EDL.

The EDL will switch on again

WARNING

When accelerating on a u wheels on ice or snow), pres Despite EDL, the driven whe impair the vehicle's stability

Even with EDL, you shou tions. Do not let the extra sa when driving. Failure to do s

Note If the ABS warning lamp light

EDL. Please take the vehicle t

Intelligent technology188

Exeo_EN.book Seite 188 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Traction control system (TCS)

The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from

spinning when the car is accelerating.

General notes

The traction control system (TCS) is one of the functions incorporated in the

Electronic Stability Programme (ESP).

The traction control system (TCS) helps the car to start moving, accelerate or

climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult

or even impossible.

How it works

The TCS acts automatically, i.e. without the driver's intervention. With the aid

of the ABS sensors page 186, the TCS monitors the speed of the driven

wheels. If the wheels start to spin, the engine power is reduced automatically

to match the amount of grip available. The system is active across the entire

speed range.

The TCS works in conjunction with the ABS. If a malfunction occurs in the ABS,

the TCS will also be inoperative.

Note To ensure that the TCS works properly, all four wheels must be fitted with

identical tyres. The difference in size of the wheels may lead to an undesired

reduction in engine power. Also see page 243.

Intelligent technology 189

Safety fir Technical data

quently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is

s and disks by braking firmly a few times from a

.

ld ever increase suddenly, this may mean that

as failed. Drive immediately to the nearest qual-

fault rectified. On the way to the dealer, be

re on the brake pedal, and allow for longer stop-

brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.

ored electronically.

o clean off deposits on the pads and discs, ure not to inconvenience or endanger other

.

by leaving your foot on the pedal when you do

s overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-

ear.

g, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed

r move the gear lever to a lower gear position if

ission). This makes use of engine braking and

e brakes. If you still have to use the brakes, it is

vals than to apply the brakes continuously.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 189 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Brakes

General notes

New brake pads

New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 200 km

they must be run in. However, the reduced braking capacity may be

compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-

loading the brakes during run-in.

Wear

The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and

the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for

instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts

and stops.

Wet roads; road salt

In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain, or after washing the car or driving

through water, the full braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or in winter

by ice) on the discs and brake pads. Dry the brakes by braking several times.

When the velocity is over 80 km/h windscreen wipers are on, the brake

system moves the pads towards the brake discs for a few seconds. This

occurs - without warning to the driver - at regular intervals and requires a

more rapid response from the brakes when driving on wet roads.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the car is

driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt

on the road in winter. In this case, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads

has to wear off before braking.

Corrosion

There may be a tendency for dirt to build up on the brake pads and corrosion

to form on the discs if the car is used infrequently, or if you only drive low

mileages without using the brakes very much.

If the brakes are not used fre

advisable to clean off the pad

moderately high speed

Faults in the brake system

If the brake pedal travel shou

one of the two brake circuits h

ified workshop and have the

prepared to use more pressu

ping distances.

Low brake fluid level

Malfunctions can occur in the

The brake fluid level is monit

WARNING

When applying the brakes t select a clear, dry road. Be s road users. Risk of accident

Caution Never let the brakes drag

not really intend to brake. Thi

ping distances and greater w

Before driving down a lon

and change to a lower gear (o

your car has automatic transm

prolongs the service life of th

better to brake firmly at inter

Intelligent technology190

ork if the engine is off. In this case the steering

ning limit when the car is stationary, this will

power steering system. Turning the steering

on the system, which causes noise. It will also

engine.

o not turn the steering wheel to its limit for

ise, there is a risk of damaging the power

ld fail at any time or the engine is switched off

d), the car can still be steered. However, more

he steering wheel.

malfunctioning, please take the car to a quali-

sible.

s a special hydraulic fluid. The fluid reservoir is

ine compartment on the left page 293. The

oir is important for the power steering to func-

id level is checked at the Inspection Service.

electronically adjusts the power

nic power steering the degree of power assist-

electronically according to road speed.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 190 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Note If you wish to equip the car with accessories such as a front spoiler or wheel

covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not obstructed,

otherwise the brakes can overheat.

Brake servo

The brake servo assists the driver when braking

The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The

brake servo works only when the engine is running.

WARNING

Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the engine is stopped. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Note If the brake servo is not working, e.g. because the vehicle has to be towed or

because it is broken, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably

harder to make up for the lack of servo assistance.

Power steering

The power steering assists the driver when turning the

steering wheel (with the engine running).

The power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the

steering wheel.

The power steering does not w

wheel is very hard to turn.

If the steering is held at its tur

place an excessive load on the

wheel to its limit places a load

reduce the idling speed of the

Caution When the engine is running, d

more than 15 seconds. Otherw

steering.

Note If the power steering shou

(for instance when being towe

effort will be required to turn t

If the system is leaking or

fied workshop as soon as pos

The power steering require

located at the front of the eng

correct fluid level in the reserv

tion properly. The hydraulic flu

Servotronic*

The servotronic system

assisted steering.

In cars equipped with servotro

ance page 190 is adjusted

Intelligent technology 191

Safety fir Technical data

Exeo_EN.book Seite 191 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If a fault should occur in the servotronic system, the power steering will still

operate. The degree of power assistance will, however, no longer adapt to

different speeds. If the electronic regulating system is not working properly,

this is most noticeable when turning the steering wheel at low speeds (for

instance when parking) more effort will be required than usual. The fault

should be corrected by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

Driving and the environment192

ing distance

raking distance are influenced by

oad conditions.

pends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate

ends to a great extent on the conditions under

and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often

rt distances or have a sporty driving style, we

thickness of your brake pads checked by an

e frequently than recommended in the Service

r example, after crossing areas of water, in

shing the car, the effect of the brakes is less-

et or even frozen (in winter): Dry the brakes by

faults in the brake system increase the risk

run in and do not have the correct friction ever, the reduced braking capacity may be the brake pedal a little harder. This also s are fitted.

, or if you are driving on roads which have g power may set in later than normal.

s are excessively used, they will overheat. eep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and r (or move the selector lever to a lower gear if

Exeo_EN.book Seite 192 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Driving and the environment

Running-in

Running in a new engine

The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1500 km.

Up to 1000 kilometres

Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.

Do not accelerate hard.

Avoid high engine revolutions.

Do not tow a trailer.

From 1000 to 1500 km

Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed

or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is

greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption,

reduced.

Braking effect and brak

The braking effect and b

driving situations and r

The efficiency of the brakes de

of wear of the brake pads dep

which the vehicle is operated

drive in town traffic, drive sho

recommend that you have the

Authorised Service Centre mor

Schedule.

If you drive with wet brakes, fo

heavy rainfall or even after wa

ened as the brake discs are w

braking several times.

WARNING

Longer braking distances and of accidents.

New brake pads must be during the first 200 km. How compensated by pressing on applies when new brake pad

If brakes are wet or frozen been gritted with salt, brakin

On steep slopes, if brake Before driving down a long st change down into a lower gea

Driving and the environment 193

Safety fir Technical data

to start it, use jump leads if necessary

n running or loss of power when the vehicle is

iately and have the vehicle inspected at the

In general, the exhaust gas warning lamp will

ribed symptoms occur page 66. If this

ter the exhaust system and escape into the envi-

rter can also be damaged by overheating.

es very high temperatures! Fire hazard!

talytic converter could come into contact with terials under the vehicle.

underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the verter or the heat shields on the exhaust ld catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.

because the irregularity of the fuel supply may

allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust

verheating and damage the catalytic converter.

nvironment rol system is working perfectly, there may be a

aust gas under some conditions. This depends

fuel used. Quite often the problem can be

r brand of fuel.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 193 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.

Never let the brakes slip by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.

Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.

Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories please observe the relevant page 217, Technical modifications instructions.

If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider- ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys.

Exhaust gas purification system

Catalytic converter*

To conserve the useful life of the catalytic converter

Always use unleaded petrol.

Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.

For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine oil

page 226.

Never tow the vehicle

page 283.

If you notice misfiring, uneve

moving, reduce speed immed

nearest qualified workshop.

light up when any of the desc

happens, unburnt fuel can en

ronment. The catalytic conve

WARNING

The catalytic converter reach

Never park where the ca dry grass or inflammable ma

Do not apply additional exhaust pipes, catalytic con system. These materials cou

Caution Never fully drain the fuel tank

cause ignition problems. This

system, which could cause o

For the sake of the e Even when the emission cont

smell of sulphur from the exh

on the sulphur content of the

solved by changing to anothe

WARNING (continued)

Driving and the environment194

vironmentally friendly

mentally friendly driving

ntal pollution and wear to the engine, brakes

t on your driving style. By adopting an econom-

ting the traffic situation ahead, you can easily

0-15%. Some tips on how to help you reduce

are listed below.

ituation

accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-

ten and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,

engaged, for example, if you see a red light

ieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of

nd fuel consumption are reduced to zero

.

rgy

l is to change up quickly through the gears.

m in the lower gears uses an unnecessary

first to second gear as quickly as possible. We

ssible, you change to a higher gear upon

he top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel

ns and noise levels all increase very rapidly at

erate speeds will help to save fuel.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 194 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Diesel engine particulate filter*

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced

by burning diesel.

The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas

system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If the driving

conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multiple short

trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the indicator for

the diesel engine particulate filter indicator will light up. See section on

Warning Lamps.

WARNING

The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; the vehicle should be parked so that the exhaust pipe does not come into contact with flammable materials underneath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.

Caution Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any circumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel may cause damage

to the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by the

diesel producer in accordance with standard EN 590 is authorised and will

not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.

Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur content may significantly reduce the

working life of the diesel particulate filter. Your Authorised Service Centre will

be able to tell you which countries have diesel with a high sulphur content.

Economical and en driving

Economical and environ

Fuel consumption, environme

and tyres depends in large par

ical driving style and anticipa

reduce fuel consumption by 1

pollution while saving money

Drive anticipating the traffic s

A vehicle uses most fuel when

tion, you have to brake less of

let the vehicle roll with a gear ahead. The braking effect ach

brakes and tyres; emissions a

(disconnection due to inertia)

Change gear early to save ene

An effective way of saving fue

Running the engine at high rp

amount of fuel.

Manual gearbox: Change from

recommend that, whenever po

reaching 2,000 rpm.

Avoid driving at high speed

We advise you not to drive at t

consumption, exhaust emissio

higher speeds. Driving at mod

Driving and the environment 195

Safety fir Technical data

ar round: they will increase fuel consumption by

l put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth

rtment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-

orted.

ce for the sake of convenience, even when it is

of 100-120 km/h your car will use about 12%

tra wind resistance caused by the roof rack even

nator, which produces electricity. With the need

on is also increased. Because of this, always

when you do not need them. Examples of equip-

ity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window

ness

top priority in the design, choice of materials

eat.

ical recycling

signed for ease of dismantling

acilitate dismantling

rade materials

ers are labelled in accordance with ISO 1043,

Exeo_EN.book Seite 195 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Avoid idling

It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level

crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after only

30 - 40 seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart the

engine.

The engine takes a very long time to warm up when it is running at idling

speed. Mechanical wear and pollutant emissions are also especially high

during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately

after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Periodic maintenance

Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you

will not consume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced

engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum

reliability and an enhanced resale value.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting gases, the engine and

the exhaust filtration systems should reach the optimum service tempera- ture.

With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine

does not warm up and fuel consumption does not regularise until having

driven some four kilometres. This is the reason why we recommend avoiding

short trips wherever possible.

Maintain the correct tyre pressures

Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the

tyre pressures are just 1 bar too low, this can put the fuel consumption up by

as much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also

increases tyre wear and impairs handling.

The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.

Do not use winter tyres all ye

up to 10%.

Avoid unnecessary weight

Every kilo of extra weight wil

checking the luggage compa

essary loads are being transp

A roof rack is often left in pla

no longer needed. At a speed

more fuel as a result of the ex

when it is not in use.

Save electricity

The engine activates the alter

for electricity, fuel consumpti

turn off electrical equipment

ment that use a lot of electric

heating or the seat heaters*.

Environmental friendli

Environmental protection is a

and production of your new S

Design measures for econom

Joints and connections de

Modular construction to f

Increased use of single-g

Plastic parts and elastom

ISO 11469 and ISO 1629

Driving and the environment196

out service station networks selling unleaded

sible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-

are not available or that the Authorised Service

ted repairs.

rs will gladly provide information about the

ehicle and also about necessary maintenance

lights

d drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or

ped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming

apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight

available in your Authorised Service Centre.

lights, the rotation system must previously be

se go to a specialist workshop.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 196 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Choice of materials

Nearly all materials used can be recycled

Similar types of plastics grouped together for easy recycling

Recycled materials used in manufacture

Reduction of volatile compounds in plastics

CFC-free refrigerant in air conditioner

Compliance with prohibited materials laws: cadmium, lead, mercury, chrome

VI.

Manufacturing methods

Use of recycled material for manufacturing plastic parts

Solvent-free cavity sealing

Solvent-free wax for protecting the vehicles in transit

Solvent-free adhesives

No CFCs used in production

Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building

materials

Overall water consumption reduced

Heat recovery systems

The use of water-soluble paints

Driving abroad

Observations

To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:

For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is

available for the journey. See the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa-

tions will have information ab

fuel.

In some countries, it is pos

tions where some spare parts

Centre may only carry out limi

SEAT importers and distributo

technical preparation of your v

and repair possibilities.

Adhesive strips for head

If you have to drive a right-han

vice versa, the asymmetric dip

traffic.

To prevent dazzling, you must

lenses. Further information is

In vehicles with adaptive head

disconnected. To do this, plea

Trailer towing 197

Safety fir Technical data

oints which need to be checked before

an.

permitted trailer weights page 293.

ermitted trailer weight.

p to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you

gly steeper gradients.

listed are only applicable for altitudes up to

h increasing altitude the engine power and

ng ability are impaired because of the reduced

iler weight has to be reduced accordingly. The

ust be reduced by about 10% for every subse-

f). This figure refers to the combined weight of

ded) trailer.

ad that appear on the identification plate of the

ation purposes only. The correct figures for your

lower than these figures for the towing bracket,

ocuments and on page 286. Also refer to

so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as

trailer must be secured to prevent them

Exeo_EN.book Seite 197 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Trailer towing

Trailer towing

Technical requirements

The towing bracket must meet certain technical requirements.

Your car is intended mainly for transporting passengers and luggage.

However, if suitably equipped, it can also be used to tow a trailer or caravan.

If your vehicle has been factory-supplied with a towing bracket, all of the

necessary technical and legal aspects for trailing towing have been taking

into account during manufacturing.

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole socket for the electrical connection

between the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer has a 7-pole connector you

can use an adapter cable. This can be purchased from any SEAT Dealer.

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the car is purchased, this must be done

according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer

page 206.

WARNING

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the installation should be carried out by a qualified workshop.

Particularly in high outdoor temperatures, it is not possible to drive up long steep gradients without a suitable cooling system. The engine would heat up.

Incorrect installation can result in a safety risk!

Notes on towing

There are a number of p

towing a trailer or carav

Observe the maximum

Trailer weight

Never exceed the maximum p

If you do not load the trailer u

can then climb correspondin

The maximum trailer weights

1,000 m above sea level. Wit

therefore the vehicle's climbi

air density. The maximum tra

weight of the car and trailer m

quent 1000 m (or part thereo

the (loaded) vehicle and (loa

The figures for the drawbar lo towing bracket are for certific

specific model, which may be

are given in the registration d

page 293.

Distributing the load

Distribute loads in the trailer

possible. Loads carried in the

moving.

Trailer towing198

additional attention by the driver.

aded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very

cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow

tribution.

ler is reduced with increasing speed. Therefore,

e maximum permissible speed in an unfavour-

nditions. This especially applies when driving

ed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest

top the snaking by increasing speed.

in good time. If towing a trailer with an inertia hen more severely. This will prevent brake

hen they lock. Select a low gear in due course

wnhill. This enables you to use the engine

icle.

reduced by stabiliser aids. We recommend

when towing trailers with a high trailer weight.

stalled at a Dealer.

t weather with the engine running fast in low

on the coolant temperature gauge page 60.

the needle moves to the right end of the scale.

ht in the instrument panel should start

he engine cool down by running it at idling

Exeo_EN.book Seite 198 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Where possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified

limit.

Tyre pressure

Check the tyre pressures on your car, and adjust for full load conditions

(refer to the sticker listing the tyre pressures on the door pillar). It may also be

necessary to adjust the tyre pressures on the trailer according to the recom-

mendations of the trailer manufacturer.

Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the

standard mirrors. If this is not the case you should have additional mirrors

fitted. The two exterior mirrors should be fitted on folding arms. Adjust the

mirrors to give sufficient rear vision.

Headlights

Before starting a journey, check the headlight beam settings with the trailer

hitched up. If necessary, alter the height of the headlight beams by means of

the headlight range control. See page 119.

Power supply

When you remove the ignition key, the power supply to the trailer is inter-

rupted.

Removable ball joint coupling

Vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket are equipped with a removable

ball joint coupling. This is stored in the spare wheel well in the luggage

compartment together with the necessary fitting instructions.

Note If you frequently tow, we recommend you also have vehicle serviced between

services.

Notes on towing

Towing a trailer involves

Weight distribution

The weight distribution of a lo

unfavourable. However, if this

for the unbalanced weight dis

Speed

The stability of the car and trai

it is advisable not to drive at th

able road, weather or wind co

downhill.

You should always reduce spe

sign of swaying. Never try to s

Anticipate hazards and brake

brake, first brake gently and t

tapping by the trailer wheels w

before going down a steep do

braking to slow down the veh

Swaying and pitching can be

having stabiliser aids installed

They can be purchased and in

Reheating

When climbing long hills in ho

gear, you should keep an eye

Reduce speed immediately if

If the temperature warning lig

flashing, stop the car and let t

speed for a few minutes.

Trailer towing 199

Safety fir Technical data

um of three bicycles may be used.

ounted on the towing bracket

nly mount equipment (e.g. bicycle rack) which

on the ball joint. If you wish to attach other

that it has been approved by the manufacturer

u mount unsuitable equipment, this can cause

t. In an extreme case, damage to the towing

k .

ipment which has not been approved by SEAT, ble for use on SEAT vehicles.

essory equipment can result in severe damage could then break while pulling a trailer Risk

nd when fitting and removing the ball joint. ing device, no longer guaranteeing the correct t. This could lead to an accident.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 199 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Equipment and accessories

Before mounting equipment and accessories (e.g. bicycle

rack) please observe the following notes.

The equipment/accessories mounted must not protrude more than 700 mm

from the ball joint .

The total weight (mounted equipment plus the load) must not exceed 75 kg.

The maximum load depends on where the centre of gravity lies.

The maximum weight decreases as the distance between the centre of gravity

and the ball joint increases.

The following limits apply:

If the distance is 300 mm, the total weight (incl. the equipment mounted)

must not exceed 75 kg.

If the distance is 600 mm, the total weight (incl. the equipment mounted)

must not exceed 35 kg.

Only bicycle racks for a maxim

Equipment and accessories m

SEAT recommends that you o

has been officially approved

equipment please make sure

for use on the ball joint. If yo

damage to the towing bracke

bracket could cause it to brea

WARNING

If you wish to mount equ please ensure that it is suita

The use of unsuitable acc to the towing bracket, and it of accident.

Never use tools of any ki This would damage the lock working order of the bracke

Fig. 150 Load distribu- tion of equipment and accessories

A1

A1

AA

AB

Trailer towing200

equipment, ensure that it is suitable for

wing bracket and that it is approved for this

o the ball joint from unsuitable equipment, we

r the towing bracket be purchased through

page 217.

the towing bracket of your vehicle if you are bracket. The use of unsuitable accessory

re damage to the towing bracket, and it could iler Risk of accident.

d when fitting and removing the ball joint. ng device, no longer guaranteeing the correct This could lead to an accident.

r repair the ball joint or other towing bracket

ulties when using the towing bracket, or

perly, contact a qualified workshop.

check that the ball joint is secured properly

oint with the caravan / trailer still hitched or

ccessory still attached.

e ball joint when you are not towing a trailer.

e is properly fitted on the mounting fixture on

re washing the vehicle with pressurised steam

er piece is fitted correctly onto the mounting

Exeo_EN.book Seite 200 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Removable towing bracket

Introduction

Special care is required when fitting and removing the towing

bracket.

The removable ball joint attachment for the towing bracket is stored under the

floor panel in the luggage compartment.

On vehicles with a spare wheel fig. 151.

The ball joint can be fitted and removed by hand.

Equipment / Accessories mounted on the towing bracket

Please note that the ball joint attachment can be damaged by using unsuit-

able equipment that is mounted onto the towing bracket (e.g. bicycle rack).

Due to the material construction, such damage to the towing bracket dramat-

ically increases safety risks and in extreme cases could lead to breakage of

the towing bracket while towing .

Therefore, before buying such

mounting onto the vehicle's to

purpose. To prevent damage t

recommend that equipment fo

your SEAT Dealer. Also see

WARNING

Only mount equipment on certain it will not damage the equipment can result in seve then break while pulling a tra

Never use tools of any kin This would damage the locki working order of the bracket.

Note Do not attempt to modify o

components.

Should you have any diffic

suspect that it is not fitted pro

Before setting off, always

page 203.

Never disengage the ball j

with a bicycle rack or similar a

It is advisable to remove th

Make sure that the cover piec

the vehicle.

Remove the ball joint befo

equipment. Make sure the cov

fixture.

Fig. 151 Luggage compartment: Spare wheel with towing bracket

Trailer towing 201

Safety fir Technical data

ep 2)

Fig. 153 Removable towing bracket: Ball joint

Fig. 154 Removable towing bracket: Ball joint

Exeo_EN.book Seite 201 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fitting the ball joint (step 1)

Remove the cover piece fig. 152 on the mounting fixture

below the bumper as far as it will go. The cover piece is held

automatically in the open position.

Make sure the mounting fixture is clean. If not, clean it .

Cont page 201, Fitting the ball joint (step 2).

WARNING

It is important to keep the mounting fixture clean. Otherwise the ball joint may fail to engage safely and securely. This could lead to an accident.

Fitting the ball joint (st

Fig. 152 Rear bumper: Open the cover piece

A2

A1

Trailer towing202

p 3)

Fig. 155 Removable towing bracket: Setting the spring mechanism to the "ready" position

Fig. 156 Removable towing bracket: inserting the ball joint

Exeo_EN.book Seite 202 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Make sure the ball joint is clean and undamaged

Check the locking pin , release pin , shaft section and

knob page 201, fig. 153 on the ball joint to make sure they

are clean and undamaged.

The spring mechanism inside the ball joint must be in the ready position

Check that the red marking page 201, fig. 154 on the knob

is inside the black zone marked on the ball joint.

Check that the locking pin is inside the holes in the shaft

section of the ball joint.

Check that the knob protrudes visibly from the ball joint, so that

there is a clear gap between the knob and the ball joint.

The ball joint can only be installed if the internal spring mechanism is in the

ready position.

Cont page 202, Fitting the ball joint (step 3).

Fitting the ball joint (ste AA AB AC

AD

AA

AB

AC

Trailer towing 203

Safety fir Technical data

ep 4)

Fig. 157 Removable towing bracket: Safety check

Fig. 158 Rear bumper: Pulling down the connecting socket

Exeo_EN.book Seite 203 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Setting the spring mechanism to the ready position (if required)

Insert the key page 202, fig. 155 in the lock on the knob

and turn it towards the red marking.

Pull out the knob in direction , hold and turn in direction

until the locking pin engages and the release pin moves

out visibly .

inserting the ball joint

With the spring mechanism in the ready position, insert the ball

joint into the mounting fixture and push it upwards page 202,

fig. 156 in the direction indicated (arrow) . It should lock

into position automatically. You should now clearly hear it click

into place.

Lock the ball joint by turning the key to the green marking.

Remove the key.

Cont page 203, Fitting the ball joint (step 4).

WARNING

If it is not possible to set the spring mechanism to the ready position as described above, do not use the ball joint. Please contact a qualified work- shop.

To avoid injury, keep your hands away from the knob or cover piece when inserting the ball joint in the mounting fixture. Otherwise, you could be injured.

Fitting the ball joint (st A1

AA AB

A2 A3

Trailer towing204

k fig. 159 on the knob.

turning the key to the red marking.

Fig. 159 Removable towing bracket: Removing the ball joint

Fig. 160 Rear bumper: fitting the cover piece

A1

Exeo_EN.book Seite 204 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Safety check

Check that the green marking page 203, fig. 157 on the

knob is inside the black zone marked on the ball joint.

Check that the knob is directly against the ball joint, so that there

is no gap between the knob and the ball joint -arrow-.

Check that the ball joint is locked and the key is removed so that

the knob cannot be pulled out .

Check that the ball joint fits tightly in the mounting fixture (try

moving it about to check).

Towing socket

To plug in the electrical connection for the trailer, pull down the

socket below the bumper page 203, fig. 158.

If the safety check is not satisfactory, the ball joint must be fitted again prop-

erly.

WARNING

To avoid accidents, the ball joint must meet all the safety requirements listed in the safety check. The towing bracket must not be used if any one of these requirements is not met. If this is the case, you should contact a qualified workshop.

Removing the ball joint

Insert the key in the loc

Unlock the ball joint by

AA

Trailer towing 205

Safety fir Technical data

Exeo_EN.book Seite 205 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Take hold of the ball joint and pull out the knob in direction .

Keep hold of the knob and turn it as far as it will go in direction

.

Release the knob. The spring mechanism will remain in the ready

position .

Pull the ball joint down out of the mounting fixture

page 204, fig. 160. The cover piece will cover the mounting

fixture automatically .

Put away the ball joint attachment under the floor panel in the

luggage compartment.

Move the socket back up to its original position.

WARNING

To avoid injury, keep your hands away from the locking pin and the release pin when releasing the locking mechanism.

Make sure that the cover piece is properly engaged on the mounting fixture on the vehicle. Otherwise the ball joint may fail to engage securely if dirt accumulates in the mounting fixture.

AA

AB

A1

A2

Trailer towing206

Fig. 161 Attachment points for towing bracket

Exeo_EN.book Seite 206 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Fitting a towing bracket*

It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.

Trailer towing 207

Safety fir Technical data

ncorrectly installed, there is serious danger of

se observe the instructions provided by the bracket.

ncorrectly installed, this could cause damage to

.

trailer bracket is not recommended due to the

Exeo_EN.book Seite 207 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be

completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.

The attachment points for the towing bracket are on the lower part of the

vehicle.

The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should

never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and

including the maximum drawbar load.

Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:

65 mm (minimum)

403

629 mm

1112 mm (vehicle with max. load)

from 350 to 420 mm (fully loaded vehicle)

1,000 mm

Fitting a towing bracket

Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,

before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre

to check whether your cooling system needs modification.

The legal requirements in your country must be observed (e.g. the fitting

of a separate warning lamp).

Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and

reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a

torque wrench, and an electrical socket must be connected to the vehicle's

electrical system. The above-mentioned require specialised knowledge and

tools.

Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment

points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.

WARNING

Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists.

If the towing bracket is i accident.

For your own safety, plea manufacturer of the towing

Caution If the electrical socket is i

the vehicle's electrical system

Note For the Sport finish, fitting a

design of the bumpers.

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

WARNING (continued)

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning208

in products may produce noxious vapours; entilated areas.

, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other c and highly flammable. Risk of fire and explo-

cle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch ndbrake firmly and remove the key from the

mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.

e for cleaning purposes. This could damage the

our vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty

vironment for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones

nvironment.

e products should not be disposed of with ordi-

e the disposal information on the package.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 208 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

General notes

Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your

vehicle.

Your vehicle maintenance

Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may

also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the

event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.

The best way to protect your car against the harmful effects of the environ-

ment is through correct maintenance and frequent washing. The longer

substances such as insects remains, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road

dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materials

remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High

temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive

effect.

After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the

underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.

Products for vehicle maintenance

Car care products are available in your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the

product instructions until you have used them up.

WARNING

Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or

your vehicle. The use of certa they should be used in well v

Never use fuel, turpentine volatile fluids. These are toxi sion.

Before washing your vehi the engine off, apply your ha ignition.

Caution Never attempt to remove dirt,

Never use a dry cloth or spong

paintwork or the windows of y

of water.

For the sake of the en When purchasing products

which are not harmful to the e

The leftovers of the car car

nary household waste. Observ

WARNING (continued)

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 209

Safety fir Technical data

top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove

ht pressure.

ove often with clean water.

hould only be used for very stubborn dirt.

anels etc. until last with a different

ughly with water.

e gently with a chamois leather.

old, dry the rubber seals and its surfaces

reezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber

avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the

ral times page 192, Braking effect

.

gnition switched off.

rms from cuts on sharp metal edges when inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of

e brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of

Exeo_EN.book Seite 209 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Vehicle exterior maintenance

Automatic car wash tunnel

The car can normally be washed without problem in an auto-

matic car wash.

The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the car can normally be washed

without problems in an automatic car washing tunnel. However, the paint-

work wear depends to a large extent, on the kind of the car washing tunnel,

the brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative

products.

Before going through a car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such

as closing the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to note apart from that.

If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof rack or two-

way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car washing tunnel oper-

ator.

After washing, the brakes could hesitate to respond as the brake discs and

pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by braking several

times.

WARNING

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident.

Washing by hand

Vehicle washing

First soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse it off.

Clean your vehicle from

or a brush. Use very lig

Rinse the sponge or gl

Special car shampoo s

Clean the wheels, sill p

sponge or glove.

Rinse the vehicle thoro

Dry your vehicle surfac

When temperature is c to prevent them from f

seals.

After washing

Directly after washing,

brakes by braking seve

and braking distance

WARNING

Wash your car with the i

Protect your hands and a cleaning the underbody, the injury.

Water, ice and salt on th accident.

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning210

jet nozzles (rotating jets) .

avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the

ral times page 192.

oncentrated jet (rotating nozzle). Even at short cleaning times, visible and invisible s. This may cause an accident.

brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of

an 60C. This could damage the vehicle.

hicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive

es, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This is

inted as the paintwork. The closer the nozzle is

wear on the material.

ce

the paintwork.

car if water does not form small drops and run

ean.

ct is available from your Authorised Service

Exeo_EN.book Seite 210 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Caution Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a

dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork

or glass on your vehicle.

Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with

a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the

doors, rear lid, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.

For the sake of the environment To protect environment, the car should be washed only in specially provided

wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the sewerage

system. In some districts, washing vehicles outside wash bays is prohibited.

Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner

Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!

Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,

particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.

Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted

bumpers.

Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from

windows page 211.

Never use concentrated

Directly after washing,

brakes by braking seve

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a c large spraying distances and damage can occur to the tyre

Water, ice and salt on the accident.

Caution Do not use water hotter th

To avoid damage to the ve

materials such as flexible hos

also important for bumpers pa

to the surface, the greater the

Vehicle paint maintenan

Regular waxing protects

You need to apply wax to your

off the paintwork when it is cl

A good quality hard wax produ

Centre.

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 211

Safety fir Technical data

ner directly over the air vents of the vehicle may

e liquid is accidentally spilled.

contain solvents will damage the material.

exterior mirrors

ith commercially available, alcohol based

clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.

move snow from the windows and mirrors.

leather to dry the windows. The chamois

aces are not suitable to clean windows because

osits which could smear the windows.

ay to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push

ut swinging it.

one remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and sili-

with a special cleaner available in your Author-

osits on the windscreen could cause the wiper

cleanser, specifically for removing wax, is added

Exeo_EN.book Seite 211 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Regular wax applications help to protect the paintwork from environmental

contaminants page 208. It is also effective in protecting against minor

scratches.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car washing tunnel, it is advis-

able to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.

Polishing the paintwork

Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.

Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot

be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in

your Authorised Service Centre.

The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax

compounds to seal the paint page 210, Vehicle paint maintenance.

Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:

Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or

on plastic parts.

Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.

Caring for plastic parts

Solvents damage plastic parts.

If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with approved

solvent-free plastic cleaning and care products.

Caution The use of liquid air freshe

damage the plastic parts if th

Cleaning products which

Cleaning windows and

Cleaning windows

Moisten the windows w

glass cleaner.

Dry the windows with a

Removing snow

Use a small brush to re

Removing ice

Use a de-icer spray.

Use a clean cloth or chamois

leathers used on painted surf

they are soiled with wax dep

If possible, use a de-icing spr

it in one direction only witho

Use window cleaner or a silic

cone deposits off.

Wax deposits can be removed

ised Service Centre. Wax dep

blades to judder. If a window

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning212

, windows, bonnet and rear lid will remain

are treated with a suitable care product (for

o prevent premature ageing and leaks. The

rubber seals are well looked after, they will not

can freeze up in winter.

u should only use spray with lubricating and

h a damp cloth.

h a soft, dry cloth.

ing results, use a specialist chrome cleaning ducts will remove stains and coatings from the

surfaces:

product on chrome.

me parts in a sandy or dusty environment.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 212 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

to the windscreen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering. Wax

deposits are not removed.

Caution Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and

mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!

The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the

window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers on the heating elements

inside the window.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

Clean wiper blades are essential to provide clear vision.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen

wiper blades.

2. Use window cleanser to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use

a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.

Rubber seals maintenance

If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so

quickly.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.

2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.

The rubber strips on the doors

pliable and last longer if they

example silicone spray).

Caring for rubber seals will als

doors will be easier to open. If

freeze so quickly in winter.

Door lock cylinders

The door lock cylinders

To de-ice the lock cylinders yo

anti-corrosive properties.

Cleaning chrome parts

1. Clean chrome parts wit

2. Polish chrome parts wit

If this does not provide satisfy

product. Chrome cleaning pro

surface.

Caution To prevent scratching chrome

Never use an abrasive care

Do not clean or polish chro

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 213

Safety fir Technical data

gents should not be used. If the protective

lying stones, the damaged area should be

ylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances sible and invisible damage can occur to the ident.

e brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of ing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the

mes page 192.

is coated to protect it from chemical

e.

damaged when driving. We recommend you to

under the body and on the running gear, and

e and after the winter season.

our Authorised Service Centre to carry out repair

osion work.

nti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, at shields on the exhaust system. The heat of gine could cause them to ignite! Fire hazard.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 213 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Steel wheel rims

Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.

Use an industrial cleanser to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on

steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes by braking several times page 192.

Alloy wheel rims

Every two weeks

Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.

Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims.

Every three months

Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.

Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. If road

salt and brake dust are not often removed, the aluminium finish will be

impaired.

Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheel rims.

Car polish or other abrasive a

coating is damaged, e.g. by f

repaired immediately.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a c and short cleaning times, vi tyres. This may cause an acc

Water, ice and salt on th accident. Directly after wash brakes by braking several ti

Underbody protection

The vehicle underbody

and mechanical damag

The protective coating can be

check the protective coating

reinstated if necessary, befor

We recommend you to go to y

work and additional anti-corr

WARNING

Do not apply underseal or a catalytic converter or the he the exhaust system or the en

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning214

fan. It is temperature-controlled and could en the key is removed from the ignition!

vironment ould be removed when the engine is washed.

eaned in an oil separator. For this reason,

ried out only by a qualified workshop or a petrol

aintenance

anel cleaning

h to clean plastic parts and the dash

satisfactory results, use a special

aning product.

nd the airbag module surface with cleansers s cause the surface to become porous. If the ing plastic parts could cause substantial inju-

Exeo_EN.book Seite 214 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Cleaning the engine compartment

Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.

Anti-corrosion treatment

The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-

corrosion treatment at the factory.

Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is

frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,

the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and

after winter.

Your Authorised Service Centre has got the necessary equipment to provide

the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we recommend

having this work performed by them.

The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment

is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.

On commissioning this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and

components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment.

WARNING

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 223.

Before opening the bonnet, switch the engine off, apply the handbrake firmly and always remove the key from the ignition.

Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.

Do not clean the vehicle underbody, wheel arches or wheel trims without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp- edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury.

Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.

Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh

For the sake of the en Fuel, grease and oil deposits c

The polluted water must be cl

engine washing should be car

station.

Vehicle interior m

Plastic parts and dash p

Use a clean, damp clot

panel.

If this does not provide

solvent-free plastic cle

WARNING

Never clean the dash panel a containing solvents. Solvent airbag triggered, disintegrat ries.

WARNING (continued)

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 215

Safety fir Technical data

be removed using a mild soap solution

tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)

ak through the leather or soak into the

ft, dry cloth.

treated twice a year with a special leather-

in your Authorised Service Centre.

ery sparingly.

ft, dry cloth.

le to preserve the genuine qualities of this

atural properties of the specially selected hides

r has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc.

d in everyday use and when looking after the

seams can scratch and damage the surface. If

iation for long periods, the leather should be

ading. However, slight colour variations in high-

rmal.

polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar

rn stains should be removed by a qualified

Exeo_EN.book Seite 215 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Wooden trim cleaning*

Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap

solution.

Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Cloth seat covers and fabric trim cleaning

Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned

with a special interior cleanser or with dry foam and a soft brush.

Leather cleaning*

Normal cleaning

Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the

leather surfaces.

Cleaning stubborn stains

More stubborn dirt can

(pure liquid soap; two

and a cloth.

Do not let the water so

seams.

Then wipe off with a so

Leather maintenance

The leather should be

care product, available

Apply these products v

Then wipe off with a so

SEAT does everything possib

natural product. Due to the n

employed, the finished leathe

so a degree of care is require

leather.

Dust and grit in the pores and

the vehicle is under solar rad

protected to prevent it from f

quality natural leather are no

Caution Do not use solvents, wax

products on leather.

To avoid damage, stubbo

workshop.

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning216

Exeo_EN.book Seite 216 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Seat belts cleaning

A dirty belt may not work properly.

Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.

Seat belts cleaning

Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.

Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.

Allow it to dry.

Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.

If large stains form on the belts, it will not retract correctly into the automatic

belt retractor.

WARNING

Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can impair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that belts do not come into contact with corrosive fluids.

Check all seat belts condition at regular intervals. If you notice that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialist workshop.

Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way.

Caution After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up.

Otherwise, the belt retractors could become damaged.

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 217

Safety fir Technical data

r the CE mark (European Union manufacturer

ephone holders or cup holders, should never ithin the working range, of the airbags. Other- jury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.

ations

ays be carried out according to our

to the electronic components or software in the

ns. Due to the way the electronic components

s, other indirect systems may be affected by the

air safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-

ur vehicle registration documents.

tres cannot be held liable for any damage

/or work incorrectly performed.

nd that all work should be performed by an

ing Genuine SEAT approved parts and acces-

Exeo_EN.book Seite 217 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications

Accessories and spare parts

Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before

purchasing accessories and parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.

Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical

changes to your car, we recommend you to consult your Authorised Service

Centre.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information

about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-

turer regarding accessories and parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in

question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Authorised Service Centres have

the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and

professionally installed.

Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess

the reliability, safety and suitability of those parts SEAT has not approved. For

this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts

used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or

are covered by an official approval certificate.

Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the

vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-

controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the

European Union's authorisation symbol).

If any additional electrical components are fitted so that they do not serve to

control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator

fan, etc.), then they must bea

conformity declaration).

WARNING

Accessories, for example tel be fitted on the covers, or w wise, there is a danger of in

Technical modific

Modifications must alw

specifications.

Unauthorised modifications

vehicle may cause malfunctio

are linked together in network

faults. This can seriously imp

nents, and also invalidate yo

SEAT Authorised Service Cen

caused by modifications and

For this reason, we recomme

Authorised Service Centre us

sories.

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications218

en*

dscreen have an area without athermic treat-

or fig. 162. This area has been designed for

ponents of fitted devices (e.g. electronic toll

at the electronic toll collection system is fitted

re it works correctly.

Fig. 162 Location of the electronic toll collection system

Exeo_EN.book Seite 218 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

WARNING

Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.

Mobile phones and radiotelephones

First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-

phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of

10 watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibil-

ities for retrofitting this equipment.

Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a qualified

workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.

WARNING

Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while driving you could have an accident.

Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units or within the range of the airbags. There is a high danger of injury if the airbag is triggered.

Note Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way

radio.

Athermic windscre

Vehicles with an athermic win

ment above the rear view mirr

the operating of electronic com

collection system).

Note The customer should ensure th

in the correct area to make su

Checking and refilling levels 219

Safety fir Technical data

ckwise into the filler opening until it you

on.

the vehicle on the right.

s operated correctly, it will switch itself off as

ver attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will

el may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.

r vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the

otes on fuel can be found.

le and can cause serious burns and other inju-

y naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the anister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.

ents for the use of spare fuel canisters.

do not recommend carrying a spare fuel he canister could be damaged in an accident

tances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, g points:

el canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- ild up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to

ly explosive. Always place the canister on the

Exeo_EN.book Seite 219 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Checking and refilling levels

Refuelling

The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-

mately 70 litres.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked and locked automati-

cally by the central locking.

Unscrewing the tank cap

Press the right side of the flap to open it.

Unscrew the fuel tank cap anti-clockwise.

Hook the cap onto the support fitted to the open tank flap

fig. 163.

Closing the tank cap

Screw the tank cap clo

hear it click into positi

Close the tank flap.

The tank flap is at the rear of

If the automatic filler nozzle i

soon as the tank is full. Ne

fill the expansion chamber. Fu

The correct fuel grade for you

fuel tank flap. where further n

WARNING

Fuel is highly inflammab ries.

Never smoke or use an vehicle, or a spare fuel c

Follow legal requirem

For safety reasons we canister in the vehicle. T and leak.

If, in exceptional circums please observe the followin

Never fill the spare fu trostatic charge could bu ignite. This may be fatal ground to fill it.

Fig. 163 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached

Checking and refilling levels220

k flap manually

ased manually if the central locking

ght-hand side trim.

he fuel tank flap fig. 164.

Fig. 164 Luggage compartment: Releasing the fuel tank flap by hand in case of emergency

Exeo_EN.book Seite 220 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.

If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro- static charge building up.

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.

Caution Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.

Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause

misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and

cause damage.

When filling the fuel tank after having run it completely dry on a vehicle

with a diesel engine the ignition must be switched on for at least 30 seconds

without starting the engine. When you then start the engine it may take

longer than normal (up to one minute) for the engine to start firing. This is due

to the fact that the fuel system has to purge itself of air before starting.

For the sake of the environment Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;

this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Releasing the tan

The tank flap can be rele

system fails to operate.

Open the rear lid.

Open the cover in the ri

Pull the ring to unlock t

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 221

Safety fir Technical data

e the quality of the petrol.

ences running behaviour, performance and

this reason, you should use good quality petrol

dditives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the

t deposits from building up in the engine.

itives is not available or engine problems occur,

e added during refuelling.

to DIN EN 590 (EN = European standard). It

CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates

sel fuel.

19.

ed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any diesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage

m. The addition of biodiesel to diesel fuel by the

ance with standard EN 590 or DIN 51628 is

damage to the engine or the fuel system.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 221 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Petrol

Petrol types

The recommended fuel types are listed on a sticker inside the

fuel tank flap.

Only unleaded petrol, corresponding to standard DIN EN 228, may be used

for vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = European Standard).

Fuel types are differentiated by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON

= Research Octane Number, unit for determining the knock resistance of

petrol). You may use petrol with a higher octane number than the one recom-

mended for your engine. However, this has no advantage in terms of fuel

consumption and engine power.

The correct fuel type for your vehicle is given in the technical table for the

engine. Technical Data section

Caution Petrol that follows EN 228 may be mixed with small quantities of ethanol.

However, the so-called bioethanol fuels available at commercial establish-

ments with reference E50 or E85, which contain a high percentage of ethanol,

may not be used, as they will damage the fuel system.

Even one tankful of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency

of the catalytic converter.

High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using

petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.

For the sake of the environment Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the

catalytic converter.

Petrol additives

Petrol additives improv

The quality of the petrol influ

service life of the engine. For

containing additives. These a

fuel system clean and preven

If good quality petrol with add

the required additives must b

Diesel

Diesel*

Diesel fuel must correspond

must have a cetane number (

the ignition quality of the die

Notes on refuelling page 2

Biodiesel*

Caution Your vehicle is not design

circumstances refuel with bio

the engine and the fuel syste

diesel manufacturer in accord

authorised and will not cause

Checking and refilling levels222

rom inside the vehicle.

pull the lever under the dash panel

ion indicated (arrow).

ock.

Fig. 165 Detail of foot- well area on driver side: lever for unlocking the bonnet.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 222 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

The diesel engine has been designed to be used exclusively with diesel

fuel in accordance with standard EN 590. Never refuel or use petrol, kerosene,

fuel oil or any other type of fuel. If you accidentally fill up the vehicle with the

wrong type of fuel, do not start the engine. Seek assistance from specialised

personnel. The composition of these fuels may severely damage the fuel

system and the engine.

Winter driving

Diesel can thicken in winter.

Winter-grade diesel

When using summer-grade diesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at

sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to wax separation.

Therefore, winter-grade diesel fuel is available in some countries during the

cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22C.

In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold

has different temperature characteristics. Check with an Authorised Service

Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel

fuels available.

Filter pre-heater

Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter glow plug system, making it well

equipped for operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains

operational to approx. -24C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is

safe to -15C.

However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start

at temperatures of under -24C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for

a while.

Caution Do not mix fuel additives (thinners, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.

The bonnet

Releasing the bonnet

The bonnet is released f

To release the bonnet,

fig. 165 in the direct

The bonnet springs out of its l

Checking and refilling levels 223

Safety fir Technical data

u see steam or drips of coolant being released t. Failure to comply could result in burns. Wait

n be seen before opening the bonnet.

partment

ry when working on components in

nt.

er of injury and scalding as well as the risk of orking in the engine compartment (e.g. when . Therefore, always observe the warnings listed safety precautions. The engine compartment of azardous area .

.

d with a manual gearbox, place the gearshift ving an automatic vehicle, place the gear lever

ol down.

llowed to approach the engine compartment

ed in vehicle operations on the engine catch fire (e.g. anti-freeze containing liquid

Exeo_EN.book Seite 223 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Opening the bonnet

Before opening the bonnet make sure that the windscreen wiper

arms are not lifted away from the glass. Otherwise the paint may be

damaged.

Lift the bonnet slightly .

Press the release catch under the bonnet upwards fig. 166.

This will release the arrester hook under the bonnet.

Open the bonnet.

The bonnet is held in position by a gas-filled strut.

WARNING

Never open the bonnet if yo from the engine compartmen until no steam or coolant ca

Work in the engine com

Extra caution is necessa

the engine compartme

Always be aware of the dang accident or even fire when w checking and refilling fluids) below and follow all general the vehicle is a potentially h

WARNING

Switch the engine off.

Remove the ignition key

Apply handbrake firmly.

If your vehicle is equippe lever in neutral. If you are dri in the position P.

Wait for the engine to co

Children should not be a

Never spill liquids involv compartment, as these may coolant).

Fig. 166 Release catch under the bonnet

Checking and refilling levels224

ome of the containers/ reservoirs mentioned

r side of the engine compartment.

ll it down to overcome the spring pres-

ed in the locking part. Do not tighten

nnet must always be completely closed when losing it always check that it is properly flush with the adjacent body panels.

e bonnet is not safely secured when the ehicle immediately and close the bonnet. n an accident.

ange should be performed by an Authorised

orkshop, according to the Maintenance

Exeo_EN.book Seite 224 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system, especially when working on the battery.

Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is hot, as the fan could start up suddenly.

Never open the expansion tank when the engine is hot. The cooling system is under pressure.

Protect face, hands and arms from any hot steam or hot liquid coolant released by covering the cap with a large, thick rag when opening the expansion tank.

If any tests have to be performed with the engine running, there is an extra safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator and radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system.

Observe the following additional warnings if work on the fuel system or the electrical system is necessary:

Always disconnect the battery.

Do not smoke.

Never work near open flames

Always keep an approved fire extinguisher immediately available.

Caution When topping up fluids, make sure the correct fluid is put into the correct

filler opening. This can otherwise cause serious malfunctions or engine

damage.

For the sake of the environment Inspect the ground underneath your vehicle regularly so that any leaks are

detected at an early stage. If you find spots of oil or other fluids, have your

vehicle inspected in the garage.

Note On right-hand drive vehicles s

below are located on the othe

Closing the bonnet

To close the bonnet, pu

sure.

Leave the bonnet secur

.

WARNING

For safety reasons the bo the vehicle is moving. After c secured. The bonnet must be

Should you notice that th vehicle is moving, stop the v Failure to do so could result i

Engine oil

General notes

We recommend that the oil ch

Service Centre or a qualified w

Programme.

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 225

Safety fir Technical data

ticulate filter must only be filled with VW 507 00

other engine oils.

stances, if the engine oil level is too low

obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, can you

nce) conforming to the VW 506 00, VW 506 01,

EA B3 / ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).

s selected according to the diagram.

re falls outside the limits of the scale for a short

equired.

Fig. 167 Types of oil according to temperature

Exeo_EN.book Seite 225 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The correct oil specifications for your engine are listed in the page 225,

Oil properties.

Check that the specifications quoted (VW standards) appear on the container

either singly or in combination with other specifications.

Flexible maintenance intervals (Extended Service Intervals*)

Special lubricating oils page 225 have been developed in the framework

of the SEAT Extended Service Intervals Booklet Maintenance

Programme

This type of oil must be used if you intend to take advantage of the prolonga-

tion of the maintenance intervals in the framework of the Extended Service

Intervals programme.

Do not mix the LongLife oil with oil intended for fixed service intervals, as

the requirements for the extended service intervals are then no longer guar-

anteed.

Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low

page 226 and LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to top up (once)

with oil for fixed service intervals page 225 (up to a maximum of 0.5

litres).

Fixed service intervals*

If Extended Service Intervals are not applied to your vehicle, you can use

oils for fixed service intervals page 225. In this case, your vehicle must be

serviced after a fixed interval of 1 year / 15,000 km (10,000 miles) (see the

Maintenance Programme).

In exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low

page 226 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can

put in a small quantity of oil conforming to the specification ACEA A2 or

ACEA A3 (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (diesel engines) (up to 0.5 l).

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*

The Maintenance Programme states whether your vehicle is fitted with a

diesel particulate filter.

Vehicles with a diesel par

engine oil.

Avoid mixing this oil with

Only in exceptional circum

page 226 and you cannot

put in a small quantity of oil (o

VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or AC

Oil properties

Viscosity

The viscosity class of the oil i

When the ambient temperatu

period, an oil change is not r

Checking and refilling levels226

rizontal position.

t idle speed until the service temperature

ipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and

it in as far as it will go.

ore and check the oil level fig. 168. If

add more engine oil page 227.

Fig. 168 Markings on oil dipstick

Exeo_EN.book Seite 226 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Mono-grade oil

Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to

ranges of viscosity3).

These oils are only useful in a climate that is constantly very cold or very

warm.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration

caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.

Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the

corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the

correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.

Checking the oil level

Checking oil level

Park the vehicle in a ho

Briefly run the engine a

is reached then stop.

Wait two minutes.

Pull out the dipstick. W

insert it again, pushing

Then pull it out once m

the oil level is too low,

Oil level in area

Do not top up oil.

Engine type Specification

Petrol VW 502 00/ VW 504 00

Diesel. Engines with Particu-

late filter (DPF)a)

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.

VW 507 00

Oils for LongLife Service Intervals*

Engine type Specification

Petrol VW 504 00

Diesel VW 507 00

3) Viscosity: oil density

Aa

Checking and refilling levels 227

Safety fir Technical data

cified grade of oil page 225, adding

ck the oil level once again page 226.

more engine oil.

p carefully and push the dipstick all the

ake sure no oil falls onto hot engine parts. lt in fire.

ly if it comes into contact with engine oil.

e above area . This could damage the cata-

ontact a qualified workshop to drain the engine

sed with engine oil. Any damage caused by the

ot be covered by the factory warranty.

nvironment of into the drains or onto the ground.

irements when disposing of empty oil

Aa

Exeo_EN.book Seite 227 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Oil level in area

Oil can be topped up. After topping up the oil level should be in

area .

Oil level in area

Oil must be topped up. After topping up the oil level should be in

area .

Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the car is used, oil

consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1,000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be

higher for the first 5,000 km. Therefore, the engine oil level must be checked

at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a journey.

Topping up the engine oil

Unscrew cap from oil filler opening page 293, fig. 235.

Carefully put in the spe

0.5 litres at a time.

After two minutes, che

Where necessary, add

Replace the oil filler ca

way in.

WARNING

When refilling with oil, m Failure to comply could resu

Wash your skin thorough

Caution The oil level must never b

lytic converter or the engine. C

oil if necessary.

No additives should be u

use of such additives would n

For the sake of the e Oil must not be disposed

Always observe legal requ

canisters.

Ab

Aa

Ac

Aa

Fig. 169 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap

Checking and refilling levels228

res down to approx. - 40C. However,the

ust not exceed 60%, as the anti-freeze protec-

erformance of the coolant system would suffer.

d climates (e.g. Sweden, Norway and Finland)

protection for temperatures down to -35C. In

tion of anti-freeze should always be at least

cooling system checked before the winter

antifreeze concentration is adequate for the

is applies particularly if you intend to take the

If necessary, have the antifreeze concentration

ired.

, an additive meeting the TL-VW 774G spec-

ay give considerably inferior corrosion protec-

he use of these anti-freezes may lead to a loss

ous damage to the engine.

be mixed only with anti-freeze additives G11,

Exeo_EN.book Seite 228 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Cooling system

Liquid coolant

The purpose of the liquid coolant is to carry heat away from

the engine. The correct amount of antifreeze is decisive in

preventing the cooling system from freezing in winter.

The your vehicle's engine cooling system is filled for life at the factory, so no

coolant needs to be changed. The liquid coolant consists of a mixture of water

and anti-freeze G12++. This is a glycol-based antifreeze with anti-corrosion

additives.

Liquid coolant additive

The amount of antifreeze required depends on the temperatures to be

expected in the winter season. If the antifreeze concentration is too low the

coolant can freeze, resulting in failure of the cooling system and heater.

The cooling system is filled at the factory with the correct amount of anti-

freeze for the country concerned.

In most cases, the mixture consists of 60% water and 40% anti-freeze. This

mixture gives the required anti-freeze protection at temperatures down to -

25C and particularly protects the metal parts of the cooling system against

corrosion. It also prevents scaling and significantly raises the boiling point of

the liquid coolant.

Countries with warm climate

The liquid coolant concentration must not be reduced by adding plain water,

even in the summer or in warm climates. The concentration of the anti-freeze

must always be at least 40%.

Countries with cold climate

If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of

the anti-freeze G12++ can be increased. A concentration of 60% offers anti-

freeze protection of temperatu

concentration of anti-freeze m tion would then drop and the p

Vehicles for countries with col

have factory-filled anti-freeze

these countries, the concentra

50%.

Caution It is advisable to have the

season to make sure that the

conditions to be expected. Th

car into a colder climate zone.

increased to 50 - 60% as requ

Use only anti-freeze G12++

ification. Other anti-freezes m

tion. The damage caused by t

of liquid coolant, causing seri

The anti-freeze G12++ can

G12 and G12+.

Checking and refilling levels 229

Safety fir Technical data

mally indicates a leak in the cooling system. In

should be inspected by a qualified workshop

ent merely to top up the liquid coolant.

stem, a loss of liquid coolant can only occur if

d out of the system as a result of overheating.

e added to the liquid coolant. Such additives

ction of the cooling system.

oolant

g up with liquid coolant.

cool down.

pansion tank fig. 170 with a cloth, and

ap anti-clockwise .

ly.

lant meets the required specifications

. Do not use a different type of anti-freeze if

lable. In this case, use only water and bring the

k up to the correct level as soon as possible.

coolant.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 229 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Checking the liquid coolant level

The liquid coolant level can be checked at a glance.

Switch the ignition off.

Check the coolant level on liquid coolant expansion tank

fig. 170. When the engine is cold, it should be between the

min and max marks. When the engine is hot, it may be

slightly above the max mark.

Its location is shown in the corresponding general overview of the engine

compartment.

The liquid coolant level should be checked with the engine switched off.

The liquid coolant level is monitored by a warning lamp in the instrument

panel page 78. However, we recommend that it should be checked occa-

sionally.

Liquid coolant losses

Any loss of liquid coolant nor

this case the cooling system

without delay. It is not suffici

If there are no leaks in the sy

the coolant boils and is force

Caution Radiator sealants must not b

could seriously impair the fun

Topping up the liquid c

Be careful when toppin

Switch the engine off.

Wait for the engine to

Cover the cap on the ex

carefully unscrew the c

Add liquid coolant.

Screw on the cap tight

Make sure that the liquid coo

page 228, Liquid coolant

anti-freeze G12++ is not avai

anti-freeze concentration bac

Always top up with new liquid

Fig. 170 Engine compart- ment: Liquid coolant deposit

Checking and refilling levels230

ompartment be aware that the radiator fan leading to the risk of injury.

indscreen wiper blades

tem

not sufficient for the windscreen

en washer contains the cleaning fluid for the

washer system*. The container is located in the

t). The filler cap is marked with the symbol

Fig. 171 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 230 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Do not fill above the max mark. Excess liquid coolant is forced out of the

system through the valve in the filler cap when the engine gets hot.

If a lot of liquid coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before

putting in cold coolant. Failure to do so could result in serious engine

damage.

WARNING

The cooling system is under pressure. Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. Failure to comply could result in burns.

The anti-freeze and liquid coolant can be a health hazard. Therefore, the anti-freeze should be stored in the original container in a safe place out of reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

For the sake of the environment Drained off coolant should not be used again. Drain off the used coolant into

a suitable container and dispose of it in the proper manner (observe environ-

mental regulations).

Radiator fan

The radiator fan can start running spontaneously.

The auxiliary fan can continue to run for as long as 10 minutes after stopping

the engine even after the ignition is switched off. It may also start running

suddenly after some while if

stored heat raises the coolant temperature, or

the hot engine compartment is additionally heated up by the sun.

WARNING

when working in the engine c may start running suddenly,

Washer fluid and w

Windscreen washer sys

Plain water on its own is

washer system.

The container for the windscre

windscreen and the headlight

engine compartment (front lef

fig. 171.

Checking and refilling levels 231

Safety fir Technical data

y from the windscreen.

on the wiper blade in the direction indi-

old onto the wiper blade at the same time.

out of its mounting on the wiper arm.

catch on the new wiper blade. The

blade should now be visible.

e into the mounting on the wiper arm

on the wiper blade in direction so that

he wiper arm.

k down onto the glass.

Fig. 173 Fitting the wiper blade

AD

Exeo_EN.book Seite 231 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The capacity of the container is listed in page 293.

Plain water on its own is not enough to clean the glass properly. It is therefore

advisable to add a suitable washer fluid additive (with wax solvent) to the

water. A washer fluid with freeze-resistant additive should be used in winter.

Caution Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen

washer fluid.

Never use washer fluid which contains paint thinners or solvents as it can

damage the paintwork.

Changing windscreen wiper blades

If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you

will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper

blades should be replaced immediately.

Removing the wiper blade

Lift the wiper arm awa

Slide the retainer catch

cated fig. 172 . H

Pull the wiper blade

Fitting the wiper blade

Slide back the retainer

mounting on the wiper

Fit the new wiper blad

fig. 173 .

Slide the retainer catch

it clicks into place on t

Fold the wiper arm bac

Fig. 172 Removing the wiper blade

AA

AB

AC

Checking and refilling levels232

d level

be checked at a glance.

etween the Min and Max fig. 174 mark-

tly after a period of time due to the automatic

ear. This is quite normal.

n noticeably in a short time, or drops below the

ak in the brake system. If the fluid level in the

e indicated by the brake warning lamp

this should happen, take the car to a qualified ve the brake system inspected.

Fig. 174 Engine compart- ment: markings on brake fluid reservoir

Exeo_EN.book Seite 232 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are damaged,

or cleaned if they are soiled.

If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-

screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified

workshop and corrected if necessary.

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!

The ignition must not be switched on while the front wiper arms are in a raised position. The wipers would return to their park position and damage the paintwork on the bonnet.

To prevent smearing on the windscreen, the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly using a window cleaner solution. If the wiper blades are very dirty (e.g. insects etc.), they should be cleaned using a sponge or cloth. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

For safety reasons, the wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.

Caution Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to

clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.

Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This

could cause damage.

Do not pull the windscreen wipers forward unless they are in the service

position. Otherwise the bonnet could be damaged.

Brake fluid

Checking the brake flui

The brake fluid level can

The brake fluid level must be b

ings.

The fluid level may drop sligh

compensation for brake pad w

However, if the level goes dow

Min mark, there may be a le

reservoir is too low, this will b

page 70 and page 77. If

workshop immediately and ha

Checking and refilling levels 233

Safety fir Technical data

nvironment out of the brake system, use an appropriate

rake fluid and dispose of it in the proper

quires specialist knowledge.

nance-free and is checked in the Inspection

ace a battery once it is older than 5 years.

, some of the vehicle's functions will become

ows). These functions will require resetting

ed. For this reason, the battery should only be

e's electrical system when absolutely necessary.

e its charge because certain electrical equip-

nt even when the ignition is off. If you park the

e in winter you should take the battery out of

ost-proof room. Store the battery in a place

nd become damaged. At warm outside temper-

nnect the negative terminal of the battery. Even

ected you should charge it from time to time.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 233 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Topping up and changing the brake fluid

It is best to have the brake fluid changed by a professional.

Brake fluid absorbs damp. Therefore, in the course of time it will absorb water

from the ambient air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the

brake system could corrode. In addition, the boiling point of the brake fluid

will be considerably reduced. This could adversely affect the braking ability in

certain circumstances.

For this reason the brake fluid must be changed periodically.

Your vehicle's Service Schedule will tell you when the brake fluid has to be

renewed.

We recommend you have the brake fluid changed as part of a regular Inspec-

tion Service at your garage. They are familiar with the procedure and have the

necessary special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for

disposing of the old fluid.

Use only the genuine brake fluid specified by the factory Specialised work-

shops know that the brake fluid -DOT 4- is factory approved. The brake fluid

must be new.

WARNING

Therefore, it must always be kept closed in its original container. Keep out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the car, leading to the risk of accident.

Caution Please note that brake fluid will attack the paintwork on contact.

For the sake of the e If the fluid has to be drained

container to catch the used b

manner.

Battery

General notes

All work on batteries re

The battery is virtually mainte

Services.

We recommend that you repl

Disconnecting the battery

If the battery is disconnected

inoperative (e.g. electric wind

after the battery is reconnect

disconnected from the vehicl

Long periods of non-use

The battery will gradually los

ment continues to draw curre

vehicle for long periods of tim

the vehicle and keep it in a fr

where it cannot freeze up a

atures it is sufficient to disco

when the battery is not conn

Checking and refilling levels234

gs for handling a car battery

ack of the engine compartment page 293.

er of injury and chemical burns as well as the orking on the battery and the electrical

ect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and

ive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and batteries. This could spill acid through the eyes immediately for several minutes with

al care immediately. Neutralise any acid ing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with llowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-

s and smoking are prohibited. When handling ent, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic ry terminals. High-energy sparks can cause

tion

ery corrosive and caustic. Wear protective

protection!

ked lights and smoking are prohibited!

ve mixture of gases is released when the bat-

rge.

way from acid and batteries!

Exeo_EN.book Seite 234 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Winter operations

The battery is drained more in cold weather, which means that the starting

power is reduced. For this reason, have the battery checked and charged if

necessary before the start of winter.

Replacing the battery

A replacement battery must have the same capacity, voltage and current

rating. It must also have the same dimensions as the original, factory-fitted

battery and have sealed caps. The SEAT batteries which have been specially

developed fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety specifications for

your vehicle.

We recommend you use maintenance-free batteries.

WARNING

All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge. If work is required on the battery, this should be performed by a Technical Service or qualified workshop. Danger of caustic burns and explosion!

The battery must not be opened. Never try to change the battery's liquid level. Explosive gas is released from the battery that could lead to an explosion.

Caution The battery holder and clamps must always be correctly secured.

Before starting any work on the battery, always observe the warnings

listed under .

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances including sulphuric acid and lead.

Therefore, they must be disposed in line with environmental regulations and

must not be disposed of with ordinary household waste. Make sure discon-

nected batteries cannot tip over. Sulphuric acid could be spilt!

Important safety warnin

The battery is located at the b

WARNING

Always be aware of the dang risk of accident or fire when w system:

Wear eye protection. Prot particles containing lead.

Battery acid is very corros eye protection. Do not tilt the vents. Rinse battery acid from clear water. Then seek medic splashes on the skin or cloth plenty of water. If acid is swa ately.

Fires, sparks, naked light cables and electrical equipm charge. Never short the batte injury.

Wear eye protec

Battery acid is v

gloves and eye

Fires, sparks, na

A highly explosi

tery is under cha

Keep children a

Checking and refilling levels 235

Safety fir Technical data

is important for reliable starting.

in Important safety warnings for

on page 234 and .

and all electrical equipment.

: both battery cables must be discon-

tive cable, then the positive cable).

bles to the battery terminals, noting the

d for positive, black or brown for nega-

ry charger to the power point and switch

ery: switch off the battery charger and

point cable.

charger cables from the battery.

t both battery cables to the battery (first

en the negative cable).

rrent (for instance with a small battery charger)

have to be disconnected. However, both

nnected before fast-charging the battery with

ys follow the instructions given by the manufac-

for a battery is dangerous in Important

a car battery on page 234, as it requires a

Exeo_EN.book Seite 235 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.

Keep children away from acid and batteries.

Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.

When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.

Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.

Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0C.

Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.

Never use a defective battery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a damaged battery immediately.

Caution Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine

is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-

nents.

Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as

the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.

If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect

the battery from frost. If it freezes it will be damaged.

Charging the battery

A fully-charged battery

Note the warnings handling a car battery

Switch off the ignition

Only if fast-charging

nected (first the nega

Connect the charger ca

colour code (red is use

tive).

Now connect the batte

on.

After charging the batt

disconnect the power

Finally disconnect the

If necessary, reconnec

the positive cable, th

When charging with a low cu

the battery does not normally

battery cables must be disco

a high current. However, alwa

turer of the battery charger.

The fast-charging procedure

safety warnings for handling

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels236

Exeo_EN.book Seite 236 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

special charger and the corresponding level of knowledge. We therefore

recommend that this work should only be performed by a qualified workshop.

A flat battery can freeze at temperatures of around 0C. The battery must be

defrosted before charging . It is advisable to replace the battery if it has

frozen, because the ice can crack the battery casing and allow the battery

acid to escape.

The battery caps should not be opened while the battery is being charged.

WARNING

Never charge a frozen battery. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Wheels and tyres 237

Safety fir Technical data

ften not readily visible. If you notice unusual

one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres

be checked immediately by an Authorised

attern

indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with

erve the direction of rotation indicated when

tees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-

wear.

aximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu- f accident.

d tyres. This may cause an accident.

ration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when ediately and check the tyres for damage.

e can be seen on the sticker on the

inflation pressure from the sticker. The

r tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2

on the sticker.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 237 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Wheels and tyres

Wheels

General notes

Avoiding damage

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very

slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,

etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.

Storing tyres

Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of

rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly

when you replace them.

When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a

cool, dry and preferably dark location.

Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel

rims.

New tyres

New tyres have to be run-in.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre

and the tread pattern.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is o

vibrations or the car pulling to

is damaged. The tyres should

Service Centre.

Tyres with directional tread p

An arrow on the tyre sidewall

directional tread. Always obs

fitting the wheel. This guaran

planing, excessive noise and

WARNING

New tyres do not have m larly carefully to avoid risk o

Never drive with damage

If you notice unusual vib driving, stop the vehicle imm

Checking tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressur

inside of the tank flap.

1. Read the required tyre

values refer to Summe

bar to the values given

Wheels and tyres238

g*

oring system constantly checks the

the event of a loss of pressure by means of

instrument panel display.

epends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure

ch 10C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre

eing driven and the tyre pressure will rise

ou should only adjust the tyre pressures when

ly at ambient temperature).

e monitoring system works reliably, you should

t the tyre pressures at regular intervals and

ference values) in the system.

el is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.

e when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!

tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!

vironment creased fuel consumption and tyre wear.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 238 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are

cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be

reduced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.

Tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure

should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a

journey.

The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the

tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. Do not reduce the

slightly raised pressures of warm tyres .

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking tyre pressure value is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.

A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.

If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.

Tyre pressure monitorin

The tyre pressure monit

pressure of the tyres.

The system warns the driver in

symbols and messages in the

Note that tyre pressure also d

increases about 0.1 bar for ea

heats up while the vehicle is b

accordingly. For this reason, y

they are cold (i.e. approximate

To ensure that the tyre pressur

check and, if necessary, adjus

store the correct pressures (re

A tyre pressure information lab

WARNING

Never adjust tyre pressur even burst the tyres. Risk of

An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating of bead may be released or the

For the sake of the en Under-inflated tyres lead to in

Wheels and tyres 239

Safety fir Technical data

rence or frequency characteristic changes on

ressure warning lamp will light up. The fault

rning buzzer. The position of the affected tyre

e tyre is affected) on the centre display of the

frequency characteristics can change if:

w.

ctural damage.

n pressures have been changed without initial-

ng the tyre pressure settings).

the wheels of one axle (e.g. if you are carrying

).

e left wheels is different to the road surface

ong period.

hains.

ettings (initialising the tyre pressure

he wheels of your vehicle, e.g. after modify the

after changing of swapping around wheels

t a standstill and the engine running - press

g lamp will light up. Hold the button down

ng lamp goes out and an acoustic warning is

e button.

extreme stress (e.g. heavy load), the tyre pres-

e recommended value for the maximum load

e inside of the fuel tank flap) and then initialise

n

ion, the tyre pressure warning lamp will light

is a fault in the system if the indicator stays on

on the ignition. The instrument panel also

Exeo_EN.book Seite 239 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Significant tyre pressure loss

The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure for a least

one tyre is insufficient.

- Stop the vehicle.

- Switch the engine off.

- Check the tyre(s).

- Change the wheel if necessary.

Tyre pressure monitoring (RKA+)*

The type pressure monitor display on the instrument panel

indicates that the pressure is too low.

The tyre pressure monitoring system makes use of the ABS sensors to

compare the rolling circumference and the frequency characteristics of the

wheels. If the rolling circumfe

one or more wheels, the tyre p

will also be indicated by a wa

will also be shown (if only on

instrument panel.

The rolling circumference and

the tyre pressure is too lo

the tyre has suffered stru

the wheels or the inflatio

ising the system (see Adjusti

there is a greater load on

more passengers or luggage

the road surface under th

under the right wheels for a l

when driving with snow c

Adjusting the tyre pressure s monitoring system)

After any incident regarding t

tyre pressure page 240 or

page 180 - with the vehicle a

fig. 175. The yellow warnin

for 2 seconds until the warni

given. You can now release th

If the wheels are subjected to

sure must be increased to th

(see the adhesive label on th

the system.

Tyre pressure warning lamp o

When you switch on the ignit

up for about 2 seconds. There

permanently after switching

Fig. 175 Detailed view of the centre console: Button for the tyre pressure monitoring system

Wheels and tyres240

dependent on tyre pressure, driving

Fig. 176 Tyre tread wear indicators

Fig. 177 Diagram for changing wheels

Exeo_EN.book Seite 240 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

display TMPS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). Please contact the nearest

qualified workshop as soon as possible.

The tyre pressure warning lamp lights up if the tyre pressure on one or

more wheels is significantly lower than the tyre pressure setting which was

confirmed by the driver .

WARNING

If the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up you must slow down immediately and avoid any severe braking or steering manoeuvres. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and check the tyres and their pressure.

The driver is responsible for maintaining correct tyre pressures. There- fore, the tyre pressure must be regularly checked.

Under certain conditions (e.g. driving at high speeds, on ice and snow or on poor road surfaces) the tyre pressure warning lamp may not light up immediately or not at all.

Please ask your Dealer or qualified workshop whether run-flat tyres can be used on your vehicle. Fitting this type of tyre in an undue manner could lead to your driving licence being taken away from you. Furthermore, it may led to damage to the vehicle or, under certain circumstances, may cause accidents.

If you change normal tyres for run-flat tyres or vice versa, the control unit must be reprogrammed by the Dealer or a qualified workshop.

Note If you did not press the button for the tyre pressure monitoring system to

confirm a new tyre pressure setting after making changes to the tyre pres-

sures or changing one or more wheels, the warning lamp may light up

although the tyre pressures are correct. In this case, stop the vehicle as soon

as possible and, after examining the tyres, press the button for the tyre pres-

sure monitoring system.

Tyre service life

The service life of tyres is

style and fitting.

Wheels and tyres 241

Safety fir Technical data

re balanced. However, various factors encoun-

use them to become unbalanced, which results

e rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive

and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced

uses excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of

essive wear, you should have the wheel align-

ed Service Centre.

accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!

ed at the latest when the tread is worn down to ilure to do so could result in an accident. Worn

h speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater

eds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes eat. This can cause tread separation and tyre lways observe the recommended tyre pres-

ear, you should have the running gear checked ntre.

oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.

res must be replaced immediately!

nvironment ase fuel consumption.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 241 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Wear indicators

The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators

page 240, fig. 176, running across the tread. Depending on the make,

there will be six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on

the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the

positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by

law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-

tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export

countries .

Tyre pressure

Under-inflation or over-inflation will reduce the life of the tyres considerably

and also impair the car's handling. The inflation pressures are listed on a

sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

Correct inflation pressures are very important, especially at high speeds. The

pressure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before

starting any long journey.

Tyre pressure monitoring (RKA+)*

Monitoring of the tyre pressures is based on the tyre pressures you have

stored. The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function as intended if

you store tyre pressure settings for a normal load, but then drive with the

vehicle fully laden. The tyre pressure must be adapted to the actual load and

stored accordingly in the tyre pressure monitoring system page 239.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels around

If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable

to change them around as shown page 240, fig. 177. All the tyres will then

last for about the same time.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles a

tered in normal driving can ca

in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should b

wear on steering, suspension

when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect wheel alignment ca

the vehicle. If tyres show exc

ment checked by an Authoris

WARNING

There is a serious danger of

The tyres must be replac the tread wear indicators. Fa tyres do not grip well at hig risk of aquaplaning

At continuously high spe more. This causes it to overh blow-out. Risk of accident. A sures.

If tyres show excessive w by an Authorised Service Ce

Keep chemicals such as

Damaged wheels and ty

For the sake of the e Under-inflated tyres will incre

Wheels and tyres242

u contact Technical Service. If more than one

gency conditions, this reduces the distance

conditions

isplayed on the instrument panel, this means

driven in emergency conditions .

of the tyres,

to continue driving even using run-flat tyres?

rogramme (ESP) is out of operation.

ring system* does not work.

severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre

e is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown

uel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.

riving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel

ff smoke.

onditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is

speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and bserve legal requirements when doing so.

id manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.

les (for example kerbs) or potholes.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 242 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Anti-puncture tyres*

Run-flat tyres allow you to continue driving even with a punc-

tured tyre, in the majority of cases.

In vehicles that are factory-fitted with run-flat tyres4) the loss of tyre

pressure is indicated on the instrument panel.

Driving with run-flat tyres (emergency running)

Leave the ESP/TCS (Electronic Stability Programme) switched on,

or switch on page 68.

Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h maximum).

Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.

Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.

Look out for the ESP/TCS intervening often, smoke coming from

the tyres or the smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-

tering noise. If any of these occur, stop the vehicle.

The run-flat tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:

DSST, Eufonia, RFT, ROF, RSC, SSR or ZP.

The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are

supported on the sides (emergency driving).

The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can

then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for

example, low load), even more.

The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be

checked in a specialist workshop to detect possible damage and replace it if

necessary. We recommend yo

tyre is being used under emer

which can be travelled.

Starting driving in emergency

When loss in tyre pressure is d

that at least one tyre is being

End of emergency operation

Do not drive on if:

smoke is coming from one

there is a smell of rubber,

the vehicle vibrates,

there is a rattling noise.

When is it no longer possible

If the Electronic Stability P

If the tyre pressure monito

If one of the tyres has been

has been badly damaged ther

off and cause damage to the f

It is also advisable to stop d

starts overheating and gives o

WARNING

When driving in emergency c considerably impaired.

The maximum permitted weather conditions. Please o

Avoid sharp turns and rap

Avoid driving over obstac 4) Depending upon version and country.

Wheels and tyres 243

Safety fir Technical data

following information:

bol

vy-duty tyres.

so indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only

l).

xample, that the tyre was produced in the 11th

tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised

liar with the procedure and have the necessary

as well as the proper facilities for disposing of

e has full information on the technical require-

nging tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

use only wheels and tyres which have been odel. Failure to do so could impair vehicle

e on tyres that are more than six years old. If should drive slowly and with extra care at all

ose with an unknown history of use.

ted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the could cause them to overheat.

fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size he same tread pattern.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 243 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If one or more tyres is being driven in emergency conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is impaired and there is a risk of accident.

Note The run-flat tyres do not deflate on losing pressure because they are

supported on the reinforced sides. Therefore defects in the tyre can not be

detected with a visual inspection.

Snow chains must not be used on front tyres used in emergency

conditions.

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels have to be run-in.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The

tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics

of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe

handling .

Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front

tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it

easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations

marked on the sidewall, for example:

195/65 R15 91T

This contains the following information:

195 Tyre width in mm

65 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre construction: Radial

15 Rim diameter in inches

91 Load rating code

T Speed rating

The tyres could also have the

A direction of rotation sym

Reinforced denotes hea

The manufacturing date is al

on the inner side of the whee

DOT ... 1103... means, for e

week of 2003.

We recommend that work on

Service Centre. They are fami

special tools and spare parts

the old tyres.

Any Authorised Service Centr

ments when installing or cha

WARNING

We recommend that you approved by SEAT for your m handling. Risk of accident.

Avoid running the vehicl you have no alternative, you times.

Never use old tyres or th

If wheel trims are retrofit brakes is not restricted. This

All four wheels must be (rolling circumference) and t

WARNING (continued)

Wheels and tyres244

tened correctly, the wheel could become ccident.

lean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil

ch belong to the wheel.

bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the ccident! If the tightening torque is too high,

can be damaged.

ue for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is

e the vehicles handling on snow and

es will considerably improve the vehicles

er tyres (width, rubber compound, tread

and snow.

o a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures

e sticker on tank flap).

all four wheels.

er tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-

adial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the

pply to winter tyres.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 244 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.

Note For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from

other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of

wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your

model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.

If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the

vehicle - for example with winter tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for

a short period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel

as soon as possible.

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are

fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt

heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the

brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car -

even if it is the same model page 217.

After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-

ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tigh loose while driving. Risk of a

The wheel bolts must be c to them.

Use only wheel bolts whi

If the torque of the wheel vehicle is in motion. Risk of a the wheel bolts and threads

Caution The prescribed tightening torq

120 Nm.

Winter tyres

Winter tyres will improv

ice.

In winter conditions winter tyr

handling. The design of summ

pattern) gives less grip on ice

Winter tyres must be inflated t

specified for summer tyres (se

Winter tyres must be fitted on

Information on permitted wint tration documents. Use only r

vehicle documentation also a

Wheels and tyres 245

Safety fir Technical data

ly to the front wheels, and only to certain tyre

trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety

in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be

ons provided by the snow chain manufacturer.

ains to drive on roads which are free of snow.

ndling, damage the tyres and wear out very

eed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The

ntry should be followed.

sk your Approved Service Centre for information

and snow chain size.

15 mm chains

9 mm chains

7 mm chains

Exeo_EN.book Seite 245 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth

of 4 mm.

The speed rating code page 243, New tyres and wheels determines the

following speed limits for winter tyres:

Q max. 160 km/h

S max. 180 km/h

T max. 190 km/h

H max. 210 km/h

In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted

tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These

stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-

ments of each country must be followed.

Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with

summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.

If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel

page 243, New tyres and wheels.

WARNING

The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to tyre damage and thus, an accident risk.

For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly

and reduce fuel consumption.

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted on

sizes page 292.

Remove wheel hub covers and

reasons cover caps, available

fitted over the wheel bolts.

WARNING

Observe the fitting instructi

Caution You must remove the snow ch

Otherwise they will impair ha

quickly.

Note In some countries, the sp

legal requirements of the cou

We recommend that you a

about appropriate wheel, tyre

205/55 R16

225/45 R17

225/40 R18

If and when246

k.

before closing the rear lid.

l covers* or hub caps

ts

le blade

ft wheel bolts*

e storage bin, wind down the arm of the jack as

ly provided in certain models or are optional

l socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the ent.

factory is only designed for changing wheels t attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles .

en the vehicle is raised. Failure to do so could

underneath the vehicle, this must be secured e, there is a risk of injury.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 246 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

If and when

Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel

Tools

The tools and jack are stored under the floor panel in the

luggage compartment.

The tools and jack fig. 178 are stored under the floor panel

in the luggage compartment.

Lift the floor panel using the plastic handle.

Hook the handle onto the luggage compartment weather

strip.

Release the toolbox by pulling up the handle on the box.

Take out the tools or jac

Replace the floor panel

The tool kit includes:

A hook for removing whee

Box spanner for wheel bol

A screwdriver with reversib

Towing eye

An adapter for the anti-the

Before replacing the jack in th

far as it will go.

Some of the tools listed are on

extras.

WARNING

Do not use the hexagona the wheel bolts, as with this required torque. Risk of accid

The jack supplied by the on this model. On no accoun or other loads. Risk of injury

Never start the engine wh result in an accident.

If work is to be carried out by suitable stands. Otherwis

Fig. 178 Toolbox and jack

AA AB

AC

If and when 247

Safety fir Technical data

el is carried in the wheel well under

ggage compartment. It is only

use over short distances.

el

fig. 180 anti-clockwise.

el.

eel in the spare wheel well

heel well in the luggage compartment.

g plastic knob clockwise.

l before closing the rear lid.

Fig. 180 Spare steel rim wheel

Exeo_EN.book Seite 247 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Tyre mobility system

The tyre mobility system is stored under the floor panel in the

luggage compartment.

Take hold of the handle and fold back the floor panel in the

luggage compartment.

Take out the tyre mobility system.

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tyre Mobility System in case of a puncture.

The tyre mobility system consists of a container with sealing compound and

a compressor to generate the required tyre pressure.

Instructions for using the sealant compound and the compressor are

included with the sealant can.

Spare steel rim wheel

The spare steel rim whe

the floor panel in the lu

intended for temporary

Taking out the spare whe

Turn the plastic knob

Take out the spare whe

Securing the defective wh

Place wheel in spare w

Secure wheel by turnin

Replace the floor pane

Fig. 179 Tyre Mobility System under floor panel in luggage compartment

If and when248

e changing a wheel.

puncture, park the car as far away from

ssible. Choose a location that is as level

eave the vehicle. They should wait in a

the roadside crash barrier).

mly.

nhitch the trailer from your vehicle.

spare wheel page 246 out of the

y traffic, switch on the hazard warning lights le in a visible location. This is for your own oad users.

on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the

ng a stone or similar object under it to prevent

Exeo_EN.book Seite 248 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel spare wheel at the factory. The

spare wheel does not usually meet the same performance standards as the

wheels fitted on the vehicle because of the wheel/tyre dimensions, rubber

composition, tread pattern, etc. Therefore, note the following restrictions:

The spare steel rim wheel is designed only for your vehicle model. Do not

attempt to mount the wheel on any vehicle but your own.

Your vehicle will have different driving characteristics when the spare

steel rim wheel is mounted .

The spare wheel is only intended for temporary use after having a flat tyre.

Replace the spare wheel with a normal wheel that has the proper tyre dimen-

sions as soon as possible.

If the size of the spare steel rim wheel is different to that of the other

wheels, it is unlikely that snow chains suitable for the other wheels will fit it.

WARNING

After mounting the spare steel rim wheel, the tyre pressure must be checked and corrected as soon as possible. The tyre pressure must corre- spond to the vehicle load (consult the table containing the inflation pres- sures). Otherwise there is danger of causing an accident. Use the highest tyre pressure as indicated in the table.

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h, as higher speeds can cause an acci- dent.

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering, as this could cause an accident.

Changing a wheel

Preparation work

What you must do befor

If you have a flat tyre or

the flow of traffic as po

as possible.

All passengers should l safe place (e.g. behind

Apply the handbrake fir

Engage 1st gear.

When towing a trailer: U

Take the tools and the

luggage compartment.

WARNING

If you have a puncture in heav and place the warning triang safety and also warns other r

Caution If you have to change the tyre

wheel being changed by placi

the vehicle from rolling away.

If and when 249

Safety fir Technical data

of the newly fitted spare tyre must be

ssible.

rque of the wheel bolts checked as soon

ue wrench. It must be 120 Nm (always

ced as quickly as possible.

el bolts are rusty and difficult to turn when

be replaced before having the tightening torque

oderate speeds until the wheel bolt tightening

Exeo_EN.book Seite 249 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note Please observe legal requirements when doing so.

Changing a wheel

Change the wheel as described below.

Remove the wheel cover.

Loosen the wheel bolts page 250.

Raise the car with the jack page 251.

Take off the wheel with the flat tyre and then put on the spare

wheel page 252.

Lower the vehicle.

Tighten the wheel bolts firmly in diagonal sequence with the box

spanner page 250.

Replace the cover.

After changing a wheel

After changing the wheel, there are still tasks to complete.

Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the spare wheel well and secure it.

Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.

The inflation pressure checked as soon as po

Have the tightening to as possible with a torq

when cold)

Have the flat tyre repla

Note If you notice that the whe

changing a wheel, they must

checked.

For your safety, drive at m

torque has been checked.

If and when250

about one turn before raising the vehicle with ld result in an accident.

socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or

come loose, it may be possible to release it by

panner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the

are not to slip.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 250 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Loosening and tightening the wheel bolts

The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle.

Loosening

Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt 5).

Grip the box spanner as close to the end as possible and turn the

wheel bolts about one turn anti-clockwise fig. 181 -arrow-.

Tightening

Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt5).

Grip the box spanner as close to the end as possible and tighten

the bolt firmly by turning clockwise.

WARNING

Loosen the wheel bolts only the jack. Failure to do so cou

Note Do not use the hexagonal

tighten the wheel bolts.

If the wheel bolt does not

pushing down the end of the s

vehicle for support and take c

5) An adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts* page 252.

Fig. 181 Changing the wheel: Loosen the wheel bolts

If and when 251

Safety fir Technical data

ck under the door sill at the jacking point ing changed fig. 182 -arrows-.

the jacking point until the claw of the jack

rtical rib under the door sill.

he arm of the jack fits on the rib under the

and the movable base plate of the jack

d.

the defective wheel is just clear of the

r of the door sills mark the jacking points

only one jacking point for each wheel. Do not fit

points to the wheel arches is approximately 15

the rear.

e jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.

tted on solid ground offering good support. Use

ary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as tiles)

prevent the jack from slipping.

at the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to dent.

ged if the jack is not applied at the correct a risk of injury since the jack can slip off engaged.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 251 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Raising the vehicle

In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with

a jack.

Position the vehicle ja

closest to the wheel be

Wind up the jack under

is directly below the ve

Align the jack so that t

door sill fig. 183

is flat on the groun

Raise the vehicle until

ground.

Recesses at the front and rea

fig. 182 -arrows-. There is

the jack anywhere else.

The distance from the jacking

cm at the front and 25 cm at

An unstable surface under th

Therefore, the jack must be fi

a large, stable base if necess

use a rubber mat or similar to

WARNING

Take all precautions so th do so could result in an acci

The vehicle can be dama jacking points. There is also suddenly if it is not properly

Fig. 182 Changing the wheel: Jack position points

Fig. 183 Changing the wheel: Jack

AA

AB

If and when252

an and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare

ition and hub mounting surfaces. These

fitting the wheel.

crewdriver handle makes it easier to turn the

rewdriver blade should be removed when the

n of rotation are fitted, note the direction of

ket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or

uired to turn the anti-theft wheel

Fig. 185 Anti-theft wheel bolt

Exeo_EN.book Seite 252 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Removing and fitting the wheel

For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be

completed.

After loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack,

change the wheel as described below:

Removing a wheel

Unscrew the bolts using the hexagonal tool in the handle of the

screwdriver (vehicle tool) and place them on a clean surface

fig. 184.

Fitting a wheel

Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the

hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle.

The wheel bolts should be cle

wheel, inspect the wheel cond

surfaces must be clean before

The hexagonal socket in the s

wheel bolts. The reversible sc

tool is used for this purpose.

If tyres with a specific directio

rotation.

Note Do not use the hexagonal soc

tighten the wheel bolts.

Anti-theft wheel bolts

A special adapter is req

bolts.

Fig. 184 Changing the wheel: Hexagonal socket in screwdriver handle to turn the wheel bolts

If and when 253

Safety fir Technical data

-Mobility-System)

d safety notes

suitable for temporary use over a

a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.

will find the TMS, which consists of a sealing

, located under the floor panel in the luggage

l reliably seal tyres damaged by foreign bodies,

ctures are no larger than approx. 4 mm in diam-

the foreign body from the tyre.

Fig. 186 The Tyre Mobility System is not suitable for repairing this type of damage to tyres.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 253 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it

will go page 252, fig. 185.

Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.

Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.

Error code

The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part of

the adaptor.

The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by

using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an

Authorised Service Centre.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that they

rotate in the correct direction.

A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that

point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi-

cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give

maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.

If, in an emergency, you have to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong

direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum

performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet roads.

To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the

defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again

rotate in the correct direction.

Tyre repair* (Tyre

General information an

Repaired tyres are only

short period.

Your vehicle is equipped with

In the event of a puncture you

compound and a compressor

compartment.

The Tyre Mobility System wil

provided that the cuts or pun

eter.

It is not necessary to remove

If and when254

t with the sealant immediately rinse the eyes ater.

tely if it becomes soiled with the tyre sealant.

athe in the fumes!

accidentally ingested, immediately rinse the lots of water.

. Seek medical assistance if needed.

hould occur get medical help immediately.

m children.

vironment und can be returned to the Technical Service

leave it to dry. When it has dried, you can pull

ated on the sealing compound can. Have the

by a qualified workshop.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 254 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

The sealing compound must not be used in the following cases:

On cuts and punctures larger than 4 mm page 253, fig. 186

if the wheel rim has been damaged

if you have been driving with very low pressure or a completely flat tyre

How to use the TMS (tyre mobility system) is described in the section

Repairing a tyre page 255 and in the instructions supplied with the tyre

sealant can.

The TMS (tyre mobility system) can be used at outside temperatures down to

-20C.

WARNING

After repairing a tyre please note the following points:

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h.

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.

Vehicle handling could be impaired.

Tyres which have been sealed using the Tyre Mobility System are only suitable for temporary use over a short period.

After using the tyre sealant the tyre pressure monitoring system* may malfunction. Therefore, please drive carefully to the next available quali- fied workshop.

The Tyre Mobility System must NOT be used,

on cuts and punctures larger than 4 mm

if the wheel rim has been damaged

if you have been driving with very low pressure or a completely flat tyre

Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible with the sealing compound.

Do not allow the sealant to come into contact with your eyes, skin or clothing.

If you do come into contac or skin affected with clean w

Change clothing immedia

Make sure you do not bre

If any of the tyre sealant is mouth thoroughly and drink

Do not induce vomiting

If any allergic reactions s

Keep the sealant away fro

For the sake of the en Used bottles of sealing compo

for disposal.

Note If sealant should leak out,

it off like a piece of foil.

Observe the expiry date st

sealing compound exchanged

A1

A2

A3

WARNING (continued)

If and when 255

Safety fir Technical data

/h adhesive, which is included with the

the instrument panel where the driver will

can well.

ing hose onto the sealant can as far as it

atically pierce the foil sealing the can.

the tyre valve and use the enclosed valve

the valve insert fig. 187.

nto a clean surface.

g from the filling hose and insert the hose

an upside down and fill the complete

o the tyre.

ose and screw the valve insert firmly back

filling hose onto the tyre valve and plug

cigarette lighter.

0 to 2.5 bar and monitor the pressure

gauge.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 255 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Repairing a tyre

Preparations

If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the car as far away from

the flow of traffic as possible.

Apply the handbrake firmly to prevent the vehicle from moving

accidentally on slopes.

Engage 1st gear.

Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility System

page 253.

Ensure that all passengers leave the vehicle and move away from

the danger area .

Take the tyre sealant can and the compressor out of the luggage

compartment.

Stick the max. 80 km

tyre sealant can, onto

see it.

Filling the tyre

Shake the tyre sealant

Screw the enclosed fill

will go. This will autom

Take the valve cap off

insert tool to unscrew

Place the valve insert o

Remove the sealing plu

into the tyre valve.

Hold the tyre sealant c

contents of the can int

Then disconnect the h

into the tyre valve.

Inflating the tyre

Screw the compressor

the connector into the

Pump the tyre up to 2.

shown on the pressure

Fig. 187 Repairing a tyre

If and when256

r for longer than 6 minutes. Otherwise, it might

or has cooled down, you can use it again.

out, leave it to dry and then pull it off like foil.

air remember to buy a new tyre sealant can at

l ensure that the Tyre Mobility System is opera-

rements when doing so.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 256 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

If the tyre pressure remains lower than the value specified above

drive the vehicle approx. 10 metres forwards or backwards, so

that the sealant can spread evenly in the tyre. If the pressure is

still lower than the specification the tyre is too badly damaged

and cannot be repaired using the tyre sealant.

Final check

After about 10 minutes, stop to check the tyre pressure.

If tyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly

damaged. Do not drive on! You should obtain professional

assistance.

WARNING

If you have a puncture in heavy traffic, switch on the hazard warning lights and place the warning triangle in a visible location. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.

Make sure your passengers wait in a safe place (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

Please observe the manufacturers' safety notes on the compressor and the instructions supplied with the tyre sealant can.

If it was not possible to build up a tyre pressure of 2.0 bar within 6 minutes this means that the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive on!

Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible with the sealing compound.

If tyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar after driving about 10 minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive on! Obtain technical assistance.

Caution Take special care if you have to repair a tyre on a slope.

Note Do not use the compresso

overheat. When the compress

If tyre sealant should leak

After carrying out a tyre rep

a qualified workshop. This wil

tive again.

Please observe legal requi

If and when 257

Safety fir Technical data

and its failed electrical component.

using a screwdriver fig. 188.

ponding to the damaged electric

, Fuse assignment.

m inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the

e fuse out.

e (which will have a melted metal strip)

same amp rating.

on.

its are protected by fuses. The fuses are located

d end of the dash panel.

identifying the fuses are provided on the inside

o a crank handle for operating the sunroof* by

fails).

s and never replace them with fuses with a

ly could result in fire. It could also cause

electrical system.

s again after a short time, the electrical system

ed workshop as soon as possible.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 257 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fuses

Changing fuses

If a fuse has blown, it must be replaced.

Switch off the ignition

Remove the fuse cover

Identify the fuse corres

consumer page 258

Take the plastic clip fro

blown fuse, and pull th

Replace the blown fus

with a new fuse of the

Fit the fuse cover back

The individual electrical circu

behind a cover at the left-han

Two spare fuses and a sticker

of the fuse cover. There is als

hand (if the electrical system

Caution Never repair damaged fuse

higher rating. Failure to comp

damage to other parts of the

Note If a newly replaced fuse blow

must be checked by a qualifi

Fig. 188 Left side of dash panel: Fuse box cover

Fig. 189 Schematic drawing of fuse box at the left-hand end of dash panel: Fuses (without fuse cover)

If and when258

senger airbag door 15

15

r convenience equipment 20

30

30

iler (control unit) 30

ump for diesel 20

20

automatic anti-dazzle interior

utomatic gearbox 15

15

20

5

t power point* 20

30

asher and headlight washer 30

t illumination, alarm 15

20

25

Amps

Exeo_EN.book Seite 258 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Fuse assignment

This list shows the fuses which can be replaced relatively

easily by the owner.

No. Consumer Amps

1 Air conditioner 10

2 Footwell lamps 5

3 Heated washer jets 5

4 Radiator fan 5

5 Parking aid, automatic gearbox 10

6 Air conditioner (air purity sensor), pressure sensor 5

7 Electronic Stability Programme (ESP), brake light

switch, clutch pedal switch, steering angle sensor 10

8 Telephone 5

9 Vacant

10 Adaptive headlights (for assistance on bends) right 5

11 Airbag and disconnection of the front passenger air-

bag 5

12 Diagnostic socket 10

13 Steering column unit 10

14 Brake lights 10

15 Instrument panel 10

16 Vacant

17 Tyre pressure control, rain/light sensor 10

18 Adaptive headlights (for assistance on bends) left 5

19 Vacant

20 Vacant

21 Vacant

22 Driver door / front pas

23 Rear doors

24 Central electrics unit fo

25 Heater blower

26 Rear window heater

27 Electrical socket for tra

28 Fuel pump, auxiliary p

29 Vacant

30 Sliding/tilting sunroof

31 Diagnosis connection,

mirror, reverse light, a

32 Towing socket

33 Lighter

34 Lambda probe heating

35 Luggage compartmen

36 Wiper system

37 Pump for windscreen w

system

38 Luggage compartmen

39 Radio, Amplifier

40 Horn

No. Consumer

If and when 259

Safety fir Technical data

bulb page 266

in degree of practical skill to change defective

ar to those bulbs which are only accessible from

at you have defective bulbs changed by a qual-

echanic.

lbs in the engine compartment yourself, be

lved page 223 in Types of bulbs.

alogen headlights

with a bulb of the same type. The name can be

holder.

n working on components in the engine s warm - risk of burns!

Type

hts (halogen) 12 V/55 W (H7 LL)

m headlights 12 V/55 W (H1)

rn signal light 12 V/21 W (PY21W)

Side lights 12 V/5 W (W5W LL)

Exeo_EN.book Seite 259 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain

models or are optional extras.

The electric windows and electric seat adjusters are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automatically after a few seconds when the overload

(caused for example by frozen windows) has been corrected.

Note Please note that the above list contains all data at the time of going to press,

so it is subject to modifications. If discrepancies should occur, please refer to

the sticker on the inside of the fuse cover for the correct information for your

model.

Bulbs

General notes

You can change the following bulbs for exterior lights yourself:

Main headlights: all (except for xenon headlights)

Tail lights: All bulbs

Side turn signal bulb

The following bulbs can only be changed by a qualified workshop:

Main headlights: Xenon*

Front fog lights: Bulb

As a rule, you require a certa

bulbs. This applies in particul

the engine compartment.

If in doubt, we recommend th

ified workshop or qualified m

If you do decide to change bu

aware of the safety risks invo

Changing bulbs. H

Types of bulbs

You must only replace a bulb

found on the base of the bulb

WARNING

Take particular care whe compartment if the engine i

41 230 volt socket 30

42 Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) 25

43 Engine management 15

44 Seat heating 35

No. Consumer Amps

Bulb

Dipped beam headlig

Main bea

Tu

If and when260

t generated by the bulb, be deposited on the

.

moved to gain access to the bulbs for

.

. 190.

ide and take it out.

Fig. 190 Air duct on right side of vehicle

AB

Exeo_EN.book Seite 260 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.

The high voltage element of gas discharge bulbs* (xenon light) must be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.

When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the headlight housing.

Caution Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. If not, a

short circuit could occur.

Switch off the lights or parking lights before you change a bulb.

For the sake of the environment Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the proper

manner.

Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog

lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has

no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on the

lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be

demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.

Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior

lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest

of your own safety, but also in that of all other road users.

Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb.

Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth

or paper towel instead. Otherwise, the fingerprints left on the glass will

vaporise as a result of the hea

reflector and impair its surface

Removing the air duct

The air duct has to be re

the right-side headlight

Unscrew bolts fig

Detach air duct from gu

WARNING (continued)

AA

If and when 261

Safety fir Technical data

s

Fig. 192 Halogen bulbs

Exeo_EN.book Seite 261 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fitting the air duct

Once the bulb(s) for the right-side headlight have been

changed, the air duct must be re-installed.

Place the air duct in the correct position.

First turn the two screws in lightly, then tighten both screws.

Push air duct into guide .

Halogen headlight bulb

Main beam headlights

Side lights

Dipped beam headlights

Side lights

Turn signal light

Fig. 191 Air duct on right side of vehicle

AA

AB

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

If and when262

reviously remove the rigid cover page 264,

bulb changes.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 262 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Changing the turn signal bulb

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front passenger

side is the same as on the driver side.

Switch off the ignition and the lights.

Raise the bonnet.

Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise, pulling it by the grip

fig. 193 and removing the bulb holder and the bulb.

Replace the blown bulb in the bulb holder (press and turn anti-

clockwise to remove) with a new bulb (press and turn clockwise

to insert).

Installation is done in the reverse order.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Note Although it is not necessary, p

fig. 196 for easier turn signal

Fig. 193 Turn signal

If and when 263

Safety fir Technical data

and the lights.

over fig. 194 to remove it.

fig. 195 from the bulb.

. 195 inwards and to the right.

ng it from the connection terminal and

nt so that it sits correctly in the cut-out on

correct lighting, the filament must be

g the bulb, you can check the position of

eadlight glass.

e order, ensuring that the rubber cover is

ng.

bulb is working.

ttings checked as soon as possible.

AA

A1

A2

Exeo_EN.book Seite 263 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Changing the main headlight bulb

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front passenger

side is the same as on the driver side.

Switch off the ignition

Raise the bonnet.

Pull up on the rubber c

Remove the connector

Press the spring fig

Remove the bulb. pulli

fitting fit the replaceme

the reflector. To ensure

vertical. When changin

the bulb through the h

Installation is in revers

well fitted to the housi

Check whether the new

Have the headlight se

Fig. 194 Main beam headlights

Fig. 195 Main beam headlights

If and when264

nd the lights.

96 in the direction of the arrow and

separating the brace side and then

from the other end of the cover.

g. 197 from the bulb.

g fig. 197 pressing inwards to the

the new one in the headlight casing with

g to position it from below.

ng it and pressing it slightly while turning

ure correct lighting, the filament must be

g the bulb, you can check the position of

adlight glass.

to the bulb.

ing the side tabs and then closing the

ake sure that the gasket sits well on the

operation.

bulb is working.

ings checked as soon as possible.

A1

A2

A3

Exeo_EN.book Seite 264 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Changing the dipped beam headlight bulb

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front passenger

side is the same as on the driver side.

Switch off the ignition a

Raise the bonnet.

Move the brace fig. 1

remove the rigid cover,

removing the two tabs

Pull the connector fi

Unclip the retainer sprin

right.

Remove the bulb and fit

the tab upwards, startin

Clip on the spring, raisi

it anti-clockwise. To ens

vertical. When changin

the bulb through the he

Connect the connector

Fit the cover, first insert

cover and the brace. M

casing cover during the

Check whether the new

Have the headlight sett

Fig. 196 Dipped beam headlights

Fig. 197 Dipped beam headlights

If and when 265

Safety fir Technical data

and the lights.

198 in the direction of the arrow and

, separating the brace side and then

from the other end of the cover.

lb holder tabs fig. 199 and pull the

lso be removed by pulling on the bulb

the bulb holder by pulling both pieces

ssing on the bulb holder.

socket and press on the bulb holder. Fit

g the side tabs and then closing the cover

ure that the gasket sits well on the casing

tion.

bulb is working.

A1

Exeo_EN.book Seite 265 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Changing side light bulb (outside of vehicle)

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front passenger

side is the same as on the driver side.

Switch off the ignition

Raise the bonnet.

Move the brace fig.

remove the rigid cover

removing the two tabs

Gently press on the bu

cover upwards (it can a

holder wires).

Separate the bulb from

anti-clockwise.

Fit the new bulb by pre

Insert the bulb into the

the cover, first insertin

and the brace. Make s

cover during the opera

Check whether the new

Fig. 198 Side light bulb (outside of vehicle)

Fig. 199 Side light bulb (outside of vehicle)

If and when266

nd the lights.

00 in the direction of the arrow and

separating the brace side and then

from the other end of the cover.

e bulb holder by pulling on the bulb

the bulb holder by pulling both pieces

sing on the bulb holder.

socket so that the side of the bulb holder

1 and press on it.

ing the side tabs and then closing the

ake sure that the gasket sits well on the

operation.

bulb is working.

i-Xenon AFS headlights

ith a bulb of the same type. The name can be

holder.

A1

Exeo_EN.book Seite 266 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Changing the side light bulb (inside of vehicle)

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front passenger

side is the same as on the driver side.

Switch off the ignition a

Raise the bonnet.

Move the brace fig. 2

remove the rigid cover,

removing the two tabs

Remove the bulb and th

holder wiring.

Separate the bulb from

anti-clockwise.

Fit the new bulb by pres

Insert the bulb into the

grip is vertical fig. 20

Fit the cover, first insert

cover and the brace. M

casing cover during the

Check whether the new

Changing bulbs. B

Types of bulbs

You must only replace a bulb w

found on the base of the bulb

Fig. 200 Side light bulb (inside of vehicle)

Fig. 201 Side lights. Bulb holder grip in vertical position

If and when 267

Safety fir Technical data

e of the lighting system. By switching on the

h the beam of light is projected will quickly be

s may continue to be misted.

tervals that all lighting (especially the exterior

ctioning properly. This is not only in the interest

n that of all other road users.

ake sure you have the correct new bulb.

rt of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth

rwise, the fingerprints left on the glass will

at generated by the bulb, be deposited on the

e.

moved to gain access to the bulbs for

t.

Fig. 202 Air duct on right side of vehicle

Exeo_EN.book Seite 267 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

Take particular care when working on components in the engine compartment if the engine is warm - risk of burns!

Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.

The high voltage element of gas discharge bulbs* (xenon light) must be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.

When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the headlight housing.

Caution Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. If not, a

short circuit could occur.

Switch off the lights or parking lights before you change a bulb.

For the sake of the environment Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the proper

manner.

Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog

lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has

no influence on the useful lif

lights, the area through whic

demisted. However, the edge

Please check at regular in

lighting) on your vehicle is fun

of your own safety, but also i

Before changing a bulb, m

Do not touch the glass pa

or paper towel instead. Othe

vaporise as a result of the he

reflector and impair its surfac

Removing the air duct

The air duct has to be re

the right-side headligh

Bulb Type

Xenon bulbs 12 V/35 W (D1S)

DRL (day light) 12 V/21 W (P21W SLL)

Turn signal light 12 V/21 W (PY21W)

Side lights 12 V/5 W (W5W blue LL)

If and when268

bulbs

beam/main beam)

Fig. 204 Bi-Xenon AFS headlight bulbs

Exeo_EN.book Seite 268 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Unscrew bolts page 267, fig. 202.

Detach air duct from guide and take it out.

Fitting the air duct

Once the bulb(s) for the right-side headlight have been

changed, the air duct must be re-installed.

Place the air duct in the correct position.

First turn the two screws in lightly, then tighten both screws.

Push air duct into guide .

Bi-Xenon AFS headlight

Turn signal light

Xenon headlight (dipped

Side lights

DRL light (day light)

AA

AB

Fig. 203 Air duct on right side of vehicle

AA

AB

AA

AB

AC

AD

If and when 269

Safety fir Technical data

previously remove the rigid cover page 271,

ulb changes.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 269 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Changing the DRL light bulb (day light)

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front passenger

side is the same as on the driver side.

Switch off the ignition and the lights.

Raise the bonnet.

Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise, pulling it by the grip

fig. 205 and removing the bulb holder and the bulb.

Replace the blown bulb in the bulb holder (press and turn anti-

clockwise to remove) with a new bulb (press and turn clockwise

to insert).

Installation is done in the reverse order.

Note Although it is not necessary,

fig. 208 for easier day light b

Fig. 205 DRL light (day light)

If and when270

nd the lights.

ig. 206 to remove it.

r by pulling on the grip and turning it anti-

in the bulb holder (press and turn anti-

ith a new bulb (press and turn clockwise

to the socket with the tab facing upwards

. Press it against the socket and turn

ing the bulb, you can check the position

headlight glass.

ghten, making sure it fit properly into the

bulb is working.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 270 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Changing the turn signal bulb

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front passenger

side is the same as on the driver side.

Switch off the ignition a

Raise the bonnet.

Pull the rubber cap f

Remove the bulb holde

clockwise fig. 207.

Replace the blown bulb

clockwise to remove) w

to insert).

Insert the bulb holder in

and the grip horizontal

clockwise. When chang

of the bulb through the

Fit the rubber cap and ti

headlight casing.

Check whether the new

Fig. 206 Turn signal

Fig. 207 Turn signal

If and when 271

Safety fir Technical data

and the lights.

208 in the direction of the arrow and

, separating the brace side and then

from the other end of the cover.

r by pulling on the grip fig. 209 (it can

lling on the bulb holder wires).

the bulb holder by pulling both pieces

ssing on the bulb holder.

socket and press on the bulb holder grip.

ting the side tabs and then closing the

ake sure that the gasket sits well on the

e operation.

bulb is working.

lb

e bulbs on the front passenger side is the same

changed at a qualified workshop.

A1

Exeo_EN.book Seite 271 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Changing the side light bulb

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front passenger

side is the same as on the driver side.

Switch off the ignition

Raise the bonnet.

Move the brace fig.

remove the rigid cover

removing the two tabs

Remove the bulb holde

also be removed by pu

Separate the bulb from

anti-clockwise.

Fit the new bulb by pre

Insert the bulb into the

Fit the cover, first inser

cover and the brace. M

casing cover during th

Check whether the new

Changing the xenon bu

The procedure for changing th

as on the driver side.

WARNING

This type of bulb should be

Fig. 208 Side light

Fig. 209 Side light

If and when272

LED lamps

e the turn signal light.

brake light or side light lights up (LED lamp),

be replaced.

nly displayed when the LED function goes out

D will stop working, without displaying the

ues to be effective.

Fig. 211 Overview of tail lights

Exeo_EN.book Seite 272 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Replacing rear bulbs (in side panel)

Overview of tail lights

Tail lights in side panel

Brake light and side light

Side lights

Turn signal light

Overview of tail lights.

Tail lights in side panel

Brake light and side light

Side lights

Turn signal light

Note It is only possible to chang

If the warning lamp for the

the tail light assembly should

The failure of the lamp is o

completely. Sometimes, an LE

warning as the function contin

Fig. 210 Overview of tail lights

If and when 273

Safety fir Technical data

is used to secure and guide the tail light.

lbs is defective.

ut of the vehicle's tool kit page 246.

of the reversible screwdriver insert.

t the slot with the screwdriver fig. 212

loosen the screw (arrow) located

light out of the housing ( fig. 213 posi-

ulling alternately in positions and .

r page 274.

tail light to make sure there is no damage to the

nents.

th ready to place under the glass on the tail

A2

A1 A2

Exeo_EN.book Seite 273 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Removing tail light

To change the bulbs you must remove the tail light assembly.

Removing the light requires a certain degree of practical skill.

A special retaining screw

Check which of the bu

Open the rear lid.

Take the screwdriver o

Use the flat-blade side

Prise open the cover a

.

Use the screwdriver to

behind the cover.

Gradually ease the tail

tions and ) by p

Remove the bulb holde

Caution Take care when removing the

paintwork or any of its compo

Note Make sure you have a soft clo

light, to avoid any scratches.

Fig. 212 Luggage compartment: Location of the bolt securing the tail light unit

Fig. 213 Removing tail light from side panel

A1

A3 A4

If and when274

d easily in the bulb holder.

a bayonet fastener. The table below

ulb positions.

ive bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it

t.

ng it into the bulb holder and turn it to the

ny fingerprints from the glass part of the

bulb is working.

er page 275.

Fig. 215 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder. Example: Left tail light in side panel

Exeo_EN.book Seite 274 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Remove the bulb holder

When changing a bulb, you must first remove the bulb holder.

There are three securing tabs on the inside of the tail light.

Release the retaining tabs fig. 214 .

Take out the bulb holder.

Change the defective bulb page 274 page 275.

WARNING

If a bulb is replaced in a tail light assembly with LED, do not pull too hard on the bulb holder to avoid damaging the wiring of the LED module.

Changing bulbs

All bulbs can be change

The bulbs are secured with

gives an overview of the b

Lightly press the defect

to the left and remove i

Fit the new bulb, pressi

right as far as it will go.

Use a cloth to remove a

bulb.

Check whether the new

Re-install the bulb hold

Fig. 214 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail light

AA

If and when 275

Safety fir Technical data

ing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the

.

any fingerprints from the glass part of the

bulb is working.

der page 275.

ge the turn signal light.

ide lights with LEDs have to be replaced, the tail

to fit.

er on the tail light and align it so that it is

nto the tail light until it engages.

unit page 276.

ulb function

urn signal light

Exeo_EN.book Seite 275 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Position of the bulbs

Changing bulbs. LED lamps

All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.

The bulb is secured with a bayonet fastener. The table below gives

an overview of the bulb positions.

Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it

to the left and remove it.

Fit the new bulb, press

right as far as it will go

Use a cloth to remove

bulb.

Check whether the new

Re-install the bulb hol

Position of the bulbs

Note It is only possible to chan

If the brake light and/or s

light must be replaced.

Fitting the bulb holder

The bulb holder is easy

Position the bulb hold

securely seated.

Press the bulb holder i

Re-install the tail light

Pos. page 274,

fig. 215

Bulb function

A Brake lights and tail lights

B Side lights

C Turn signal light

Fig. 216 Position of the bulb on the bulb holder. Example: Left tail light in side panel

Pos. fig. 216 B

A T

If and when276

unit in fig. 217 arrow in the

ht unit against the housing, first in posi-

ition , until that the clips engage firmly

s.

o the front side of the tail light unit and

driver, from the luggage compartment

t sideways to ensure it is correctly fitted.

the interior trim.

k into the tool kit.

s for the tail lights are working.

light unit to make sure there is no damage to

ponents.

A1

A3

Exeo_EN.book Seite 276 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Fitting the tail light unit

The tail light unit is easy to fit.

First place the tail light

housing.

Gently press the tail lig

tion and then in pos

in the rubber mounting

Apply gentle pressure t

secure using the screw

fig. 218 .

Try to move the tail ligh

Replace the cover in

Put the screwdriver bac

Make sure that all bulb

Caution Take care when fitting the tail

the paintwork or any of its com

Fig. 217 Fitting the tail light unit

Fig. 218 Luggage compartment: Location of the bolt securing the tail light unit

A2

A1

A2

If and when 277

Safety fir Technical data

LED lamps

ge the reverse light.

e side light and/or rear fog light (LED lights)

bly should be replaced.

only displayed when the LED function goes out

ED will stop working, without displaying the

inues to be effective.

Fig. 220 Overview of tail lights

Exeo_EN.book Seite 277 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Changing tail light bulbs (on rear lid)

Overview of tail lights

Tail lights on the rear lid

Side lights

Rear fog light

Reverse light

Overview of tail lights.

Tail lights on the rear lid

Side lights

Rear fog light

Reverse light

Note It is only possible to chan

If the warning lamp for th

turns on, the tail light assem

The failure of the lamp is

completely. Sometimes, an L

warning as the function cont

Fig. 219 Overview of tail lights

If and when278

lder for the inner tail lights via the inside

s is defective.

t of the vehicle's tool kit page 246.

to the opening in the cover from the top

the cover.

fig. 222 in the direction of the arrows

lder by pulling in the direction of the

age 279.

ight assembly with LED, do not pull too hard amaging the wiring of the LED module.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 278 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Remove the bulb holder

The rear lid must be open to change the bulbs.

You can access the bulb ho

of the rear lid.

Check which of the bulb

Take the screwdriver ou

Insert the screwdriver in

fig. 221 and detach

Press on the tabs and remove the bulb ho

arrow .

Change the bulbs p

WARNING

If a bulb is replaced in a tail l on the bulb holder to avoid d

Fig. 221 Remove the cover in the rear lid

Fig. 222 Remove the bulb holder

AA

AB

If and when 279

Safety fir Technical data

mps

ed easily in the bulb holder.

bayonet fastening. The table below gives

ositions.

tive bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it

it.

ulb function

everse light

ail light and

ar fog light

Fig. 224 Position of the bulb on the bulb holder. Example: Tail lights on the rear lid

Exeo_EN.book Seite 279 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Changing bulbs

All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.

The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fastener. The table below

gives an overview of the bulb positions.

Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it

to the left and remove it.

Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the

right as far as it will go.

Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the

bulb.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Re-install the bulb holder page 280.

Position of the bulbs

Changing bulbs. LED la

All bulbs can be chang

The bulb is secured with a

an overview of the bulb p

Lightly press the defec

to the left and remove

Fig. 223 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder. Example: Tail lights on the rear lid

Pos. fig. 223 B

A R

B T

re

If and when280

the left or to the right to remove the bulb.

r from the turn signal.

bulb and replace with a new bulb.

n the turn signal guide until it clicks into

al in the opening in the bodywork, fixing

ow .

n by the arrow fig. 225.

Fig. 225 Side turn signal

A1

A2

Exeo_EN.book Seite 280 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the

right as far as it will go.

Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the

bulb.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Re-install the bulb holder page 280.

Position of the bulbs

Fitting the bulb holder

The bulb holder is easy to fit.

Check that the seal is seated correctly on the bulb holder.

Position the bulb holder on the tail light and align it so that it is

securely seated.

Press the bulb holder into the tail light until it engages.

Fit the cover back in the interior trim so that it engages.

Put the screwdriver back into the tool kit.

Make sure that all bulbs for the tail lights are working.

Side turn signals

Press the turn signal to

Remove the bulb holde

Remove the failed glass

Insert the bulb holder i

place.

First place the turn sign

the tabs fig. 225, arr

Insert the bulb as show

Pos. page 279,

fig. 224

Bulb function

A Reverse light

If and when 281

Safety fir Technical data

cover and remove the bulb from the

Exeo_EN.book Seite 281 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Luggage compartment lights

Remove the tulip-shaped fitting by pressing on its inside edge

using the flat side of a screwdriver.

Remove the protective

housing fig. 227.

Fig. 226 Luggage compartment light

Fig. 227 Luggage compartment light

If and when282

ng it in the direction of the arrow and

he reverse order.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 282 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Registration light

To remove the light cover, unscrew the bolts fig. 228.

Remove the bulb, movi

outwards fig. 229.

Installation is done in t

Fig. 228 Number plate light

Fig. 229 Number plate light

If and when 283

Safety fir Technical data

move the protective cover.

ing it in the direction of the arrow and

ve a sufficient wire cross section.

ause of a discharged battery, the battery can be

nother vehicle to start the engine.

standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's docu-

ction must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines

l engines.

ch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as

s are connected.

ust be properly connected to the vehicle elec-

Exeo_EN.book Seite 283 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Sun visor light

Remove the bulb carefully, using the screwdriver on its flat side

fig. 230.

Use a screwdriver to re

Remove the bulb, mov

outwards fig. 231.

Jump-starting

Jump leads

The jump lead must ha

If the engine fails to start bec

connected to the battery of a

Jump leads

Jump leads must comply with

mentation). The wire cross se

and at least 35 mm2 for diese

Note The vehicles must not tou

soon as the positive terminal

The discharged battery m

trical system.

Fig. 230 Removing sun visor light

Fig. 231 Removing sun visor light

If and when284

f the black jump lead to a solid metal

lted on to the engine block, or onto the

e vehicle with the flat battery. Do not

ar the battery .

ch a way that they cannot come into

g parts in the engine compartment.

vehicle with the boosting battery and let

car with the flat battery and wait one or

ngine is running.

jump leads, switch off the headlights (if

er and heated rear window in the vehicle

s helps minimise voltage peaks which are

ds are disconnected.

ning, disconnect the leads in reverse

n above.

they have good metal-to-metal contact with

tch off the starter after about 10 seconds and

nute.

AX

Exeo_EN.book Seite 284 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

How to jump start: description

fig. 232 shows the flat battery and the charged battery.

Jump lead terminal connections

Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .

1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive fig. 232

terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery .

2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive

terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal

on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.

4. Connect the other end o

component which is bo

engine block itself of th

connect it to a point ne

5. Position the leads in su

contact with any movin

Starting

6. Start the engine of the

it run at idling speed.

7. Start the engine of the

two minutes until the e

Removing the jump leads

8. Before you remove the

they are switched on).

9. Turn on the heater blow

with the flat battery. Thi

generated when the lea

10. When the engine is run

order to the details give

Connect the battery clamps so

the battery terminals.

If the engine fails to start, swi

try again after about half a mi

Fig. 232 How to connect the jump leads

AA AB

A+

A+

A-

If and when 285

Safety fir Technical data

Exeo_EN.book Seite 285 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 223.

The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.

Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.

Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.

Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.

The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.

Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as

soon as the positive terminals are connected.

If and when286

ng points if you use a tow-rope:

towing vehicle

il the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate

s cautiously. If you are driving an auto-

e gently.

ke servo and power steering are not

ou are towing. Brake earlier than you

h a more gentle pressure on the brake.

towed vehicle

e remains taut at all times when towing.

ehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a

tow-bar.

elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.

e made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic

-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a

nce, especially when using a tow-rope. Both

the technique required for towing. Inexperi-

pt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 286 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Towing and tow-starting

Tow-starting

The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.

We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting

is preferable page 283.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:

Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.

Keep the clutch pressed down.

Switch the ignition on.

Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.

As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear

lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing

vehicle.

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.

Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Comments

Please observe the followi

Notes for the driver of the

Drive slowly at first unt

gradually.

Begin and change gear

matic vehicle, accelerat

Remember that the bra

working in the vehicle y

would normally, but wit

Notes for the driver of the

Ensure that the tow-rop

Tow-rope or tow-bar

It is easier and safer to tow a v

tow-rope if you do not have a

A tow-rope should be slightly

It is advisable to use a tow-rop

material.

Attach the tow-rope or the tow

towing bracket.

Driving style

Towing requires some experie

drivers should be familiar with

enced drivers should not attem

If and when 287

Safety fir Technical data

ed when the vehicle has no electrical power. The

ith the front wheels raised. Towing should be

son.

ays be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the

rting.

om the on-board tool set.

r by pressing down on the right hand side.

to the left, in the direction of the arrow

Fig. 233 Fitting the towing eye to front rear of the vehicle

Exeo_EN.book Seite 287 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the

tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-

loading and damaging the anchorage points.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the

steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,

horn, windscreen wipers and washers.

As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply

considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.

As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you

will need more strength to steer than you normally would.

Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox

Put the selector lever into position N.

Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.

Do not tow further than 50 km.

If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front

wheels raised.

Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.

Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe

any regulations to the contrary.

For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be

tow-started.

If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,

you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.

If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels should

be raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified

person.

The steering wheel is lock

vehicle must then be towed w

carried out by a qualified per

The towing eye should alw

notes page 286, Tow-sta

Front towing eye

Fitting the towing eye

Take the towing ring fr

Remove the front cove

Bolt the eye to its limit

fig. 233.

If and when288

Exeo_EN.book Seite 288 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Rear towing eye

There is a towing eye at the rear on the right below the rear bumper.

General notes on the technical data 289

Safety fir s Technical data

tions used in the Technical Data section

a- Meaning

Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

Pferdestrke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine

power.

Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

m Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.

Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km travelled.

Carbon dioxide

Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.

Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance

of petrol.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 289 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tip

Technical data

General notes on the technical data

Outstanding information

Important considerations

All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence

over this data.

All data provided in this manual are valid for the standard model in Spain. The

vehicle data card included in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle

registration documents shows which engine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different depending on if additional equipment is fitted,

for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.

Abbrevia

Abbrevi tion

kW

PS

rpm

Nm

l/100 k

g/km

CO2

CN

RON

General notes on the technical data290

he inside of the spare wheel recess in the

rovided on the vehicle data sticker: fig. 234.

in the Maintenance Programme.

r

ber (chassis number)

ne power output

letters

ior trim code

s

ided in the Maintenance Programme.

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) urban

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) motorway

/ CO2 Emissions (g/km) mixed

Exeo_EN.book Seite 290 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Vehicle identification data

The most important data are given on the identification plate

and the vehicle data sticker.

Vehicles for certain export countries do not have an identification plate.

Identification plate

The identification plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compart-

ment.

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside

the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-

hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located

on the right hand side of the engine compartment.

Vehicle data

The data sticker is placed on t

luggage compartment.

The following information is p

These data are also provided

Production control numbe

Vehicle identification num

Model code number

Model designation / engi

Engine and gearbox code

Paintwork number / inter

Optional equipment code

Consumption values

CO2 emissions values

Data from 2 to 9 are also prov

Consumption figures and CO2

Consumption (litres/100

Consumption (litres/100

Consumption (l/100 km)

Fig. 234 Vehicle data sticker (luggage compart- ment)

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

General notes on the technical data 291

Safety fir Technical data

vary from quoted test values, depending on

nd traffic conditions, the weather and the

ic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity

he figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the

onal equipment fittings or for the addition of

e vehicle will increase .

tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- eed and driving style to suit road conditions

xle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight ad or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the

vehicle may change, leading to accidents, ehicle.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 291 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Data on fuel consumption

Fuel consumption

The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle

data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.

The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of the vehicle can be found on the

vehicle data sticker.

The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the vehicle

weight category, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox

combination and the equipment fitted.

The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the

EC test requirements 1999/100/EC. These test requirements specify a real-

istic test method based on normal everyday driving.

The following test conditions are applied:

Note Actual consumption may

personal driving style, road a

vehicle condition.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the bas

and without optional extras. T

weight of the driver.

For special versions and opti

accessories, the weight of th

WARNING

Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Always adjust your sp and requirements.

Never exceed the gross a rating. If the allowed axle lo driving characteristics of the injuries and damage to the v

Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving

is then simulated.

Extra urban

cycle

In the extra urban cycle simulation the vehicle frequently

accelerates and brakes in all gears, as in normal everyday

driving. The road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.

Total con-

sumption

The average total consumption is calculated with a weighting

of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra

urban cycle.

CO2 emis-

sions

The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to

calculate carbon dioxide emissions. The gas composition is

then analysed to evaluate the CO2 content and other emis-

sions.

General notes on the technical data292

ins, wheel bolts

ure values can be found on the inside of the

lues given there are for cold tyres. The slightly

s must not be reduced.

ly to the front wheels.

of this manual.

nged, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

possible with a torque wrench . The tight-

y wheels is 120 Nm.

least once per month. Checking tyre pressure tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is

ents, particularly at high speeds.

bolts is too low, they could loosen while the ccident! If the tightening torque is too high,

can be damaged.

our Authorised Service Centre for information

and snow chain size.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 292 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Towing a trailer

Trailer weights

Trailer weight

The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive

trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are

valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain

circumstances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other coun-

tries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these

data .

Drawbar load

The maximum permitted weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint

of the towing bracket must not exceed 75 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow

approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the

road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,

empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a

wheelbase of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a

legal stipulation for a drawbar load.

WARNING

For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h limit. This is also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.

Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Wheels

Tyre pressure, snow cha

Tyre pressures

The sticker with the tyre press

tank flap. The tyre pressure va

raised pressures of warm tyre

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted on

Consult the chapter wheels

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been cha

should be checked as soon as

ening torque for steel and allo

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at value is very important. If the an increased danger of accid

If the torque of the wheel vehicle is in motion. Risk of a the wheel bolts and threads

Note We recommend that you ask y

about appropriate wheel, tyre

Technical data 293

Safety fir Technical data

ttery

filler cap

reservoir

dipstick.

pansion tank

n washer fluid container

fluid reservoir for power steering

nd refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components

ve. These operations are described in the page 223.

rther explanations, instructions and restrictions on the tech-

f page 289.

arts may vary depending on the engine.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 293 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Technical data

Checking fluid levels

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the

vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids,

otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.

Fig. 235 Diagram for the location of the various elements

Vehicle ba

Engine oil

Brake fluid

Engine oil

Coolant ex

Windscree

Hydraulic

The checking a

mentioned abo

Overview

You will find fu

nical data as o

Note The layout of p

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

Technical data294

91 RONb)

Exeo_EN.book Seite 294 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 PS)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weight

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 75 (102) / 5600

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 148 / 3800

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1595

Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Normal

a) Research-Octane-Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss.

Maximum speed in km/h 190

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,6

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1870

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1385

Gross front axle weight in kg 990

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1010

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 690

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1400

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200

Technical data 295

Safety fir Technical data

91 RONb)

Exeo_EN.book Seite 295 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 PS)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.6 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 118 (160) / 4500-6200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250 / 1500-4500

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1798

Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Super

a) Research-Octane-Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss.

Maximum speed in km/h 225

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,6

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1980

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1495

Gross front axle weight in kg 1075

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Technical data296

5 RONb)

Exeo_EN.book Seite 296 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 2.0 147 kW (200 PS) Automatic

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Trailer without brakes 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 147 (200) / 5100

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280 / 1800

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1984

Fuel Super 98 RONa)/Super 9

a) Research-Octane-Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss.

Maximum speed in km/h 235

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,3

Technical data 297

Safety fir Technical data

91 RONb)

Exeo_EN.book Seite 297 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Weights

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (210 PS)

Engine specifications

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2015

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1530

Gross front axle weight in kg 1120

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1700

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1500

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 155 (210) / 4600-6000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320 / 1500-4600

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1984

Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Super

a) Research-Octane-Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss.

Technical data298

Exeo_EN.book Seite 298 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Maximum speed in km/h 244

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,1

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1990

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1505

Gross front axle weight in kg 1090

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1700

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1500

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres

Technical data 299

Safety fir Technical data

Exeo_EN.book Seite 299 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Diesel engine 2.0 88 kW (120 PS) CR

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weight

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 88 (120) / 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 290 / 1750-2500

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1968

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Maximum speed in km/h 204

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,5

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1990

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1505

Gross front axle weight in kg 1100

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1015

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300

Technical data300

Exeo_EN.book Seite 300 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 2.0 105 kW (143 PS)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 105 (143) / 4200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320 / 1750-2500

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1968

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Maximum speed in km/h 215

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,2

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1990

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1505

Gross front axle weight in kg 1100

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1015

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Technical data 301

Safety fir Technical data

Exeo_EN.book Seite 301 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 2.0 125 kW (170 PS)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1800

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 125 (170) / 4200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350 / 1750-2500

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1968

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Maximum speed in km/h 229

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,4

Technical data302

Exeo_EN.book Seite 302 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Weights

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2015

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1530

Gross front axle weight in kg 1115

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1800

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1600

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Technical data 303

Safety fir Technical data

m

Rear

1,523 mm

Exeo_EN.book Seite 303 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Dimensions and capacities

Dimensions

Length, width 4,661 mm/ 1,772 m

Height at kerb weight 1,430 mm

Front and rear projection 976 mm/ 1,043 mm

Wheelbase 2,642 mm

Turning circle 11.2 m

Track widtha)

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

Front

1,522 mm

Capacities

Fuel tank 70 l. Reserve 10 l.

Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 4.8 l.

Tyre pressure

Summer-grade tyres:

The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.

Winter tyres:

The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.

Exeo_EN.book Seite 304 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Index 305

omatic gearbox

Dynamic gear control programme . . . . . . . 181

Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Paddle levers (tiptronic mode) . . . . . . . . . . 183

Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . 166

Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Steering wheel with paddle levers . . . . . . . 183

tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 182

omatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

kground lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

tery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Long periods of non-use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 234

Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 234

cle rack

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

iesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

iesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Exeo_EN.book Seite 305 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Index

230 V socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

A Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Air conditioner

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Air purity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Air recirculation (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

ECON Mode (economy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Economical use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Solar-powered blower/sunroof . . . . . . . . . . 164

Temperature selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Air duct

Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 268

Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 267

Air purity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Airbag

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Alternator

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Anti-lock brake system

How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Anti-puncture tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Armrest

Storage compartment in front armrest . . . . 141

Armrests

Adjusting the front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Ashtray

Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Athermic windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Aut

Aut

B Bac

Bat

Bicy

Biod

Biod

Index306

rette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

ning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

ning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

ning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

ning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

ning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

k, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

verview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

partments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

the door trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

the front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

ing system

oolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

alfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

ct adjustment of front seat head restraints . .

13

ct adjustment of rear seat head restraints

-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14

ct sitting position

ront passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

e control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

e control system

djust stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

isabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

isabling temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

etting speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Exeo_EN.book Seite 306 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Brake light

Failure control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Brake system

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Worn brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Bulb change

general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

C Car keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Sunroof: opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . 112

Central locking system

Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Locking and unlocking the vehicle from inside

100

Opening and closing the windows . . . . . . 110

Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Security central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Switch on the driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Changing the main headlight bulb

Main headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Changing the main headlight bulbs

Dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Changing the tail lights

Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 231

Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Child safety seat

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Child seats

on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Childproof lock

Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Ciga

Clea

Clea

Clea

Clea

Clea

Cloc

Cloth

Coat

Cock

O

Com

In

In

Cool

C

M

Corre

Corre

In

Corre

F

In

Cruis

Cruis

A

D

D

S

Index 307

ing

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Economically / Environmentally friendly . . 194

ing abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

ing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

See Dynamic gear control programme . . . . 181

amic gear control programme . . . . . . . . . . 181

nomical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

tric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Possible malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Switch on font passenger airbag door . . . . 109

Switch on rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Switches in the driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

trical power point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

trical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

tronic differential lock

How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

tronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

tronic stabilisation programme

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

tronic Stability Programme

How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Exeo_EN.book Seite 307 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger

seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Data entry control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Date display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Diesel engine

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

DIS

Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Driving time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Instantaneous fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . 85

Disabling front passenger airbag

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Disabling the airbag

Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Disposal

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Distance covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Door catch/ rear lid warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Doors

Childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Locking the doors manually if the central lock-

ing fails to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Driver

See Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

CD, radio and telephone display . . . . . . . . . 72

Door catch/ rear lid warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Handbrake warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Red symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Yellow symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Driver seat

With memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

driver seat

Assigning the key to the seat . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Enabling stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Driv

Driv

Driv

DRP

Dyn

E Eco

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Index308

ral overview of the engine compartment 293

e compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

ight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

rd warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

restraint

ear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

restraints

ront seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

ear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

emoving and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

ynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

aulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

lights

daptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

utomatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . 116

utomatic headlight control photosensors 116

oming home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

ront fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

eadlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

eadlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

eaving home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

ed

eats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Exeo_EN.book Seite 308 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Emergencies

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Disconnecting the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 251

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Engine

Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Engine compartment

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Oil pressure too low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Oil sensor defective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Engine speed governing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Environmental tip

Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 194

ESP

See Electronic Stability Programme . . . . . . 165

Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

F Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Filling the tank

Releasing the tank flap manually . . . . . . . 220

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Front drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 44

Fuel

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Fuel level low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Instantaneous fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . 85

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Fuel range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 85

Fuel tank

opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Fuel: save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Fuse

Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

G Gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Gear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Gene

Glov

L

GRA

H Hand

Haza

Head

R

Head

F

R

R

Head

D

F

Head

A

A

A

C

D

F

H

H

L

Heat

S

Index 309

id coolant

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Liquid coolant additive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

d compartment in the luggage compartment

See Loading the luggage compartment . . . . 16

ding the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 16

king the doors manually if the central locking

fails to work

Locking the doors manually if the central lock-

ing fails to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

ks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

g periods of non-use

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

gage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Ski bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

See also Loading the luggage compartment 16

gage rack

See Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

n beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 122

ntenance

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

ntenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

ual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Exeo_EN.book Seite 309 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Heated seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Ignition key

Safety interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Indicator lamps

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Indicator lamps - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Instruments

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 119

Interior lights

Background lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Interior mirror

With manual anti-dazzle setting . . . . . . . . . 130

Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Intermittent wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 251

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

K Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Air conditioner settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Settings for the driver seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

L Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Light sensor faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 119

Lights

Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Automatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Dipped beam headlights faulty . . . . . . . . . . 82

Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . 120

Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Reverse lights faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Xenon lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Liqu

Loa

Loa

Loc

Loc

Lon

Lug

Lug

M Mai

Mai

Mai

Man

Index310

ator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

o display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

sensor faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

ing lights

ront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

ear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

drinks holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

lid

entral locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

ight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

side window sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

view mirrors

nti-dazzle interior mirror with automatic

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

nti-dazzle setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

terior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

window sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

elling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

stration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

ote control key

dicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

ocking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

ocking and unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . 105

eplacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

ote control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

e-synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

oving and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Exeo_EN.book Seite 310 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Manual operation

Closing the sunroof manually . . . . . . . . . . 113

Fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Mirrors

Automatic exterior mirror adjustment . . . . 137

Enabling stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Heated exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Mobile phones and radiotelephones . . . . . . . 218

multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Driving with multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

N Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

O Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Oil level

Check level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Override function

Sunroof override function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Overview

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

P Paddle levers

tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Paintwork

Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Parking aid

SEAT Parking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

SEAT Parking System plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Passenger

See Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . 11, 12

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 19

Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 208

Q Quartz clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

R Radi

Radi

Rain

Rain

Read

F

R

Rear

Rear

Rear

C

L

Rear

Rear

A

A

In

Rear

Refu

Regi

Rem

In

L

L

R

Rem

R

Rem

Index 311

Moving the seat forwards and backwards . 133

Seat height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

ctor lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

ice indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

otronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

ing position

Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

ing position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

ing/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Automatic close function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Override function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

w chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 292

r-powered blower/sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

re keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

re parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

re wheel

Steel rim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

ed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 82

ed warning function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

edometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Exeo_EN.book Seite 311 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Repairs

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Replacing rear bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Reverse gear

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Running in

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

S SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Aspects to take into account . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safety instructions

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Safety notes

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 45

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Seat adjustment

Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Seat belt position

Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Seat belt tensioner

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 68

Seat belts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Seats

Electric adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Electric backrest adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Manual adjustment of lumbar support . . . 134

Manual backrest angle adjustment . . . . . . 134

Sele

Serv

Serv

Side

Side

Sitt

Sitt

Ski

Slid

Sno

Sola

Spa

Spa

Spa

Spe

Spe

Spe

Index312

service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 237

rbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

cle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

cle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

cle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

cle Maintenance

xterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

cle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

cle paintwork

aintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

roducts for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 208

cle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

ilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

ing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

lternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

ing lamps

irbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

nti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

lectronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

lectronic Stability Programme . . . . . . . . . . 68

ngine management (EPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Exeo_EN.book Seite 312 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Steering

Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Manual steering wheel adjustment . . . . . . 165

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Supplementary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Switches in the driver door

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Symbols

Red symbols in central display . . . . . . . . . . 77

Yellow symbols in central display . . . . . . . . 79

T TCS

How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 20

The environment

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Roof racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Warming up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 292

tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 182

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Tow starting

Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 286

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Notes on towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 198

Removable towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Towing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Traction control system

How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Turn signal lamps

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Trailer turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Tyre Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 90, 237

Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Tyre repair kit

Tyre Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Tyres and wheels

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Tyres

Tyres

Tyres

U Unde

V Vehi

Vehi

Vehi

Vehi

E

Vehi

Vehi

M

P

Vehi

Vent

W Warn

A

Warn

A

A

E

E

E

Index 313

Exeo_EN.book Seite 313 Dienstag, 20. April 2010 9:39 09

Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . 66

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Red symbols in central display . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Yellow symbols in central display . . . . . . . . 79

Warning lamps - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 210

Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Wearing suitable shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 292

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 28

Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?

13

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 19, 28

Windows

Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Windscreen wiper blades

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Winter

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Winter conditions

Defrost function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Winter driving

Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Winter operations

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Wiper and washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.02.10

Portada ALTEA_interior.qxd:maquetacin 30/3/10 12:16 Pgina 3

EX EO

O W

N ER </

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Exeo Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Exeo Edition 02.10 2010 Sedan Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Exeo as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Exeo. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Exeo Edition 02.10 2010 Sedan Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Exeo Edition 02.10 2010 Sedan Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Exeo Edition 02.10 2010 Sedan Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Exeo Edition 02.10 2010 Sedan Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Exeo Edition 02.10 2010 Sedan Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.